Siemens Synco 700 RMH760B Heating Controller, Synco 700 RMZ782B Heating Circuit Module, Synco 700 RMZ783B DHW Module, Synco 700 RMZ787, RMZ789 Universal Module Basic Documentation
Below you will find brief information for Heating Controller Synco 700 RMH760B, Heating Circuit Module Synco 700 RMZ782B. The Synco™ 700 RMH760B is a modular controller for heating systems, allowing for flexible configuration to meet specific needs. It can be used with various sensors and actuators to control and monitor the heating process, including boiler temperature, heating circuit, and domestic hot water (DHW). The Synco™ 700 RMH760B also provides features for automatic frost protection, time-based control, holiday mode, and fault handling. The Heating Circuit Module Synco 700 RMZ782B is used together with the base module to expand functionality to operate multiple heating circuits, each with individual settings for room temperature, flow temperature, and other parameters. The RMH760B is a comprehensive and user-friendly solution for advanced heating system management.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Synco
™
700
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
including extension modules RMZ782B, RMZ783B, RMZ787 and RMZ789
Basic Documentation
Edition 1.0
Controller series B
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Building Technologies Group
HVAC Products
Gubelstrasse 22
CH – 6301 Zug
Tel. +41 41 724 24 24
Fax +41 41 724 35 22 www.sbt.siemens.com
2/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
© 2007 Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Subject to alteration
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Contents
Entering the commissioning mode ................................................................ 19
Terminal assignment and properties of outputs ............................................ 28
Short designations for basic module and extension modules ....................... 29
Configuration of the universal inputs and outputs ......................................... 34
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Contents
3/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
4/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
5 General functions, fundamentals ...............................................................44
Control inputs for holidays and special days..................................................49
Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun .......................................................52
Overload message and supervision of flow ...................................................62
Boiler operating modes and boiler setpoints..................................................69
Test mode and commissioning aids...............................................................70
2-position control with 1-stage burner............................................................71
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Contents
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Control of burner’s basic stage and stage 2 .................................................. 72
Maximum limitation of the boiler temperature................................................ 79
Minimum limitation of the boiler temperature................................................. 79
Optimization of minimum boiler temperature................................................. 79
Protection against boiler overtemperatures................................................... 80
Frost protection for plant with boiler pump .................................................... 80
Maintained boiler return temperature ............................................................ 82
Protection against pressure shocks............................................................... 84
Burner hours run counter and burner start counter ......................................... 88
Heat demand and heat requests ................................................................ 92
8 Main controller and primary controller...................................................... 97
Heat demand and heat request ................................................................... 100
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Contents
5/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
6/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Limitation of the return temperature.............................................................105
Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun .....................................................108
3-position or modulating mixing valve..........................................................113
Operating modes in the heating circuit ........................................................113
Room operating mode contact.....................................................................115
Room operating mode outputs.....................................................................116
Room temperature setpoint adjuster, absolute ............................................121
Room temperature setpoint adjuster, relative ..............................................123
Weather-compensated heating circuit control..............................................123
The composite and the attenuated outside temperature .............................124
Influences on the flow temperature setpoint ................................................126
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Contents
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Quick setback and boost heating ................................................................ 133
Maximum limitation of the room temperature .............................................. 134
Minimum limitation of the return temperature .............................................. 137
Frost functions and general protective functions ......................................... 137
Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun ..................................................... 139
Acquisition of the room temperature............................................................ 140
3-position or modulating mixing valve ......................................................... 150
Operating modes and setpoints................................................................... 151
Control priorities in DHW heating mode ...................................................... 153
Charging control via the storage tank temperature ..................................... 156
Legionella protection with direct DHW heating............................................ 165
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Contents
7/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
8/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Limitation of the return temperature.............................................................171
Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun .....................................................173
Text designation for DHW and time switches ..............................................175
Primary flow temperature sensor .................................................................175
Setting and resetting meter readings ...........................................................185
12 Function block miscellaneous..................................................................187
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Contents
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
State diagrams of the individual types of faults ........................................... 197
Analog fault input with limit value supervision ............................................. 199
Calendar data (holidays and special days).................................................. 205
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Contents
9/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
10/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Contents
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
1 Summary
1.1 Product range
Type of unit
Controller
Extension modules
Heating controller
Heating circuit module
ence
RMH760B
RMZ782B
Module connector
Operator units
Service unit
For detached extension modules
Operator unit, plug-in type
Operator unit, detached
Konnex bus operator unit
Service tool
RMZ780
RMZ790
RMZ791
RMZ792
OCI700.1
RMH760B
RMZ782B
RMZ783B
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
1 Summary
11/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
1.2 System
QAW740 RXB…
Konnex TP1
RMZ790
RMZ791
RMH760B RMU7… RM…
OCI700.1
1.3 Equipment
Type of unit Type reference Data Sheet no.
Passive sensors All types of QA… sensors with a sensing ele-
Outside sensors ment LG-Ni 1000
QAC22 with a sensing element LG-Ni 1000
N1713 and
N1721…N1846
N1811
QAC32 with a sensing element NTC 575 N1811
QLS60 N1943 Solar intensity sensor
Room units
Passive setpoint adjusters
QAA25 N1721
QAA27 N1721
QAW740 N1633
BSG21.1 N1981
Actuating devices
BSG21.5 N1991
QAA25, QAA27
All types of electromotoric and electrohydraulic actuators
• operating on AC 24 V
• for 3-position control
• for modulating DC 0…10 V control
N1721
For more detailed information about actuators and valves, refer to:
N4000…N4999
12/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
1 Summary
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
1.4 Product
In addition to this Basic Documentation, the product documents listed below provide detailed information about the safe and correct deployment and operation of
Synco™ 700 products in building services plant.
Type of document
Product range description "HVAC controllers with Konnex interface”
Data Sheet “Heating controller RMH760B”
Data Sheet “Extension modules RMZ782B and RMZ783B”
Basic Documentation "Universal controllers RMU7…"
Data Sheet “Universal modules RMZ785, RMZ787, RMZ788, RMZ789”
Data Sheet “Module connector RMZ780”
Data Sheet "Konnex bus KNX"
Data Sheet “Service tool OCI700.1”
Installation Instructions for RMH760B and RMK770
Mounting Instructions for extension modules RMZ78…
Mounting Instructions for detached operator unit RMZ791
N5655
G3133
M3110
M3112
Mounting Instructions for module connector RMZ780
Operating Instructions for heating controller RMH760B-1 de, fr, it, es
Operating Instructions for heating controller RMH760B-2 en, de, fr, nl
Operating Instructions for heating controller RMH760B-3 sv, fi, no, da
M3138
B3133x1
B3133x2
B3133x3
Operating Instructions for heating controller RMH760B-4 pl, cs, sk, hu, ru, bg B3133x4
Operating Instructions for heating controller RMH760B-5 sr, hr, sl, ro, el, tr
B3133x5
Basic Documentation "Communication with Konnex bus"
Declaration of CE Conformity, Synco 700
Environmental Declaration for controllers RMH760B, RMU710…730
Environmental Declaration for extension modules RMZ78…
Environmental Declaration for operator units RMZ79…
Number
S3110
N3133
N3136
P3150
N3146
N3138
N3127
P3127
T3110
E3110…01
E3110…02
E3110…03
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
1 Summary
13/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Field of use
Correct use
Electrical installation
Commissioning
Operation
Wiring
Storage and transport
Maintenance
Faults
Disposal
1.5 Important
This symbol shall draw your attention to special safety notes and warnings. If such notes are not observed, personal injury and / or considerable damage to property can occur.
Synco™ 700 products may only be used for the control and supervision of heating, ventilation, air conditioning and chilled water plant.
Prerequisites for flawless and safe operation of Synco™ 700 products are correct transport, installation, commissioning, and operation.
Fuses, switches, wiring and earthing must be in compliance with local safety regulations for electrical installations.
Preparation for use and commissioning of Synco™ 700 products must be undertaken by qualified staff who have been appropriately trained by SBT HVAC Products.
Synco™ 700 products may only be operated by staff who have been instructed by SBT
HVAC Products or their delegates and whose attention has been drawn to potential risks.
When wiring the system, the AC 23 0V section must be strictly separated from the
AC 24 V safety extra low-voltage (SELV) section in order to ensure protection against electric shock!
For storage and transport, the limits given in the relevant Data Sheets must always be observed.
If in doubt, contact your supplier or SBT HVAC Products.
Synco™ 700 products are maintenance-free, apart from cleaning at regular intervals.
System sections accommodated in the control panel should be freed from dust and dirt whenever normal service visits are due.
Should system faults occur and you are not authorized to make diagnostics and to rectify faults, call SBT service staff.
Only authorized staff are permitted to make diagnostics, to rectify faults and to restart the plant. This also applies to work carried out within the control panel (e.g. safety checks or changing fuses).
The products contain electrical and electronic components and must not be disposed of together with domestic waste.
Current local legislation must be observed.
14/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
1 Summary
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
2 Operation
Synco™ 700 devices may only be operated by staff who have been instructed by SBT
HVAC Products or their delegates and whose attention has been drawn to potential risks.
2.1 Operation without operator unit
Without operator unit, the following operating elements on the controller and extension module can be used:
1
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
2 3 4 5
Controller
1 LED (Run) for indicating the controller’s operating state:
LED lit
LED off:
Power on, correct use and no fault in the peripheral devices
No power or incorrect use / faulty peripheral devices
2 Button with LED (red) for indicating fault status messages and their acknowledgement:
LED flashes:
LED lit:
Fault status message ready for acknowledgement
Fault status message still present but not yet reset
LED off:
No fault status message present
Press button:
Acknowledgement of fault or reset
3 Button (Prog) for assigning the device address in Konnex system mode (tool required)
4 LED (Prog) for indicating programming:
LED lit:
LED remains lit until addressing is completed
5 LED (Run) for monitoring power supply and addressing:
LED lit:
Power on, addressing successful
LED flashes:
Power on, controller has not yet a valid Konnex address
LED off:
No power
2.2 Operation with operator unit
2.2.1 Functions of the operator unit
The operator unit is used to make all settings and readouts required for operating the controller. All entries made on the operator unit are transmitted to the controller where they are handled and stored; the operator unit itself does not store any data. Information for the user is generated by the controller and forwarded to the operator unit where it is displayed.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
2 Operation
15/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
General
Operating elements
2
1
2
1
5
2.2.2 Operating
On the software side, all setting and readout values are arranged as datapoints of the menu tree. Using the operating elements, every datapoint can be selected, displayed or set. All menus appear on the LCD as clear text.
The controller has several languages preprogrammed; when commissioning the plant, the required language is to be activated. The Operating Instructions for the enduser are included with the controller; they contain the languages with which the controller is supplied.
3
4
Plug-in type operator unit
RMZ790
Display examples
16/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
5
1 Display
3
4
Detached operator unit
RMZ791
Function 1:
Turn:
Display of key plant data
Function 2: Display of information about the individual datapoints on the current menu
3 OK select-and-press knob
Selection of operating line and adjustment of value
Press:
Confirmation of operating line or setting
4 ESC button: Going back to the previous menu
LED:
Press:
Fault
Acknowledge or reset the fault
When one of the operating elements is used, the backlit display will automatically be switched on. If there is no action for 30 minutes, the display is switched off and the start page appears.
Start display:
Wednesday 15.11.2006
Welcome
Information
Main menu:
14:52
Setting level. Selection of a setting parameter, e.g. on the ”Main menu“ of the user level:
Main menu:
Time switch
Room operating mode
Controller 1
Controller 2
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
2 Operation
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setting level, pop-up, setting a numerical value:
Entry 1
End
Reason
25.02
––.––.–– ––.––
Holidays
Setting level, Help picture ”Explanations relating to the selected datapoint”. In the corner at bottom right, the text identification number of the menu tree appears (only service level and password level):
Main me> Heatin1> Heating
[Curvepoint 1] flow temp:
486
Info level, “Display of key plant data”:
Heating circuit 1
Preselection:
State: Comfort
Info level
Setting level
Switching between the operating levels
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
2.2.3 Operating
There are 2 operating levels:
• Info level
• Setting level
• These 2 levels are always active, independent of the access level used
When on this level, important plant data can be displayed.
The setting level is structured like a menu. It provides for reading and adjustment of datapoints.
Using the INFO button, explanations relating to the menus with the individual datapoints can be displayed. The information is displayed as long as the button is kept depressed.
• Switching from the info level to the setting level:
1. Select the start page by pressing the ESC button.
2. Press the OK knob to change to the setting level.
• Switching from the setting level to the info level:
1. Select the start page with the ESC button. Press the button repeatedly until the start page reappears.
2. Press the INFO button to change to the info level.
2.2.4 Access
An access right is defined for each parameter (operating line). There are 3 access levels:
Level Access
User level (for the plant operator)
The user level is always accessible.
All datapoints visible and alterable here can be changed by the plant operator
Symbol
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
2 Operation
17/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Switching to another access level
Password
District heat parameters
Level Access
Service level
(for the service engineer)
Password level
(for the heating engineer)
Press simultaneously the OK knob and the ESC button; then, select Service level and confirm by pressing the OK knob
Commissioning:
Press simultaneously the OK knob and the ESC button; then, select Password level and confirm by pressing the OK knob; enter numeral 7 for the password and confirm by pressing the OK knob
Symbol
District heat parameters:
Press simultaneously the OK knob and the ESC button; then, select Password level and confirm by pressing the OK knob; enter numeral 11 for the password and confirm by pressing the OK knob
Individual menu items or individual datapoints are enabled depending on the access level. On a higher access level, it is always possible to also view all menu items and datapoints of the lower access levels.
There is only one menu (the password level shows the entire menu).
• After a time-out (30 minutes with no action on the controller), the controller switches to the user level, unless the controller uses the Commissioning menu
• Switching from the current access level to another access level:
1. Press simultaneously the OK knob and the ESC button. The Access levels menu appears.
2. Select the required access level by turning the OK knob and confirm by pressing the knob.
3. Enter the password to access the password level.
The password can be changed via the ACS7… plant operating software.
These parameters can be prescribed by the district heating plant.
After entry of the respective password, the settings for maximum limitation of the return temperature and for the pulse limitations can be entered.
18/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
2 Operation
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type
Position
Setting
Plant types
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
3 Commissioning
Preparations for using and commissioning the Synco™ 700 controllers must be made by qualified staff who have been appropriately trained by SBT HVAC Products.
3.1 Entering the commissioning mode
During commissioning, both control and the plant’s safety functions remain deactivated!
The relays are deenergized, which means that their normally open contacts are open.
When supplying power to the controller for the first time, the Language menu appears.
Here, the language used for commissioning and operating the plant can be selected.
After the language has been selected and confirmed with the OK knob, the time of day, date and year can be set in the same way. Then, the Commissioning menu will appear.
The access level is automatically set to Password level.
The Plant type menu offers a number of plant types for selection.
When the controller is commissioned for the first time, follow Installation Instructions
G3133; they are enclosed with the controller.
3.2 Basic
A plant is always configured on the password levels and (district heat parameters).
Main menu > Commissioning > Basic configuration
Operating line
Plant type
Position 1
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Basic type H / H0-1…H6-7
--- / RMZ782 / RMZ783 / RMZ787 / RMZ789
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
--- / RMZ782 / RMZ783 / RMZ787 / RMZ789
--- / RMZ782 / RMZ783 / RMZ787 / RMZ789
--- / RMZ782 / RMZ783 / RMZ787 / RMZ789
On operating line Plant type, the plant type will be entered or displayed.
On operating lines Position 1 through Position 4, it is selected or displayed which of the extension modules is required. If an extension module is provided for use with the selected plant type, it is already preconfigured.
Display of “---“ means that no module has been configured.
3.2.1 Selecting the plant type
The first setting to be made is always the plant type because when selecting the type of plant, the majority of settings are reset to their default values.
Following will not be reset:
• Texts
• Business card
• Device name
• Terminal types
• Time switch
• Holiday program
The RMH760B contains 41 plant types. If required, every type of plant can subsequently be changed or complemented via “Extra configuration”.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
19/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Basic type H
Designation of plant type
Plant type and DHW type
Note
With basic type H, no configuration is predefined. The plant type is to be selected if the subject plant differs considerably from the preconfigured plant types, so that the effort required for an adaptation would be greater than the effort required for manual configuration.
The plant type is made up of the letter “H” and a 2-digit numeral (e.g. H4-5):
• The first digit defines the type of heat generation or heat distribution
• The second digit defines the type and number of internal consumers
First digit of plant type Second digit of plant type:
Heat generation / distribution
0 None
1 Main controller for district heat
2 Primary controller for external consumers only
3 Heat source
Consumer
0 None
2 Control of one heating circuit
3 DHW heating and control of one heating circuit
4 Control of 2 heating circuits 4 Heat source with maintained boiler return temperature
5 Consumer connected to district heating with storage tank charging and control of mixing valve as a preselected DHW type
5 DHW heating and control of 2 heating circuits
6 Consumer connected to district heating with direct DHW heating as a preselected DHW type
6 Control of 3 heating circuits
7 DHW heating and control of 3 heating circuits
By selecting the plant type, the assigned plant functions will automatically be made available.
With plant types Hx-1, Hx-3, Hx-5 and Hx-7, DHW heating is activated by default. The default type of DHW heating plant varies depending on the plant type.
Plant type
H0-x, H2-x, H3-x, H4-x
H1-x
H5-x
H6-x
Default type of DHW heating plant
DHW 2
DHW 4
DHW 3
DHW 6
DHW = domestic hot water (used throughout document CE1P3133en)
20/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant types
Plant type
Description
H
Basic type
H0-1
N1:
DHW circuit with controlled mixing valve in the storage tank flow and charging pump, connected directly to uncontrolled main flow (DHW type DHW 2)
Plant diagram
No preconfigured inputs and outputs
H0-1
N.X1
N.Q4
N.Q1/Q2
N.X2
H0-2
N1:
Weather-compensated heating circuit control with mixing valve and circulating pump, connected directly to uncontrolled main flow
H0-2
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N1
N.Q1/Q2
H0-3
A3:
N1:
DHW circuit (DHW 2)
Heating circuit
H0-4
N1:
A2:
Heating circuit
Heating circuit
H0-3
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
N1
A3.X2
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
H0-4
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
A3
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
N1
H0-5
A3:
N1:
A2:
DHW circuit (DHW 2)
Heating circuit
Heating circuit
H0-5
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
N1
A3.X2
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
A2
H0-6
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
A3
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
N1
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2
H0-6
N1:
Heating circuit
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
H0-7
A3:
N1:
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
DHW circuit (DHW 2)
Heating circuit
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
H0-7
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
N1
A3.X2
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
A2(1)
A3 N1
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2(2)
A2(1)
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2(2)
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
21/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type
Description
H1-0
N1:
Main controller (district heat connection with heat exchanger), control of secondary flow temperature with 2-port valve in the primary return, supply to internal and external consumers
H1-1
H1-2
H1-3
N1:
A3:
N1:
A2:
N1:
A3:
A2:
Plant diagram
H1-0
N.Q1/Q2
N.X3
N1
H1-1
Main controller
DHW circuit, storage tank charging via heat exchanger with controlled mixing valve, with primary and secondary pump (DHW 4)
Main controller
N.Q1/Q2 N.X3
N1
H1-2
N.X2
Weather-compensated heating circuit control with mixing valve and circulating pump, connected to the secondary circuit of the main flow
Main controller
N.Q1/Q2
N.X3
N1
H1-3
N.X2
DHW circuit (DHW 4)
Heating circuit
N.X1
A3.Q5
N.X1
A3.Q1/Q2
N.X1
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3.Q5
A3.X4
A3.X4
A3
A2
A3.Q3
A3.Q3
N.X1
A3.Q1/Q2
A3.X2
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
H1-4
N1:
Main controller
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
N.Q1/Q2
N.X3
N1
H1-4
N.X2
N.X1
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2
H1-5
N1:
Main controller
A3:
DHW circuit (DHW 4)
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
H2-0
N1:
Demand-compensated primary controller with mixing valve and circulating pump, supply to external consumers
N.Q1/Q2
N.X3
N1
H1-5
N.X2
A2(1)
A3.Q5
N.X1
A3.Q1/Q2
A3.X4
A3.Q3
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2(2)
N.Q1/Q2
N.X3
N1
H2-0
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
A3 A2(1)
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2(2)
N1
22/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type
Description
H2-1
N1:
Primary controller
A3:
DHW circuit with controlled mixing valve in the storage tank flow and charging pump (DHW 2)
Plant diagram
H2-1
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
H2-2
N1:
A2:
Primary controller
Weather-compensated heating circuit control with mixing valve and circulating pump
N1
H2-2
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3
A3.X2
H2-3
N1:
A3:
A2:
Primary controller
DHW circuit (DHW 2)
Heating circuit
H2-4
N1:
Primary controller
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
N1
H2-3
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
N1
H2-4
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
A2
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2
H2-5
N1:
Primary controller
A3:
DHW circuit (DHW 2)
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
N1
H2-5
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.Q1/Q2
H3-0
N1:
Boiler temperature control with 1stage burner and boiler pump
N1
H3-0
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
H3-1
N1:
A3:
N1
Boiler temperature control
DHW circuit with controlled mixing valve in the storage tank flow and charging pump (DHW 2)
H3-1
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
N1
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
A2(1)
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2(2)
A3 A2(1)
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2(2)
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
A3.X2
A3
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
23/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type
H3-2
Description
N1:
A2:
Boiler temperature control
Weather-compensated heating circuit control with mixing valve and circulating pump
Plant diagram
H3-2
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
N.X3
N.Q5
H3-3
N1:
A3:
A2:
Boiler temperature control
DHW circuit (DHW 2)
Heating circuit
N1
H3-3
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
H3-4
N1:
Boiler temperature control
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
N1
H3-4
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
H3-5
N1:
A3:
Boiler temperature control
DHW circuit (DHW 2)
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
N1
H3-5
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
N1
H4-0
N1:
Boiler temperature control with 1stage burner and boiler pump, controlled mixing valve for maintained boiler return temperature
H4-1
H4-2
N1:
A3:
N1:
A2:
H4-0
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
N.Q1/Q2
N1
Boiler temperature control
DHW circuit with controlled mixing valve in the storage tank flow and charging pump (DHW 2)
H4-1
N.X1
N.Q3
Boiler temperature control
Weather-compensated heating circuit control with mixing valve and circulating pump
N.X3
N.Q5
H4-2
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q1/Q2
N1
N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
N.Q1/Q2
N1
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
A2
A3
A2(1)
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3
A3
A2
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2
A2(2)
A2(1)
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2(2)
24/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type
Description
H4-3
H4-4
H4-5
N1:
A3:
A2:
Boiler temperature control
DHW circuit (DHW 2)
Heating circuit
N1:
Boiler temperature control
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
N1:
A3:
Boiler temperature control
DHW circuit (DHW 2)
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
H5-2
N1:
Weather-compensated heating circuit control via heat exchanger connected to uncontrolled main flow, with 2-port valve in the primary return
Plant diagram
H4-3
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
H4-4
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q1/Q2
N1
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2 N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
H4-5
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q1/Q2
N1
A3
A2(1)
N.Q3
N.X3
N.Q5
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
N.Q1/Q2
N1 A3
H5-2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X2
N.X3
N.Q1/Q2
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2
A2(2)
A2(1)
H5-3
A3:
N1:
DHW circuit with storage tank charging via heat exchanger connected to uncontrolled main flow (DHW 3)
Heating circuit
N1
H5-3
A3.X4
A3.Q3
A3.Q1/Q2
A3.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X2
N.X3
N.Q1/Q2
H5-4
N1:
A2:
Heating circuit
Heating circuit
H5-4
N.X1
N.Q3
A3
N.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
N.X3
N.Q1/Q2
N1
A2.X3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2(2)
H5-5
A3
N1:
A2:
DHW circuit (DHW 3)
Heating circuit
Heating circuit
N1
H5-5
A3.X4
A3.Q3
A3.Q1/Q2
A3.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
A2
N.X2
N.X3
N.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.X3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3 N1 A2
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
25/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type
Description
H5-6
N1:
Heating circuit
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
Plant diagram
H5-6
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
A2.X1
A2.Q3
N.X3
N.Q1/Q2
A2.X3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.X3
A2.Q1/Q2
H5-7
A3:
DHW circuit (DHW 3)
Heating circuit
N1:
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
N1
H5-7
A3.X4
A3.Q3
A3.Q1/Q2
A3.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
A2(1)
N.X2
N.X3
N.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2(2)
A2.X3
A2.Q1/Q2
A3
H6-1
N1:
Direct DHW consumption via heat exchanger connected to uncontrolled main flow, with circulating pump (DHW 6)
H6-1
N.X5
N.Y1
N.Q5
N1 A2(1)
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2(2)
A2.X3
A2.Q1/Q2
H6-3
N1:
DHW circuit (DHW 6) and weather-compensated heating circuit control via heat exchangers with 2-port valve in the primary return
H6-3
N.X5
N.Y1
N.Q5
N.X1
N.Q3
N1
N.X2
N.X3
N.Q1/Q2
N1
H6-5
N1:
A2:
DHW circuit (DHW 6) and heating circuit
Heating circuit
H6-5
N.X5
N.Y1
N.Q5
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
N.X3
N.Q1/Q2
A2.X3
A2.Q1/Q2
N1 A2
H6-7
N1:
DHW circuit (DHW 6) and heating circuit
A2(1):
Heating circuit
A2(2):
Heating circuit
H6-7
N.X5
N.Y1
N.Q5
N.X1
N.Q3
N.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
N.X3
N.Q1/Q2
A2.X3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.X3
A2.Q1/Q2
N1 A2(1) A2(2)
Q5
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
N.
A2.
Connection terminals of heating controller N1
Connection terminals of heating circuit module RMZ782B
A2(1) Connection terminals of the first heating circuit module RMZ782B, if 2 heating circuit modules are used
A2(2) Connection terminals of the second heating module RMZ782B, if 2 heating circuit modules are used
A3. Connection terminals of the DHW module RMZ783B
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Relay terminals, consisting of Q11, Q12 and Q14 (e.g. actuator)
Relay terminals, consisting of Q23 and Q24 (e.g. actuator)
Relay terminals, consisting of Q33 and Q34 (e.g. heating circuit pump)
Relay terminals, consisting of Q41, Q42 and Q44 (e.g. storage tank charging pump)
Relay terminals, consisting of Q53 and Q54 (e.g. boiler pump)
Configurable input for main controlled variable (e.g. flow temperature)
Configurable input for auxiliary controlled variable (e.g. outside temperature)
Configurable input for auxiliary controlled variable (e.g. return temperature)
Configurable input for auxiliary controlled variable (e.g. sensor for secondary storage tank flow)
Configurable input for auxiliary controlled variable (e.g. sensor for secondary storage tank flow)
26/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Sensor assignment
When selecting the plant type, the sensors required for the basic functions and standard outputs will automatically be predefined and, for this reason, need not be configured.
Preconfiguration of plant types
Every plant type has several plant components preconfigured. The following summary shows the assignment of the plant components to the connection terminals.
1 = TStTaTopDhw
2 = TStTaBotDhw
VlvDhwCons
TFlDhwCons
TOx
TBo
BuMdlt
T
BuSt1
BuSt2
TRtBo
V
BoPu
V
BoByPu
TFlSecDhw
TFlPrDhw
DhwPrPu
MnPu
VlvPrDhw
V
TFlMnPrCtr
DhwSecPu
TRtDhw
1
2
VlvPreHeatSecDhw
V
DhwCiPu
PrCtrPu
VlvPrCtr
TFlPrCtr
TFlHCx
PuHCx
V
TRtPrCtr
VlvHCx
TRtHCx
VlvShOf
VlvRtMx
VlvMnPrCtr
TRtMnPrCtr
BoPu
BuMdlt
BuSt1
BuSt2
DhwSecPu
DhwCiPu
DhwPrPu
MnPu
PrCtrPu
PUHCx
TBo
TFlDhwCons
TFlSecDhw
TFlHCx
TFlMnPrCtr
TFlPrCtr
TFlPrDhw
TOx
TRtBo
TRtHCx
TRtMnPrCtr
TRtPrCtr
TStTaBotDhw
TStTaTopDhw
VlvMnPrCtr
VlvPrCtr
VlvPrDhw
VlvPreHeatSecDhw
VlvHCx
VlvRtMx
VlvDhwCons
VlvShOff
Boiler pump
Burner modulation
Burner stage 1
Burner stage 2
DHW secondary pump
DHW circulating pump
DHW primary pump
Main controller pump
Primary controller pump (system pump)
Heating circuit pump x (x =1…3)
Boiler temperature
DHW flow temperature consumer
DHW flow temperature secondary side
Flow temperature heating circuit x (x = 1…3)
Flow temperature main controller
Flow temperature primary controller
DHW flow temperature primary side
Outside temperature x (x = 1…3)
Boiler return temperature
Heating circuit x – return temperature (x = 1…3)
Main controller return temperature
Primary controller return temperature
DHW storage tank temperature at the bottom
DHW storage tank temperature at the top
Valve main controller
Mixing valve primary controller
Primary mixing valve DHW
Valve for maintained secondary temperature
Mixing valve heating circuit x (x = 1…3)
Boiler return mixing valve
Consumer mixing valve DHW
Shut off valve boiler
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
27/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Outputs with changeover contacts
Terminals for 3-position control
Outputs with RC units
3.2.2 Terminal assignment and properties of outputs
In principle, all input and output terminals can be freely used. The terminals preassigned when selecting the plant type can also be reconfigured. In that case, however, the special properties of the individual extension modules, and their outputs, must be taken into consideration.
For the control of a shutoff valve, an on / off signal is usually required. For that purpose, a number of relays with changeover contacts are available.
In the case of the RMH760B and RMZ789, these are the outputs Q1 and Q4, in the case of the RMZ783B, outputs Q1 and Q5, in the case of the RMZ782B, output Q1, and in the case of the RMZ787, output Q5.
The relay outputs for the on / off signal of 3-position control are assigned as pairs.
Available for selection are terminals Q1/Q2 and Q3/Q4. For that purpose, special pairs of terminals must be used.
Normally, for 3-position control of a mixing valve or modulating burner with on / off signal, appropriate radio interference suppression measures must be taken. If the mixing valve does not already incorporate such an RC unit, appropriate devices must be provided, either on the controller side or externally.
Basic connection diagram
Q11
Q23
Q12 Q14
N1 Q24 N2
Y1 N Y2
Controller RMH760B and extension modules
RMZ782B and RMZ783B
Connection of suppression units
When terminals N1 and N2 or N3 and N4 are interconnected and wired to N, the RC unit for outputs Q1/Q2 or Q3/Q4 is activated.
RMH760B
RMZ782B
RMZ783B
Q1 N1 N2 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q1 N1 N2 Q2 Q3 Q1 N1 N2 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5
On the RMH760B basic unit and the RMZ782B and RMZ783B extension modules, terminal pair Q1/Q2 is used for activating an RC unit.
Universal module RMZ789
RMZ789
Q1 N1 N2 Q2 Q3 N3 N4 Q4
With the RMZ789 extension module, there are 4 mixing valve outputs available (for 2 mixing valves), where an RC unit can be activated.
Universal module RMZ787 The outputs of the RMZ787 extension module cannot be used as a 3-position output.
28/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type H4-5
3.2.3 Short designations for basic module and extension modules
The following short designations are used for the basic module and the extension modules:
Short designation
Type of module
A2
A2(1)
A2(2)
A3
A7
A9
A9(1)
Extension module RMZ782B
First of 2 extension modules RMZ782B
Second of 2 extension modules RMZ782B
Extension module RMZ783B
Extension module RMZ787
Extension module RMZ789
First extension module RMZ789
A9(2) Second extension module RMZ789
These short designations also appear on the operator unit.
3.2.4 Use of the configuration diagrams
Use of the configuration diagrams is explained on the basis of plant type H4-5.
H4-5
N.X2
N.X1
N.Q3
A3.X1
A3.Q5
A3.X2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
A2.X1
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
N.X3
N.Q5
A3.Q1/Q2
N.Q1/Q2
N1 A3 A2(1) A2(2)
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
29/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Configuration diagram for plant type H4-5
Configuration Diagram
RMH760B
Maximum configuration:
4 Extension modules
( )
1) 6 Single or twin pumps
2) 6 Control outputs (DC 0...10 V or 3-positioning)
Plant type
H4-5
N.X1
N.X2
N.X3
N.X4
N.X5
N.X6
RMH760
A2.X1
A2.X2
A2.X3
RMZ782 (1)
Capital letter = Physical in- or output
X = Universal input
Y = Analog output
Q = Relay output
A2.X1
A2.X2
RMZ782 (2)
A2.X3
A3.X1
A3.X2
A3.X3
A3.X4
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Small letter = internal signal x = Analog or digital a = Analog d = Digital i = Pulse
RMZ783
A7.X1
A7.X2
A7.X3
RMZ787
A7.X4
To do a configuration
= from
= to
From capital letter to capital letter
From small letter to small letter
A9.X1
A9.X2
A9.X3
A9.X4
RMZ789 (1)
A9.X5
A9.X6
= Or-selection
= And-selection
= Contin. output
= 2-Pos. output
A9.X1
A9.X2
A9.X3
A9.X4
= Time switch
= Holiday
= Special day
= Fault
= Feedback
RMZ789 (2)
A9.X5
A9.X6
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x a a d d d a d d d
B
V
2)
Heat requis.
Main controller
Main pump
Heat demand
1)
B
3P
Y Q Q
Y Q a a d d d a d d d d
B
V d d d d
Pump funct:
Boilerp.
Bypassp.
Boiler
Stage Modulating
2)
1)
B
1. 2.
Q Q
3P
Y Y Q Q Q
MBRT
2)
3P
Y a
Q a a
Miscellaneous
a x x x x
3P a a a a
Y d d
Q
B
B
Q d
V
2)
Heating circuit 1
HC- pump
1)
d d d d
Q
R1 R2
Q Q a a d d d a
B
V d d d a a d
B
V
Primary Secondary
2) 1)
B
Maintain.
temp.
2)
1)
B
3P
Y Q Q
3P
Y Q Q
Tank
Q a
Primary
2)
3P
Y a d
Secondary a d d d d d d
B V
Consumer
DHW
Circulation
2) 1)
B
3P
Y Q Q Q a a d d d a d d d
B
V
2)
Heat requis.
Primary controller
System pump
1)
B
3P
Y Q Q a a a a a a d d d d d d d
B
V
Q
2)
Heating circuit 2
HC- pump
1)
B
3P
Y Q Q Q
R1 R2
Q Q d x x x x
Faults
Q Q i i i i
Counter
a a a a a a d d d d d d d
B
V
Q
3P
2)
Heating circuit 3
HC- pump
1)
B
Y Q Q Q
R1
R2
Q Q
Y Y Q
3P
Q Q Q Q Y
Q 3P
Q Q Y Q
3P
Q Q Y
Q 3P
Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Y Y
Q 3 P
Q Q
3P
Q Y Y Q
3 P
Q Q
3P
Q
N.Y1
N.Y2
N.Q1
N.Q2
N1 N2
N.Q3
N.Q4
N.Q5
A2.Y1
A2.Q1
A2.Q2
N1 N2
A2.Q3
A2.Y1
A2.Q1
A2.Q2
N1 N2
A2.Q3
A3.Y1
A3.Q1
A3.Q2
N1 N2
A3.Q3
A3.Q4
A3.Q5
A7.Q1
A7.Q2
A7.Q3
A7.Q5
A9.Y1
A9.Y2
A9.Q1
A9.Q2
N1 N2
A9.Q3
A9.Q4
N3 N4
A9.Y1
A9.Y2
A9.Q1
A9.Q2
N1 N2
A9.Q3
A9.Q4
N3 N4
Function blocks
Controller
Inputs
Outputs
The configuration diagram shows all function blocks active in the plant type. In this example, these are the following types of function blocks:
• Boiler control including maintained boiler return temperature controlled via mixing valve
• Miscellaneous
• DHW heating
• Heating circuit 1
• Heating circuit 2
For additional examples, refer to subsection 16.1.4 “Examples”.
The configuration diagram shows the inputs and outputs preconfigured in the basic module.
This means that for an input variable (e.g. the boiler temperature), an input terminal
(e.g. X1) has already been preconfigured per default.
For plant type H4-5, the following inputs and outputs are preconfigured in the boiler temperature controller, that is, in function block “Boiler“:
Input variable
Boiler temperature
Boiler return temperature
Output variable
Actuator maintained boiler return temperature
1-stage burner
Boiler pump
Terminal
X1
X3
Terminals
Q3
Q5
Designation in diagram
N.X1
N.X3
Designation in diagram
Q1 and Q2 N.Q1/Q2
N.Q3
N.Q5
30/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Notes
Extension modules
Inputs
Outputs
Notes
Note
Order
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
• “N.“ in the tables denotes “controller“
• If required, additional inputs and outputs (e.g. flue gas temperature sensor, operating mode relay, circulating pump) can be assigned to the free inputs and outputs via “Extra configuration”
• The inputs and outputs can be checked with the help of menu Extra configuration > … >
Inputs (or Outputs)
• It is possible to reconfigure or remove preconfigured inputs and outputs
Example: When removing the second burner stage (“---“ in place of N.Q4, for example), the 2-stage burner becomes a 1-stage burner.
The configuration diagram shows the types of extension modules required.
Also shown are the inputs and outputs preconfigured in the extension modules. For plant type H4-5, extension modules RMZ782B(1), RMZ782B(2) and RMZ783B are used as standard. This can be viewed on the Basic configuration menu, operating lines
Position 1, Position 2 and Position 3.
The type of extension modules used can be changed, but in that case, all inputs and outputs of the changed module must be reconfigured.
Type of module
RMZ783B
Input variable
Primary flow sensor
Storage tank sensor at the top
Terminal Designation in diagram
X1 A3.X1
X2 A3.X2
X1
X1
A2.X1
A2.X1
Type of Output variable Terminal Designation in diagram module
RMZ783B 3-position primary mixing valve
Q1 and Q2 A3.Q1/Q2
Primary pump Q5 A3.Q5
3-position mixing valve Q1 and Q2 A2.Q1/Q2 RMZ782B(1)
RMZ782B(2)
Heating circuit pump
3-position mixing valve
Q3
Q1 and Q2
A2.Q3
A2.Q1/Q2
Heating circuit pump Q3 A2.Q3
• “A2.“ in the table denotes extension module RMZ782B, “A3“ denotes extension module RMZ783B.
• If required, additional inputs and outputs can be assigned to the free inputs and outputs via “Extra configuration”
• The inputs and outputs can be checked with the help of menu Extra configuration > … >
Inputs (or Outputs)
• Additional function blocks can be activated via “Extra configuration“
3.2.5 Extension modules
RMH760B RMZ78… RMZ78… RMZ78…
RMZ78…
A maximum of 4 extension modules can be connected to the RMH760B.
Prior to attaching an extension module, the plant must be disconnected from power.
The order in which the extension modules are fitted is not mandatory but must correspond to the setting made on the controller.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
31/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Assignment of functions
Number of extension modules per type
Plant type
Position …
Configuration example
When selecting the plant type, an extension module will automatically be preconfigured, if required. This can be changed in the basic configuration.
The assignment of functions to the basic module and the extension modules is not prescribed. Relay outputs for 3-position applications are preconfigured to the controller or the extension module type RMZ782B or RMZ783B.
The following types of extension modules can be connected to each RMH760B:
• Heating circuit module RMZ782B with 3 inputs and one modulating output plus 3 relay outputs (one relay with changeover contact). It is also possible to activate 2 relay outputs for the control of 3-position actuators with an RC unit
• DHW module RMZ783B with 4 inputs, one modulating output and 5 relay outputs (2 relays with changeover contact). It is also possible to activate 2 relay outputs for the control of 3-position actuators with an RC unit
• Universal module RMZ787 with 4 inputs and 4 relay outputs (one relay with changeover contact)
• Universal module RMZ789 with 6 inputs, 2 modulating outputs and 4 relay outputs (2 relays each for the control of 3-position actuators with RC units can be activated)
The extensions can be activated by configuring them at a free position of the controller.
The controller can accept a maximum of 4 extension modules. Of module types
RMZ783B (DHW) and RMZ787 (universal), a maximum of one module can be used, of heating circuit module type RMZ782B and universal module type RMZ789, a maximum of 2 of each.
3.2.6 Basic configuration
Configuration of the controller is always started by defining the plant type. Based on the selected plant type, the required types of extension modules are to be selected and will be displayed on the following lines:
Main menu > Commissioning > Basic configuration
Operating line
Plant type
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
--- = no module configured
Adjustable values / display / remarks
H / H0-1…H6-7
--- / RMZ782 / RMZ783 through RMZ789
--- / RMZ782 / RMZ783 through RMZ789
--- / RMZ782 / RMZ783 through RMZ789
--- / RMZ782 / RMZ783 through RMZ789
On operating line “Plant type”, the plant type is to be entered or will be displayed.
Operating lines Position 1…Position 4 display the type of extension module required. On these operating lines, the presettings can be changed or complemented. When changing a predefined extension module, all settings relating to these extension modules and made via “Extra configuration” must be adapted.
Position 2
RMH760B RMZ782B RMZ787
Main menu > Commissioning > Basic configuration
Operating line
Plant type
Position 1
Position 2
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Basic type H / H0-1…H6-7
RMZ782 (1)
RMZ787
32/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Position 1
Position 2
Positions 3 and 4
Additional inputs and outputs
Fault handling
Fault status messages
Example of flue gas temperature sensor
When using Position 1 in this example, extension module RMZ782B is selected.
Then, at position 2, module type RMZ787 is selected.
Positions 3 and 4 remain blank. They use setting “---“ and are confirmed with the OK knob, which means that they are left blank.
During the configuration, the ESC button can be pressed to return to the previous setting.
Once the configuration is started, it cannot be stopped! Configuration must be completed until the following message appears:
Caution!
New configuration
ESC
OK
Here, the configuration can be aborted.
Functions can be assigned to additional inputs and outputs via “Extra configuration”. If the maximum number of extension modules do not suffice, parts of the plant must be wired and configured to a second RMH760B.
If the extension modules actually used and their positions do not accord with the values entered, a fault status message Fault extension module will be delivered.
In the case of an incorrectly configured extension module, some other fault status message may also be displayed because that consequential fault has the higher priority than fault status message 7101. It is therefore of advantage to have all pending faults displayed.
Number Text Effect
7101 Fault extension module Urgent message; must be acknowledged
In the event of fault, the LEDs on the extension modules flash. If everything works correctly, the LEDs are lit.
3.3 Extra configuration
3.3.1 General
By configuring additional inputs and outputs, adaptations to the hydraulic circuit can be made, and extra functions and function blocks can be activated.
Depending on the selection of plant type, a number of function blocks have already been activated (e.g. boiler, main controller, DHW, heating circuit, etc.).
Also refer to subsection 3.2.4 "Use of the configuration diagrams".
When configuring an output, the relevant function block will automatically be activated.
The plant’s hydraulic circuit is determined by the basic configuration and the extra configuration of plant components, such as pumps and mixing valves, etc. In most cases, the configured outputs are decisive for the plant’s hydraulics.
Additional inputs and outputs can activate various functions. A description of these functions is given with the relevant function block.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Boiler > Inputs
Operating line
Flue gas temperature sensor
* Here, the free inputs are available for selection
Range
--- / RMH760… etc.*
Factory setting
---
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
33/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Example:
Maintained boiler return temperature
Maximum plant size
Analog inputs
Type reference
The inputs of the basic module will be termed RMH760.Xn, those of the extension modules RMZ… . If 2 identical extension modules are available, they will be termed
RMZ782(1) and RMZ782(2).
After the assignment, following appears: Flue gas temperature sensor N.X4 (N = short designation of basic module RMH760B).
By assigning input terminal RMK770.X4, the flue gas temperature sensor will be activated.
For other settings, refer to chapter 6 “Boiler temperature control”.
Assignments made or preconfigured can be removed again by using setting “---“
(none).
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Boiler > Outputs
Operating line Range
Maint boiler return temp 3-pos --- / RMH760… etc.*
* Here, the free 3-position outputs are available for selection
Factory setting
---
The free pairs of terminals available for selection depend on the configuration made
and the configured extension modules (refer to subsection 3.2.2 “Configuration of the
universal inputs and outputs”).
The maximum plant size is limited by the number of available terminals and the number of plant elements (pumps and actuators or positioning outputs):
Plant element Maximum number
Pumps 6
Positioning outputs 6
Following applies:
• A twin pump is regarded as one pump
• A positioning output is used for an actuator or a modulating burner. If both the modulating output and the 3-position positioning output are configured, the 2 are regarded as one positioning output
3.3.2 Configuration the universal inputs and outputs
The universal inputs can accept digital signals or passive and active analog signals.
The inputs are activated through basic and extra configuration. When activating an input, the respective unit is assigned also. For this reason, input identifiers on the
RMH760B cannot be set. Exceptions are the 4 universal display inputs and the 4 fault inputs.
The setting choices depend on the kind of configuration: Analog or digital input.
In the case of the analog inputs, the following setting choices are available:
• Type reference
• Measuring range
• Measured value correction
The RMH760B is supplied with type Ni 1000 preselected for the temperature sensor.
The following types of input signals can be handled:
• Ni 1000
• 2× Ni 1000
• T1
• Pt 1000
• DC 0…10 V
• NTC 575 (for outside temperature only)
34/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setting
Measuring range
Setting
Example
Measured value correction
Setting
Fault handling
Digital inputs
Configuration
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs > …X…
Operating line
Type reference
Range
Ni 1000 / 2 × Ni 1000 /
T1 / Pt 1000 /
DC 0…10 V / NTC 575*
* For outside temperature only
Factory setting
Ni 1000
Type of signal Type of sensing element / signal
Passive temperature signals LG-Ni 1000
Passive temperature signals 2 x LG-Ni 1000 / T1
Passive temperature signals Pt1000
Active signals DC 0…10 V
Measuring range
−50…+250 °C
−50…+150 °C
−50…+400 °C
Selectable. To be entered are a low and a high limit
−50…+500 °C
Passive temperature signals NTC575*
* For outside temperature only
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs > …X…
Operating line Range Factory setting
Value low Depending on the selected type
Value high Depending on the selected type
Flow temperature with an active signal of DC 0…10 V = 0…100 °C:
Lower limit value: 0 °C
Upper limit value: 100 °C
Depending on the type
Depending on the type
With passive temperature sensors, the measured value can be readjusted by
−3.0…+3.0 K to compensate for line resistance. It is thus possible to make onsite calibrations with a reference instrument.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs > …X…
Operating line Range Factory setting
Correction
−3.0…3.0 K
0.0 K
When the Commissioning menu is quit, a check is made to see which sensors are connected. If, later, one of the sensors connected at this point in time is missing, or if there is a short-circuit, a fault status message […] sensor error will be delivered.
If there is an error on the measuring line, the operator unit will display the measured value as follows:
• Open-circuit = ----
• Short-circuit =
Potential-free contacts for control functions can be connected to the digital inputs.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous > Input identifier
Operating line
Display input 1
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Digital
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
35/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Normal position
Operating line
Display input 2
Display input 3
Display input 4
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Digital
Digital
Digital
The input identifier can only be set for the configured inputs (display inputs and fault inputs).
Fault inputs can also be configured to terminals that are already used. In that case, the automatically set input identifier is always given priority.
The normal position can be predefined for each digital input.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs > ….X…
G
Operating line
Normal position
Range
Open / Closed
Factory setting
Open
F...
∆p
F...
Fault handling
G0
G
G0
X...
M X...
M
Digital signals cannot be monitored.
N
Inputs
Outputs
Example on the basis of heating circuit 1
3.4 Wiring test
A wiring test can be made with all connected peripheral devices. We recommend to conduct this test after the configuration and the settings have been made.
The current states are indicated at the inputs.
The aggregates connected to the outputs (pumps, actuators, etc. ) or messages (e.g. for conventional controllers) can be switched on and off.
In the case of modulating outputs, a signal can be delivered in the relevant value range.
The application is deactivated during the wiring test. The outputs are in a defined off state; safety-related functions are deactivated.
When making the wiring test, the inputs and outputs are to be checked for the following types of errors:
• Connection fault (wires have been mixed up)
• Position fault (wires of sensor or actuator have been mixed up)
• Discrepancy between the actual type of connection and the controller’s configuration
(e.g. LG-Ni 1000 in place of DC 0…10 V)
Main menu > Commissioning > Wiring test > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs
Operating line
Actual value flow temp
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Display of the current measured value
36/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Displays
Setting
Main menu > Commissioning > Wiring test > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Outputs
Operating line
Heating circuit pump
Positions
Off / On
3.5 Completing commissioning
If the application is valid, the Commissioning menu can be quit as follows:
1. Press the ESC button. The display shows a menu with the following information:
Caution!
Plant starts
ESC OK
2. Confirm by pressing the OK knob. Then, the controller starts with the settings made; the plant is started up, and the Main menu appears on the display.
Main menu:
Commissioning
Heating circuit 1
Heating circuit 2
Heating circuit 2
3.6 Data backup
When commissioning is completed, the entire commissioning data set (configuration and all settings) can be saved in the controller. If any time later, an unauthorized person readjusts important values, this function can be used to restore the correct controlled state after commissioning.
Main menu > Data backup
Operating line
Storage date
Storage year
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Display of the date on which the commissioning data set was downloaded to the controller’s memory
Display of the year in which the commissioning date set was downloaded to the controller’s memory
Main menu > Data backup
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
Restore Caution!
New configuration
Save Caution!
Stored data will be overwritten.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
37/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Display values
Marking
Resetting the marking
3.7 Device information
The Device information menu provides information about the controller, shows the software version, etc.
Main menu > Device information > Controller
Operating line
Plant type
Plant type adapted
File name
Device type
Software version
Hardware version
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Display of plant type
Display of intervention in the programmed application (yes, no)
Has a function only in connection with
ACS7… Display of file name of the application currently loaded.
Can be edited under Settings > Texts > File
name.
RMH760B-1…RMH760B-5
Display of software version
Display of hardware version
Main menu > Device information > Position 1…4
Operating line
Extension module
Software version
Hardware version
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Display of the module’s type reference
Display of software version
Display of hardware version
3.8 Leaving the password level
On completion of commissioning, select the user level (access level for the plant operator). Proceed as follows:
1. After completing commissioning, you reach the “Main menu” again.
2. Press simultaneously the OK knob and the ESC button.
3. The Access levels menu appears.
4. Select the user level by turning the OK knob.
5. Confirm the selection by pressing the OK knob.
3.9 Marking an intervention
If the internal standard application has been adapted or if, subsequently, the “Extra configuration” menu has been accessed, an asterisk (*) appears in front of the plant’s type reference.
The asterisk denotes that the plant type has been complemented by extra functions.
The asterisk is set automatically when leaving the „Extra configuration” menu, even if nothing has been changed. In addition, on the Device information menu, Yes will be set on operating line Plant type adapted.
When, on the Basic configuration menu, the former or a new standard application is loaded for the plant type, the asterisk disappears and No will appear on operating line
Plant type adapted. A new configuration is made based on the selected application.
38/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
3 Commissioning
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Time format
Setting
4.1 Time of day and date
4.1.1 Operating
The controller has a yearly clock with time of day, weekday and date.
The following time formats are available:
Time format
24 hours dd.mm.yyyy
(day.month.year) am/pm mm/dd/yy
(day/month/year)
31.05.2006 hh:mm
(hours: minutes)
05/31/2006 hh:mm am/pm
(hours: minutes am/pm)
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Device
Operating line
Time format
Range
24 hours / 12 hours
(am/pm)
Example
15:56
03:56 PM
Factory setting
24 hours
Main menu > Time of day/date
Operating line
Time of day
Range
00:00…23:59
Factory setting
00:00
Summer- / wintertime changeover
Setting
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
The change from summertime to wintertime, and vice versa, is made automatically. The date of the earliest changeover can be readjusted should the relevant regulations change.
The dates set for the change from wintertime to summertime, and vice versa, ensure that on the first Sunday after that date, the time of day will change from 02:00 (wintertime) to 03:00 (summertime), and from 03:00 (summertime) to 02:00 (wintertime).
If both dates are set to coincide, summer- / wintertime changeover will be inactive.
Main menu > Time of day/date
Operating line
Summer time start
Winter time start
Range
01.01. …31.12
01.01. …31.12
Factory setting
25.03
25.10
4.1.2 Communication
For the time of day, there are several sources available, depending on the master clock. This can be entered on the controller. Time of day and date can be exchanged via bus.
For clock time operation, the following settings can be made:
• Autonomous (does not send and does not receive)
• Clock time from the bus: Clock time slave (receives the synchronization signal from the bus)
• Clock time to the bus: Clock time master (sends the synchronization signal to the bus)
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
4 General settings
39/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setting values
Recommendation
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Basic settings
Operating line
Clock time operation
Range
Autonomous / slave / master
Yes / No
Factory setting
Autonomous
Remote setting clock slave Yes
If the controller is set as a clock time slave, it can also be selected whether it shall be possible to adjust the master clock’s time of day from this controller.
The following settings for the remote clock time slave can be made:
• No (clock time slave with no adjustment facility for the system time)
• Yes (clock time slave with adjustment facility for the system time)
The effect of the individual entries is as follows:
Entry Effect Diagram
Autonomous
Slave,
Remote setting clock slave No
• The time of day on the controller can be readjusted
• The controller's time of day is not matched to the system time
• The time of day on the controller cannot be readjusted
• The controller's time of day is continuously and automatically matched to the system time
• The time of day on the controller
Readjustment
Contr. time System time
Readjustment
Contr. time System time
Slave,
Remote setting clock slave Yes
Readjustment can be readjusted which, at the same time, readjusts the system time
• The controller's time of day is
Contr. time System time
Master continuously and automatically matched to the system time
• The time of day on the controller
Readjustment can be readjusted and, at the same time, readjusts the system time
• The controller's time of day is continuously and automatically matched to the system time
Contr. time System time
Only one clock time master per system may be used. If several controllers are parameterized as masters, a fault status message will be delivered.
The plant should always be operated in a synchronized manner.
4.1.3 Fault
If the clock on the bus is missing and the local clock is parameterized as the clock time slave, operation continues with the internal clock and a fault status message System time
failure will be delivered.
In the event of a power failure, the clock has a reserve (minimum 12 hours, typically 48 hours).
If the controller loses its time of day after a power failure and the time is not retransmitted via bus, fault status message Invalid time of day will be forwarded.
An invalid time of day flashes.
40/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
4 General settings
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Fault status messages
Setting
Setting
Number Text
5001 System time failure
5002
5003
>1 clock time master
Invalid time of day
Effect
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
4.2 Selecting the language
Every RMH760B controller has a number of languages loaded.
When switching on the controller for the first time, the required language must be entered.
But the language can also be changed later during operation.
Depending on the type of controller, the following languages with the relevant instructions are available:
Type ref. Language 1 Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 Language 5 Language 6
RMH760B-1 German French Italian Spanish
RMH760B-2 German English
RMH760B-3 Swedish Finnish
French Dutch
Norwegian Danish
RMH760B-4 Polish
RMH760B-5 Greek
Czech Slovakian Bulgarian
Romanian Slovenish Serbian Croatian Turkish
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Device
Operating line Range Factory setting
* Available with all types of controllers
4.3 Selecting the unit of temperature
On the RMH760B, the unit of temperature can be switched between °C/K and °F.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Device
Operating line Range Factory setting
Setting
4.4 Contrast of display
The contrast of the display can be matched to ambient conditions, thus improving readability.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Device
Operating line Range Factory setting
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
4 General settings
41/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
4.5 Text entries
Setting
Device name
File name
Setting
4.5.1 Device name and file name
The text for the device name appears in the welcome picture.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Texts
Operating line
Device name
Range
Max. 20 characters
Factory setting
File name Max. 20 characters
The text of the device name entered here appears on the start page in place of Welcome.
The file name is only of importance in connection with the ACS7… plant operating software; the text can be edited there.
Setting
(example of main controller)
4.5.2 Function block
Specific designations can be assigned to the following types of function blocks: Boiler, main controller, primary controller, DHW, heating circuit, and time switch. The setting is made on the relevant function block.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller
Operating line Range Factory setting
Main controller Max. 20 characters
A maximum of 20 characters can be entered.
The change of text designation for the boiler only affects the menu headings indicated, but not the fault texts and not the text of operating lines.
4.5.3 Texts for the fault inputs
The texts for the fault inputs are locally displayed and also transmitted via bus.
In addition to the predefined fault inputs, there are 4 universal fault inputs, 3 digital and freely usable boiler-related fault inputs available.
• The text for the universal fault inputs can be edited via Main menu > Settings > Faults.
• The text for the boiler-related faults can be edited where the boiler settings are made: Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Faults > Fault input 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Operating line
Fault input 1
Fault input 2
Fault input 3
Fault input 4
Range
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Factory setting
[Fault inp 1] fault
[Fault inp 2] fault
[Fault inp 3] fault
[Fault inp 4] fault
4.5.4 Electronic business card
The text of the electronic business card is displayed as an info picture. The electronic business card can be deactivated via “Extra configuration“.
42/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
4 General settings
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Configuration
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous > Business card
Operating line
Business card
Operating line
Business card line 1
Business card line 2
Business card line 3
Business card line 4
Range
Yes / No
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Texts
Range
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Factory setting
Yes
Factory setting
4.5.5 Resetting text entries
The following datapoints cannot be reset:
• Device name
• File name
• Business card lines 1…4
All other texts, such as menu text, fault text, etc., entered by the user can be reset on the password level.
Main menu > Settings > Texts
Operating line
Resetting text
Range
No / Yes
Factory setting
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
4 General settings
43/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
5 General functions, fundamentals
5.1 Time
For each of the 3 heating circuits, DHW heating and the DHW circulating pump, there is a time switch available.
In “Automatic“ mode, the respective function block operates according to this time switch. A switching program can be defined for every weekday.
Using the program entered, the time switch controls the change of operating modes and the relevant setpoints.
Operation of the time switch is described in Operating Instructions B3133.
5.1.1 Communication
If the RMH760B is connected to other controllers via communication, the 7-day time switch can be assigned to different controllers, or it can be used by a single controller.
This applies to both the time switches for the heating circuits and the time switch for
DHW heating. The time switch for the circulating pump cannot be made available to another controller and it cannot be adopted by some other controller.
The following settings must be made, depending on the required operating mode:
Required time switch operation Operating line
Autonomous Geographical zone (apartm.)
Master
Time switch slave (apartm.)
Geographical zone (apartm.)
Time switch slave (apartm.)
Slave Geographical zone (apartm.)
Time switch slave (apartm.)
The following combinations are possible:
Setting
----
----
1…126
----
Any
1…126
Effect Description
Autonomous The time switch only acts locally on this controller. It has no impact on other controllers on the bus.
Diagram
Slave
Master
The time switch in this controller is not active.
An external time switch is active, which can be selected by setting the time switch reception zone. Every time switch only acts in its own zone, and every zone only has one time switch. The external time switch must be set as the time switch master.
The time switch in this controller is active. It acts on all other controllers located in the same zone. The zone must be set both at the master and the slaves. The receivers are set as slaves.
Heating circuit and DHW circuit time switches cannot communicate with one another, which means that they do not operate in master-slave mode.
Also, the master-slave settings of the heating circuits and those of DHW are not the same.
44/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Space heating
Note
DHW heating
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
Operating line
Geographical zone (apartm.)
Time switch slave (apartm.)
Range
---- / 1…126
---- / 1…126
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > DHW
Factory setting
----
----
Operating line Range Factory setting
DHW zone
Time switch operation
Time switch slave DHW
Master
1…31 1
For details on settings regarding time switch communication, refer to chapter 14
1…31
Autonomous / Slave /
1
Autonomous
5.1.2 Entries
For space heating, a specific 24-hour program can be selected for each day:
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Time switch 1 (or 2 or 3 )
Operating line
Monday up to
Sunday
Special day
Range
Comfort / Precomfort /
Economy
Comfort / Precomfort /
Economy
Comfort / Precomfort /
Economy
Factory setting
From 06:00 Comfort / From 22:00
Economy
From 06:00 Comfort / From 22:00
Economy
From 06:00 Comfort / From 22:00
Economy
The times are to be entered with the help of a display (using indicator ):
From
Tuesday
Comfort
For DHW heating, a specific 24-hour program can be selected for each day:
Main menu > DHW > DHW time switch
Operating line
Monday up to
Sunday
Range
Normal / Reduced
Normal / Reduced
Factory setting
From 05:00 Normal
From 22:00 Reduced
From 05:00 Normal
From 22:00 Reduced
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
45/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Circulating pump
Entries
>1 time switch signal in the heating circuit
For the circulating pump, a specific 24-hour program can be selected for each day:
Main menu > DHW > Circ pump time switch
Operating line
Monday
Range
Off / On
Factory setting
From 05:00 On
From 22:00 Off up to
Sunday
Special day
Off / On
Off / On
From 05:00 On
From 22:00 Off
From 05:00 On
From 22:00 Off
The special day program is a 24-hour program which can be activated either via the holiday program or an external contact.
Activation of the special day is described in section 5.2 “Holidays and special days”.
For each day, a maximum of 6 entries can be made in the 24-hour program.
Every entry must include the following:
• Time of day from which the desired operating mode shall apply
• The desired operating mode
The next day always adopts the operating mode of the previous day until another entry is made.
The operating mode of the previous day is shown in the form of a broken line.
Cmf
PreCmf
Eco
1
Monday Tuesday Wednesday
If no entry is made for a specific day, the operating mode of the previous day will be adopted for the whole day and shown as a broken line.
The special day ends with the same operating mode with which it was started.
The day following the special day adopts the operating mode of the previous day’s 24hour program that would have been valid without the special day.
Cmf
PreCmf
Eco
1
Wednesday Monday Special day
When all entries for a day have been made, that 24-hour program can be copied to other days. The program can be copied to Monday through Friday, Monday through
Sunday, or to individual weekdays.
5.1.3 Fault
Number Text
5102
5112
5122
>1 time switch in heating circuit 1
>1 time switch in heating circuit 2
>1 time switch in heating circuit 3
Effect
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
46/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Failure of system time switch
Note
Number Text Effect
5302 >1 DHW time switch Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
For each geographical zone, only one time switch master may be set. If several controllers are parameterized as masters, a fault status message will be delivered. The fault is identified by the time switch master(A) when it receives a time switch signal from some other master(B) in its own zone. Time switch master ”A” will then display and forward a fault, but no more time switch signal, in order to prevent switching back and forth of the slaves.
Number Text
5101
5111
Effect
System time switch failure 1 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
System time switch failure 2 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
5121 System time switch failure 3 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
5301 DHW system time switch failure
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
The controller always expects a time switch signal from the bus. If not transmitted, the controller will operate in “Comfort“ mode. In that case, fault status message System time
switch failure 1 (or 2 or 3) will be delivered.
5.2 Holidays and special days
Each heating circuit and DHW heating use their own holidays / special day program.
Weekdays deviating from the normal 7-day program can be entered by the plant operator as holidays or special days, using the “Holidays / special days“ menu. Entry is described in Operating Instructions B3133.
The operating mode for the holiday period can be separately selected for each individual heating circuit and for DHW heating.
Function “Holidays / special days“ is active only if room operating mode “Auto“ has been selected. The same applies to DHW heating. Here too, DHW operating mode
“Auto“ must be selected.
5.2.1 Communication
If the controller is connected to other controllers via bus, the holidays or special day program can be made available to other controllers (master), or it can be adopted from some other controller (slave).
The following combinations are possible:
Entry Effect
Autonomous The holidays / special day program only acts in its own heating circuit or DHW and only in the controller.
The holidays / special day program has no impact on the holidays / special day zone entered on the “Communication” menu.
Diagram
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
47/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Circulating pump
Legionella function
48/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Entry Effect
Slave
Master
The holidays / special day program of this heating circuit or of DHW is not active; a holidays / special day program selected on the slave will be ignored.
Active is some other holidays / special day program assigned to the same holidays / special day zone. This holidays / special day program must be set as the master holidays / special day program.
The holidays / special day program is set as the master. It acts on all internal and external holidays / special day programs set as slaves and lying in the same holidays / special day zone.
Diagram
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Room heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > DHW
Operating line
Holidays/special day operation
Holidays / special day zone
Master
1…31 1
For details on the settings relating to holidays / special day communication, refer to
Range
Autonomous / Slave /
Factory setting
Autonomous
5.2.2 Holidays
Holidays are periods of time
• during which the building is not occupied
• whose start and duration are known in advance
Examples:
• Works holidays in commercially used spaces and buildings
• School holidays in school buildings
• Public holidays
The operating mode to be used during the holiday period can be set separately for each heating circuit and each DHW heating system. The following operating modes can be selected for the heating circuits:
• Economy
• Protection
Following can be selected for DHW heating:
• Auto
• Normal
• Reduced
• Protection
For the circulating pump, following applies during the holiday period:
• If “Protection“ has been selected as the DHW operating mode during the holiday period, the circulating pump will be deactivated
• In the other operating modes, the circulating pump will run according to the time program
For the legionella function, following applies during the holiday period:
• If “Protection“ has been selected as the DHW operating mode during the holiday period, the legionella function will be deactivated
• In the other operating modes, the legionella function will remain activated
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Setting values
Priority
Note
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Room operating mode
Operating line
Room operating mode holidays
Range
Economy
Protection
Main menu > DHW > DHW optg mode
Operating line
DHW operating mode holidays
Range
Auto
Normal
Reduced
Protection
Factory setting
Economy
Factory setting
Protection
5.2.3 Special
Special days are periods of time during which the building is used for special purposes and whose start and duration are known in advance. Such days are especially public holidays.
The 7-day program can accommodate an additional 24-hour program (special day) as a
special day program. The setting is described in section 5.1 “Time switch“.
If the controller (master) is connected to other controllers (slaves) via communication, a specific 7-day program can be entered as a special day on each controller (slaves).
The time of the special day is predefined by the master and applies to all controllers in the same holidays / special day zone.
5.2.4 Calendar
A maximum of 16 entries can be made. The entries are sorted in chronological order.
Every entry must include:
• Date, year and start time
• Date and end time
• Reason for entry (holidays or special day)
Main menu > … > Holidays/special days
Operating line Range Factory setting
Entry 1… Entry 16 Start / End / Reason
--.-- / --.-- /
Holidays
Annually recurring holidays or special days can be entered by setting an asterisk (*) at the annual setting.
If 2 entries overlap, special days are given priority over holidays. It is thus possible to predefine a special day during the holiday period also.
On completion of the holiday period or the special day, operation according to the normal 7-day program will be resumed. During this transition period, it can occur that optimum start control (e.g. boost heating) cannot be started in due time. It is therefore recommended to bring the end of the holiday period somewhat forward, giving the plant sufficient time to adapt to the respective setpoints.
5.2.5 Control inputs for holidays and special days
Holidays and special days can also be activated via digital inputs. For that, the respective function must be assigned an input. Every holidays / special day program has its own inputs.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
49/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setting
Special day
Holidays
Priority
Note
Fault status messages
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Inputs
Operating line
Special day input
Holiday input
Range
--- / RMH760… etc.*
--- / RMH760… etc.*
Factory setting
---
---
* These inputs are only active if holidays/special day operation has been set to “Autonomous“ or “Master”.
The digital input enables the plant to be switched to the special day program set in the
7-day program. If the configured input is activated, the special day program will become active. This state is maintained until the input becomes inactive. Then, the normal 7day program will be resumed.
The digital input enables the plant to be switched to “Holidays” mode.
When the configured input is activated, the plant switches to “Holidays” mode. This state is maintained until the input becomes inactive. Then, the normal 7-day program will be resumed.
If, at the same time, a special day or a holiday period is activated via the control switches and an entry in the calendar, the following priority will apply:
1. Control switch ”Special day”
2. Control switch “Holidays”
3. “Special day” entry in the calendar
4. “Holidays” entry in the calendar
If other controllers are also configured as slaves in the same holidays / special day zone, the digital inputs will act on these controllers also.
5.2.6 Fault
Only one master may be set per holidays / special day zone. If there is more than one master in a zone, fault status message
>1 hol/sp day prgm HC 1 (or …HC 2 or …HC 3 or …DHW) will be delivered.
The fault is identified by the holidays / special day master (A) when it receives a holidays / special day signal from some other master (B) in its zone. Master ”A” will then display a fault status message and forward it, but no more holidays / special day signal, in order to prevent the slaves from switching back and forth.
If the controller expects a holidays / special day signal from the bus, but same signal is not transmitted, fault status message Hol/sp day prgm failure HC 1 (or …HC 2 or …HC 3 or
…DHW) will be delivered.
The operating modes of the 7-day program are used, without giving consideration to the holidays / special day entries.
Number Text
5201
Effect
Hol/sp day prgm failure HC 1 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
5211
5221
5231
5202
Hol/sp day prgm failure HC 2 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Hol/sp day prgm failure HC 3 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Hol/sp day prgm failure
DHW
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
>1 hol/sp day prgm HC 1 Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
50/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
General settings
Settings per function block
Number Text
5212
5222
5232
>1 hol/sp day prgm HC 2
>1 hol/sp day prgm HC 3
>1 hol/sp day prgm DHW
Effect
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
When evaluating the priority in the holidays / special day program, only the first 2 entries are taken into consideration. If more than 2 overlapping entries are made, the situation can occur that the special day no longer has priority over holidays.
5.3 Frost protection for the plant
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Protective functions
Operating line Range Factory setting
Frost prot for plant ON (cycling)
Frost prot for plant ON (cont)
–5…10 °C
–50…2 °C
2 °C
–5 °C
To protect the water pipes from freezing, frost protection for the plant can activate the respective pump depending on the actual outside temperature.
This takes place independent of heat requests. Prerequisite is, however, that “Frost protection for the plant” has been activated for the relevant pump.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Limitations
Operating line
Frost protection for the plant
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Limitations
Range
Off / On
Operating line
Frost prot plant primary pump
Frost prot plant secondary pump
Frost prot plant circulating pump
Range
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Limitations
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Limitations
Operating line
Frost protection for the plant
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Range
Off / On
Factory setting
On
Factory setting
Off
Off
Off
Factory setting
Off
Operating line Range Factory setting
Frost prot boiler pump Off / On Off
The necessity for activating “Frost protection for the plant” is primarily dependent on the type of hydraulic system and the location of the heating pipes in the building. If the heating pipes are located such that they cannot be affected by frost, frost protection for the plant will not be required.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
51/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Sequence of functions
Faulty outside sensor
The sequence of frost protection for the plant is as follows:
TO
ON
ON
TO
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
1 K
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
TO
TO
<–5 °C (TO
ON
)
Pump
Continuously on
-4…+2 °C
On for 10 minutes every 6 hours
>2 °C (TO
OFF
)
Continuously off
Status
ON ON / OFF OFF
Adjustable are the following temperatures:
• TO
ON
: Outside temperature at which “Frost protection for the plant“ switches the pump continuously on (frost protection for the plant continuously ON)
• TO
OFF
: Outside temperature at which "Frost protection for the plant” lets the pump cycle (frost protection for the plant cycling ON)
In the event the outside sensor becomes faulty, frost protection for the plant will continue to operate with a constant backup value of 0 °C outside temperature.
5.4 Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun
For all pumps (exception: circulating pump) and all mixing valves, overtemperature protection can become active. Overtemperature protection always becomes active after the burner has been shut down. To ensure that the heat consumers still draw heat for a minimum period of time, an overrun time is enforced on the heat consumers that were switched off within the last minute. During that overrun time, the pumps and mixing valves continue to operate; the pumps continue to run and the mixing valves maintain the “old” setpoint.
The duration of the overrun time is dependent on the type of heat source used and can therefore be set on the boiler.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Operating line Range Factory setting
Consumer overrun time 0…60 min 6 min
In order to also ensure overrun on plant with no system-internal heat exchanger, overrun can also be set on the heat consumers.
Main menu > Settings > Protective functions
Operating line
Consumer overrun time
Range
0…60 min
This setting can only be made on plant with no boiler.
Every heat consumer has a minimum overrun time of 60 seconds.
Factory setting
6 min
With DHW heating, it is to be noted that discharging protection is given priority over pump overrun.
In the case of DHW heating with primary and secondary pump, the secondary pump operates for an additional pump overrun time to prevent the external heat exchanger from reaching excessive temperatures.
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line
Overrun time secondary pump
Range
0…60 min
Factory setting
1 min
52/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Notes
Examples
5.5 Pump kick and valve kick
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Protective functions
Operating line
Kick day
Kick time
Pump/valve kick
Range
Monday…Sunday
00:00…23:59
--- / Pump + Valve /
Pump / Valve
Factory setting
Monday
10:00
Pump + valve
The pump kick or valve kick is a protective function that is carried out periodically. It prevents pumps and / or valves from seizing after longer off periods (e.g. summer operation). For the kick function to be performed, the pump or actuator must not have been activated for at least one week.
To prevent the pumps and valves from seizing, a point in time can be defined where the pumps are put into operation and the valves are driven to their fully open and fully closed positions.
To be defined are the kick day and kick time. The function can be deactivated (pump / valve kick = ---).
It can also be selected whether the function shall apply to pumps only, valves only, or to both.
The selected setting will then apply to all pumps and valves connected to the
RMH760B. If a plant uses several RMH760B, the setting must be made on each of them.
With the kick day and kick time settings, it is to be noted that these settings are also used for automatic changeover of twin pumps (for more detailed information, refer to
section 5.8 “Pump control and twin pumps”).
The kick time for pumps and actuators need not be set; it is fixed at 30 seconds.
If several pumps are present, they will be kicked one after the other. After the end of a kick, the next pump will be kicked after an interval of 30 seconds.
The valve kick does not act on the boiler’s shutoff valve.
5.6 Heat demand and load control
5.6.1 Heat
Heat consumers, such as heating circuits and DHW heating, send their heat demand signals to the heat distribution zone “Heat generation”.
A demand transformer converts such signals to appropriate heat demand signals (for
details, refer to section 7.3 “Heat demand transformer”.
Heat source or primary controller receive the heat demand signals and evaluate them.
Usually, evaluation is a maximum value generation of the temperatures obtained from the heat demand signals.
A heat source (example 1) delivers the heat demanded by the consumers. A primary controller (example 2) also provides this heat but, in addition, sends a heat demand signal to a heat source.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
53/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Example 1: Heat source and heat consumer
T
T
T
Heat source
Heat consumer
Heat consumer
Heat demand
Load control
Example 2: Heat source, primary controller and heat consumer
T
T
T
T
T
T
Examples of load reduction
Heat source
Heat consumer
Heat consumer / primary controller
Heat consumer
Heat consumer
Heat consumer
The heat demand signals can be assigned a priority.
If DHW heating is operated with absolute priority, its heat demand signal must be given priority. This temperature request will therefore be the decisive variable.
For DHW heating, it can also be parameterized whether, during DHW heating, the heat demand shall be evaluated as a maximum value or in the normal way.
5.6.2 Load control
Load control enables heat generation to reduce the amount of heat drawn by the heat consumers (load reduction via locking signals), or to increase it (load increase via forced signals).
In the case of load control via locking signals, a differentiation is made between critical and uncritical locking signals.
In the case of forced signals also, a distinction is made between critical and uncritical signals.
These differentiations allow the heat consumers to respond to load control in different ways.
Examples where a load reduction can be triggered are:
• Protective boiler startup (boiler temperature is still below the minimum boiler temperature):
⇒ Load reduction via critical locking signals
• Maintained boiler return temperature without separate mixing valve (acting on the heating circuits):
54/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Example of load increase
Heating circuits
Primary controller
Setting note
Ventilation controller, individual room control
Note on DHW priority
⇒ Load reduction via critical or uncritical locking signals
The type of locking signals to be generated can be parameterized
• Shifting DHW priority (if the boiler temperature setpoint is not reached during DHW heating, the amount of heat drawn by the heating circuits will be restricted):
⇒ Load reduction via uncritical locking signals
• Absolute DHW priority (DHW heating is given priority over the heating circuits; the heating circuits will not be allowed to draw any heat):
⇒ Load reduction via uncritical locking signals
An example where load increase is called for is overtemperature protection (pump overrun, mixing valve overrun).
With pump / mixing valve overrun, the heat consumers are requested to draw heat at the same level for a certain period of time (overrun time) although they do not demand more heat. Overrun is typically triggered by a boiler after the burner has been shut down in order to prevent overtemperatures in the boiler.
On the heat consumers, it can be selected if and to what extent they shall respond to the different load control signals.
Heating circuits and DHW circuits always respond to critical locking signals. DHW circuits never respond to uncritical locking signals.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Mixing circuit controller
Operating line
Response uncrit locking signals
Locking signal gain*
Range
Yes / No
0…200 %
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Factory setting
Yes
100 %
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Mixing circuit controller
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Mixing circuit controller
Operating line
Locking signal gain*
Range
0…200 %
* Locking signal gain applies to both critical and uncritical locking signals
Factory setting
100 %
For the main controller and the primary controller, setting “Response to uncritical locking signals” is not required. Both never respond to uncritical locking signals because the associated hydraulic actuating devices shall be able to respond depending on the situation.
This locking signal gain is adjustable between 0 and 200 %.
Setting
0 %
Response
Locking signal will be ignored
100 %
200 %
Locking signal will be adopted 1-to-1
Locking signal will be doubled
This enables the heat consumer’s responses to be matched to the locking signals.
If the heat consumer responds too promptly, the value must be decreased; if it responds too slowly, the value must be increased.
Ventilation controller and individual room control do not respond to locking signals and forced signals.
With absolute DHW priority, it is to be noted that this signal is always given priority and that it defines the resulting setpoint.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
55/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setting choices
If some other heat consumer without absolute priority is in the same heat distribution zone, its value will be ignored, even if it is greater.
Generally, the function of absolute DHW priority in combination with heating circuits does not pose any problems; nevertheless, the correct plant function must always be kept in mind.
The use of absolute DHW priority poses problems especially in connection with ventilation plants since they often call for low flow temperatures.
In the case of shifting priority or with no priority, DHW heating makes it possible to select whether the heat demand signal shall be evaluated the normal way (maximum selection), or whether the DHW flow temperature setpoint shall be adopted as the resulting setpoint.
Refer to section 10.10 “DHW priority”.
5.7 Mixing valve control
5.7.1 Control
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Mixing circuit controller
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller maint sec temp
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller consumers
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Mixing circuit controller
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Mixing circuit controller
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Return control
Operating line
Actuator run time
P-band Xp
Integral action time Tn
Range
1…600 s
1…100 K
0…600 s
Factory setting
Depending on various settings
5.7.2 Setting aids
With the help of the P-band (Xp) and the integral action time (Tn), the mixing valve algorithm can be optimally adapted to the relevant controlled system.
The controller is supplied with the control parameters set to values suited for the majority of controlled systems (typically flow temperature control with a 3-port mixing valve).
In the case of difficult controlled systems (e.g. heating circuit with heat exchanger), the control parameters must always be matched to the type of controlled system.
T
T
Setting with the help of the step response
Example
A controlled system is usually characterized by the step response. This is explained on the basis of the following example of a mixing heating circuit.
At the point in time t o
, the actuating device (actuator of mixing valve) shall be opened from 40 % to 80 %. As a result, the flow temperature will rise by ∆x.
56/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Degree of difficulty
Maximum system gain Ksmax
Setting rules
Example
Note
Setting without step response
Valve position
∆ Y
Valve position must change rapidly (manually)
Actual value
∆ x
Tu Tg
Tu Delay time
∆x Change of actual value
∆Y Change of valve position
The longer the delay time in relation to the system time constant, the more difficult the control of the system. If the position of the actuating device is changed and the temperature sensor can only acquire the result of the change after a certain period of time, control is much more difficult than in the case of fast-acting systems.
The degree of difficulty
λ
is calculated as follows:
λ =
Tu
Tg
For the degree of difficulty of a controlled system, the following guide values can be used:
λ
<0.1 = easy
λ 0.1… λ 0.3 = medium
λ
>0.3 = difficult
The maximum system gain Ksmax can be estimated based on the differential of maximum flow temperature upstream of the mixing valve and the minimum return temperature, for example. The value of Ksmax may have to be increased to give consideration to a nonlinear valve characteristic. TVmax = 80 °C and TRmin = 20 °C => Ksmax =
60 K.
P-band: Xp = 2 × Tu / Tg ×
∆ x /
∆y × 100 % ≈
2 × Tu / Tg × Ksmax
Integral action time Tn = 3 × Tu
Change of valve position
∆ y = 40 %
Change of flow temperature
∆ x = 18 K
Tu = 6 s
Tg = 18 s
P-band: Xp = 2 × 6 s / 18 s × 18 K / 40 % × 100 % = 30 K
Integral action time: Tn = 3 × 6 s = 18 s
To get a reliable step response, it is important to keep the temperature upstream of the valve and the return temperature (mixing) as constant as possible during the time the measurement is made.
During the measurement, the boiler and return temperatures should reflect winter conditions (relatively low outside temperatures).
On actual plant, it is not always possible to get a reliable step response.
With no step response, or in the case of unsatisfactory control action after entry of the calculated parameters, the on / off pulses after a setpoint step give hints on setting the parameters.
A distinction is to be made between 2 cases:
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
57/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
The flow temperature fluctuates about the setpoint
Setpoint
Flow temp.
A
Open pulse
Close pulse
Open pulse
B
Close pulse
A The control pulses are too long:
Measure the effective valve running time (0…100 % stroke) and enter it. If the pulses are still too long, increase P-band Xp
B
Several successive relatively short on or off pulses: Increase integral action time Tn
Flow temperature approaches the setpoint only slowly
Setpoint
Flow temp.
A
Open pulse
Close pulse
Actuator running time
Note
P-band Xp
Example
Basic rule
B
Open pulse
Close pulse
A Difference between the first pulse and the following pulses is small:
Measure the effective actuator running time (0…100 % stroke) and enter it. If the control performance does not considerably improve: Decrease P-band Xp
B
Long starting pulse followed by many short pulses: Decrease integral action time Tn
The actuator running time must be matched to the type of actuator used.
This setting is important for both 3-position and DC 0…10 V actuators.
If in doubt with 3-position actuators, the setting is to be increased since otherwise the actuator will not optimally operate in the range between 0 and 100 % stroke (also refer
to synchronization pulse in subsection 5.7.3).
It is important to also set the actuator running time with DC 0…10 V actuators. Only this ensures correct operation of the control system.
The P-band Xp is given in K (Kelvin).
If, after a setpoint step, the control deviation equals the P-band, the valve will be readjusted by 100 %.
With a P-band of 40 K and a setpoint change of 5 K, the valve will be readjusted by
5 / 40 = 12.5 %. Using an actuator with a running time of 150 seconds, for example, this means that it takes the actuator 18.75 seconds to fully open or fully close.
If the P-band is increased, the controller will respond less promptly to the same control deviation. With a P-band of 60 K, for example, the actuator will only require
12.5 seconds to travel to the fully open or fully closed position.
Increase of P-band Xp means: The control responds more slowly and there is less tendency to oscillate.
This means:
58/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Integral action time Tn
• The control action is too slow.
Decrease P-band Xp in steps of about 25 %
• The control action is too fast.
Increase P-band Xp in steps of about 25 %
The integral action time Tn is indicated in seconds and amounts to about 3 × Tu (also refer to ”Setting rules” above). Tu is impacted by great filter time constants, especially in the case of fast controlled systems.
The integral action time indicates how long it takes the controller in the event of a constant temperature deviation to deliver the same valve travel as this would be the case with the P-part.
For example, an integral action time of 120 seconds means that in the event of a control deviation of 5 K in the above example (Xp = 40 K), it takes the mixing valve
120 seconds to travel 2 × 12.5 % toward the fully open or fully closed position (12.5 % due to the P-part and 12.5 % due to the I-part).
If the integral action time is increased, the control system will respond more slowly but becomes more stable.
Electrothermal actuators
5.7.3 Control signal
Since the control algorithm uses a stroke model which does not provide control beyond
0 % and 100 % respectively, the use of electrothermal actuators is no longer possible, as this was the case with the RVL47… controllers.
Synchronization pulse
For 3-position control, the actuator’s current position is acquired by a stroke model. As soon as the stroke model reaches 0 % or 100 % respectively, a synchronization signal
(continuous on pulse or continuous off pulse for 1.5 times the running time) is delivered to the actuator, thus making certain it has reached the relevant position.
This synchronization pulse is repeated for one minute at 10-minute intervals.
If a position change is called for, the synchronization pulse will immediately be stopped.
5.8 Pump control and twin pumps
Every pump (main pump, boiler pump, system pump, heating circuit pump) can be monitored with a flow switch and an associated fault input.
Also, every pump can be a twin pump. d d d
B
V
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
1)
B
Q Q
The decision whether the pump to be installed shall be a single or twin pump is made via “Extra configuration” at the respective function block (heating circuit, DHW, primary controller, main controller, boiler).
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
59/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Outputs
Inputs
Setting
Run priority
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Outputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Outputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Primary controller > Outputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Main controller > Outputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Boiler > Outputs
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
…pump B Assign terminal
When both outputs (pump and pump B) are configured, the pump used is a twin pump.
A fault input is also available for pump B. The flow switch is used by both pumps.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Inputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Primary controller > Inputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Main controller > Inputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Boiler > Inputs
Operating line
[…pump] overload
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Assign terminal
[…pump B] overload
Flow signal pump
Assign terminal
Assign terminal
If a twin pump was configured, the relevant function block will show menu item Twin
pump.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Twin pump
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Primary twin pump (or Secondary twin pump or Circulating
twin pump)
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Twin pump
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Twin pump
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Twin pump
Operating line
Run priority
Changeover period
Range
Auto / Twin pump A /
Twin pump B
–60…0…+60 s
Factory setting
Auto
0 s
5.8.1 Changeover
For pump changeover, there are 3 choices available:
• Automatic changeover once a week; should the working pump become faulty, changeover to the second pump will take place.
When switching on the next time, the pump that starts is always the pump that was in operation last
• Twin pump A is always the working pump.
In the event of fault, changeover to pump B will take place. After correction of the fault, a change back to pump A will be made
• Twin pump B is always the working pump.
In the event of fault, changeover to pump A will take place. After correction of the fault, a change back to pump B will be made
60/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Changeover time
Changeover period
No changeover delay
Changeover with negative delay
Changeover with positive delay
Pump kick
The changeover time used is the same time as that used for the pump / mixing valve kick (kick day and kick time).
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Protective functions
Operating line
Kick day
Range
Monday…Sunday
Factory setting
Monday
Kick time 00:00…23:59 10:00
Automatic changeover takes place after 168 hours (7 days) or – after a new start of the plant – when kick day and kick time are reached.
Kick day and kick time for pump changeover remain valid even if the pump kick has been deactivated.
The change from one pump to the other can take place as follows, depending on the application:
• With no interruption
• With overlapping
• With interruption
The change from pump A to pump B takes place instantly:
A
B
The change from pump A to pump B is made with temporal overlapping, e.g. to ensure a low noise level during changeover. The pump to be deactivated overruns for the adjusted period of time:
A
B
The change from pump A to pump B is made after a certain pause, e.g. to prevent surge voltages or excessive water pressures:
A
B
Depending on the changeover priority, the pump kick will act as follows:
Operating state of the pumps
Both pumps do not run
(summer operation)
One of the 2 pumps runs
With automatic changeover
Kick first acts on the pump that was in operation last
Not applicable
Impact of pump kick
The changeover delay also acts with pump kicks.
With fixed assignment
Kick first acts on the reserve pump and then on the working pump
Kick only acts on the reserve pump
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
61/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Fault status messages using the example of a heating circuit twin pump
5.8.2 Overload message and supervision of flow
As with every digital input, the normal position can also be parameterized for the pump fault inputs and the flow input (… > Settings > Inputs > RM… (controller or module type) >
Normal position).
If a twin pump is installed, changeover to the other pump takes place in the event of fault. In any case, a fault status message will be delivered.
For acknowledgement, following applies:
• A fault due to a missing fault status message must be acknowledged and reset
• If there is a pump fault, the respective function block will be stopped
For faults due to overload, the acknowledgement and reset behavior can be parameterized.
In the case of twin pumps, the fault behavior of the respective function block becomes active only should both pumps fail.
Flow supervision only becomes active 60 seconds after the pump is switched on.
Number Text Description
2526
2527
2528
2529
[Heat circuit 1 pump] overload
[Heat circuit 1 pump B] overload
[Heat circuit 1 pump] no flow
[Heat circuit 1 pump B] no flow
Heating circuit pump of heating circuit 1 overloaded
Heating circuit pump B of heating circuit 1 overloaded
Heating circuit pump of heating circuit 1 with faulty flow
Heating circuit pump B of heating circuit 1 with faulty flow
2530
[Heat circuit 1 pump] fault
Heating circuit pump(s) of heating circuit 1 faulty; partial plant stop
For the complete list of fault status messages, refer to section 15.1 "List of fault numbers".
62/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
5 General functions, fundamentals
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Block diagram
BuSt1
BuSt2
BuMdlt
BoSetpt
BoPu
BoPu_B
VlvShOff
VlvRtMx
6.1 Overview of function block
a a d d d a d d d d d d d d
B
V
Pump funct:
Boilerp.
Bypassp.
Boiler
Stage
Modulating
2)
1)
B
1. 2.
Q Q
3P
Y Y Q Q
MBRT
2)
Q
3P
Y
T
T
T
TBo
TRtBo
TFg
ReleaseBo
InFgMsm
BoCtrl
Error
BuFb
ShOffVlvFb
BoPuEr
BoPuEr_B
BoPuErFlow
ErBu
BuFb
Er1 (WloLeDet)
Er2 (PMaxMon)
Er3 (PMinMon)
ShOffVlvFb
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
63/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Boiler diagram
Basic configuration
Extra configuration
TFg
T
BuSt1
BuSt2
BuMdlt
BoSetpt
BoPu
BoPu_B
VlvShOff
BoPu
BoPu_B
BoPuEr
BoPuEr_B
BoPuErFlow
BoSetpt
BuFb
BuMdlt
P
T
PMaxMon(Er2)
WLoLeDet(Er1)
TBo
BuFb
ErBu
T
TRtBo
V
P
BoPuErFlow
BoPuEr
BoPuEr_B
PMinMon(Er3)
VlvShOffFb
VlvRtMx
Boiler pump
Boiler pump B
Fault input boiler pump
Fault input boiler pump B
Flow supervision boiler pump
Boiler temperature setpoint DC 0…10 V
Checkback signal burner stage 1
Modulating burner
WLoLeDet (Er1) Fault input 1 (water shortage)
PMaxMon (Er2) Fault input 2 (maximum pressure)
PMinMon (Er3) Fault input 3 (minimum pressure)
ErBu Fault input burner fault
TBo
TFg
TRtBo
VlvRtMx
Boiler temperature sensor
Flue gas temperature sensor
Boiler return temperature sensor
Maintained boiler return temperature
VlvShOffFb Checkback signal shutoff valve
6.2 Configuration
The function block is activated in the factory for plant types H3-x and H4-x. Always preconfigured is a boiler with a 1-stage burner, boiler pump, boiler temperature and return temperature sensor. For plant types H4-x, a mixing valve with 3-position actuator for the maintained boiler return temperature is also preconfigured.
For more detailed information, refer to section 3.2 “Basic configuration”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Basic configuration
Operating line Range Factory setting
Plant type H, H0-1…H6-7
H0-2
The basic configuration can be complemented and / or changed via “Extra configuration”. Here, the 1-stage burner can be changed to become a 2-stage or modulating burner, and shutoff valve, twin pump, flue gas temperature sensor and various checkback signals and fault status signals can be added. Naturally, plant types H3-x can be complemented by a mixing valve for the maintained boiler temperature.
64/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Inputs
Outputs
Boiler sensor
Return sensor
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Boiler > Inputs
Operating line
Boiler sensor
Return sensor
Release input
Checkback signal burner
Fault burner
Flue gas temperature sensor
Flue gas meas mode contact
[Boiler pump] overload
[Boiler pump B] overload
Flow signal pump
Checkb sign shutoff valve
Fault input 1
Fault input 2
Fault input 3
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Boiler > Outputs
Operating line
Burner stage 1
Burner stage 2
Modulating burner 3-pos
Modulating burner mod
Setpoint compensation
Boiler pump
Boiler pump B
Pump function
Shutoff valve
Maint boiler return temp 3-pos
Maint boiler return temp mod
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Boiler pump or bypass pump
For plant types with boiler, a boiler temperature sensor will automatically be configured.
This sensor is mandatory for boiler temperature control, but it also serves for optional functions, such as minimum or maximum limitation of the boiler temperature.
For plant types with boiler, the return temperature sensor will always be configured too.
For plant types using maintained boiler return temperature control via the mixing valve, this sensor is mandatory. In all other cases, the return temperature sensor can be used for maintained boiler return temperature via the bypass pump, maintained boiler return temperature with locking signal, or simply for display purposes.
Release input
Using the release input, a boiler can be locked from an external location. The operating action of the input can be parameterized at the respective terminal on Main menu >
Settings > Inputs.
Checkback signal burner
The burner checkback signal can be used to provide additional supervision of the burner. If the checkback signal is not received after an adjustable period of time, the burner is considered to have locked out. If the burner checkback signal has been configured, the burner hours run counter is started only after the checkback signal has been received. If no checkback signal is configured, the burner hours run counter is started when stage 1 is switched on. This also gives consideration to the prepurge time,
etc. Also refer to section 6.9 “Boiler faults”.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
65/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Checkback signal shutoff valve
If no checkback signal is received, an appropriate fault status message will be delivered. In addition, the burner will be started only if the shutoff valve's checkback signal indicates a fully open valve.
If no checkback signal is received, an appropriate fault status message will be deliv-
ered. For more detailed information, refer to section 6.9.
Flue gas temperature sensor
Flue gas measuring mode contact
Burner fault
Fault inputs 1…3
Overload boiler pump
Using the flue gas temperature sensor, the flue gas temperature can be displayed and monitored.
For more detailed information, refer to section 6.7 “Flue gas temperature supervision”.
With the flue gas measuring mode contact, function “Flue gas measuring mode” can be activated at the boiler.
For more detailed information, refer to section 6.7.
This terminal can be used for the burner’s fault status message.
For more detailed information, refer to section 6.9 “Boiler faults”.
For additional fault supervision functions, there are 3 fault inputs available.
For more detailed information, refer to section 6.9.
Fault input for monitoring the boiler pump.
Overload boiler pump B
Fault input for monitoring boiler pump B in the case of twin pumps.
Flow signal
Input for monitoring boiler pump flow.
Burner stage 1
Burner stage 2
Modulating 3-position burner
Modulating burner
Setpoint compensation
6.2.1 Burner
Selection of a plant type with boiler means that a 1-stage burner will be preselected.
Using “Extra configuration“, other boiler types can be selected by configuring additional outputs:
• 1-stage burner (factory setting)
• 2-stage burner
• Modulating burner
• Setpoint compensation
First burner stage or basic stage of a modulating burner.
Second burner stage
Configuration of a pair of terminals for a modulating 3-position burner.
Available for selection are the free pairs of terminals with special RC radio interference
suppression; for details, refer to subsection 3.2.2 “Terminal assignment and properties of outputs”.
DC 0…10 V output for a modulating burner.
DC 0…10 V output as a boiler temperature setpoint for an external boiler temperature controller.
If no control of the burner is required, the DC 0…10 V output can be used in place of the burner for setpoint compensation of a boiler. In that case, it is not the boiler temperature that is controlled, but the boiler temperature setpoint is shifted as a function of the heat requests.
66/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant types H3-x
Pump function
Plant types H4-x
6.2.2 Boiler
TBo
BoPu
TRtBo
Boiler pump in the flow
TBo
ByPu
TRtBo
Boiler pump in the bypass
TBo Boiler temperature sensor
TRtBo Return temperature sensor
(optional, for minimum limitation)
BoPu Boiler pump
For plant types with boiler (H3-x and H4-x), a boiler pump is always configured. This boiler pump can also be operated parallel to the boiler, or it can be configured as a boiler bypass pump.
When using the pump as a boiler bypass pump, the configuration must be made on the
“Extra configuration“ menu.
TBo
Maintained boiler return temperature with 3position control
Main pump
Twin pump
Boiler pump B
MnPu
TRtBo
BoPu
Y2
TBo Boiler temperature sensor
TRtBo Boiler return temperature sensor
BoPu Boiler pump
MnPu Main pump
VlvRtMx Maintained return temperature mixing valve
VlvRtMx
Y2 Balancing valve
With plant types H4-x, the maintained boiler return temperature with 3-position mixing valve is already configured.
Configuration of a terminal pair for a 3-position mixing valve is required. The terminals available for selection are the free terminal pairs (Q1/Q2, Q3/Q4) for the on and the off signal. For that purpose, the special terminal pairs with RC radio interference suppression must be used.
If, in addition, a main pump shall be configured, this must be done on the “Main controller” block.
Optionally, a twin pump can be used in place of the boiler pump. In that case, in addition to boiler pump A, an output must also be assigned to boiler pump B via “Extra configuration“.
The single pump or twin pump can be monitored with a fault input and / or a flow switch.
For more detailed information, refer to section 5.8 “Pump control and twin pumps“.
Boiler pump B as a boiler twin pump
Shutoff valve
T T T
T
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
T
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
67/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Shutoff valve
In most cases, the boiler can be hydraulically decoupled via a shutoff valve. In the case of plant with a mixing valve for minimum limitation for the return temperature, this function is performed by the mixing valve. If the boiler is not released, the mixing valve is driven to the fully closed position so that the boiler will be hydraulically decoupled from the plant.
Shutoff valve for hydraulically decoupling the boiler from the system. It is possible to configure the shutoff valve to terminals with changeover contact so that both an on and an off contact are available.
Often, the shutoff valve is controlled “parallel“ to the boiler pump (common output), or the boiler pump is controlled parallel to the shutoff valve, but activated only when the shutoff valve is fully open.
T
Control of the shutoff valve
Y1 Y2 3 4
BuSt1
VlvShOff
VlvShOff Shutoff valve
If the shutoff valve and the boiler pump are controlled by different outputs, the shutoff valve must be driven to the fully open position before the boiler pump is activated and before the burner is switched on. Complete opening of the shutoff valve is ensured either by the valve’s checkback signal or the selected switch-on delay for the pump.
If a checkback signal shall be delivered, input Checkb sign shutoff valve must be configured for it. If a checkback signal from the shutoff valve is configured and there is no such signal on completion of the adjusted switch-on delay time, a fault status message will be delivered. This fault will lead to a boiler fault.
For more detailed information, refer to section 6.9 “Boiler faults”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Checkb sign shutoff valve
Operating line
Signal delay start
Range
00.05…59.55 m.s
If the boiler pump is installed in the bypass, there is no need to wait for switching on until the shutoff valve is open. In that case, the pump’s switch-on delay can be set to 0.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
> Settings > Boiler > Operation settings
Factory setting
02.00 m.s
Operating line
Switch-on delay pump
Switch-on delay burner
Shutoff valve (MBRT)
Range
0…255 s
0…255 s
Open / Closed
Factory setting
0 s
0 s
Open
If both the pump’s switch-on delay and the burner’s switch-on delay are parameterized, first the pump will be activated on completion of the pump’s switch-on delay; then, on completion of the burner’s switch-on delay, the burner will be released.
The selected overrun time acts on both the boiler pump and the shutoff valve (for setting
the overrun time, refer to subsection 6.6.4 “Boiler shutdown”).
Normally, the shutoff valve is fully open when the boiler is released. In the case of the maintained boiler return temperature where the boiler is always kept at the minimum temperature, the behavior of the shutoff valve can be parameterized.
When Open is selected for the shutoff valve (maintained boiler temperature), the valve will always be opened when the burner runs, even if there is no heat request.
68/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Depending on the type of hydraulic system used, this may not be required (e.g. bypass pump).
DC 0…10 V output for a DC 0…10 V mixing valve actuator.
Maintained boiler return temperature, continuously
Plant operation selector
6.3 Boiler operating modes and boiler setpoints
Main menu > Boiler > Boiler operating mode
Operating line
Preselection
Setp preselection manual
Range
Auto /
Release DHW / Off
---- / 8…140 °C
Factory setting
Auto
----
Preselection
Manual preselection of setpoint
State
Cause
Boiler temperature setpoints
Cause Commissioning /
Frost protection for consumer /
Overtemp protection/overrun /
Frost protection for boiler /
Operating mode selector /
Prot boil startup Boiler /
Release delay burner /
Outside temperature lock /
Minimum limitation boiler /
Test mode /
Flue gas measuring mode /
Request /
No request
The user can switch the boiler off via operation.
In operating mode “Release DHW“, only heat requests from DHW (digital input or via
Konnex bus) will be taken into consideration.
If “Off” is preselected, the internal frost protection function remains active. Heat requests from an external consumer resulting from frost protection will also be considered.
This setting can be used to preselect a minimum request for the boiler controller, which means that a maximum selection based on the consumers' requests will be maintained.
The boiler’s state is indicated (On / Off).
It is indicated why the current state is active.
The boiler temperature setpoint will be generated based on the temperature requests received from the consumers plus the setpoint increase.
The boiler temperature setpoint and the actual boiler temperature can be called up on the info level.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Operation settings
Operating line
Setpoint increase
Range
0…50 K
Factory setting
0 K
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
69/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Manual switch
Frost protection and release input
Outside temperature lock
Caution
6.4 Releasing and locking a boiler
A boiler can be released or locked either via the digital input (release input) or operation
(boiler operating mode).
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Boiler > Boiler operating mode
Operating line Range Factory setting
Preselection Auto / Release DHW /
Off
Auto
With the digital release input, the boiler will stay locked as long as the input is passive.
If the boiler is locked via the release input, setting Frost prot (release input off) can be used to select whether or not the boiler shall remain off also when there is a heat request due to frost protection.
• Setting Off: The boiler also remains off in the event of risk of frost
• Setting On: The boiler will be put into operation to ensure protection against frost
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Operating line Range Factory setting
Frost prot (release input off) Off / On On
The boiler can also be locked depending on the outside temperature:
• The boiler will be locked when the attenuated outside temperature exceeds the selected limit value
• The boiler will be released again when the composite outside temperature drops
1 K below the limit value
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Operation settings
Operating line
Outside temp lock limit value
Range
---- / 5…30 °C
Factory setting
---- °C
6.5 Test mode and commissioning aids
For commissioning and for test purposes, the boiler along with the burner can be put into various operating states via the service level.
Main menu > Boiler > Test mode
Operating line
Preselection test mode
Boil setp test mode
Modulation value test mode
Actual value boiler temperature
Range
Auto /
Boiler off /
Pump on (burner off) /
Stage 1 controlled /
St 1+2 controlled /
Modulating fixed
10…95 °C
0…100 %
Measured value
Factory setting
Auto
60 °C
0 %
The test mode is not automatically ended (no supervision of time-out!).
The inputs should only be overridden by qualified staff and only for a limited period of time!
70/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Auto
Boiler off
Pump on (burner off)
Stage 1 controlled
Stages 1
+ 2 controlled
Modulating, fixed
During test mode, fault status message Boiler test operation active is displayed. It is maintained until preselection “Test mode“ is set back to “Auto“. This is to make certain that the plant will not be quit without ending the test mode.
In the “Auto“ position, the boiler is released and the test mode deactivated.
The boiler will be switched off, that is, the burner will be shut down and the pumps deactivated.
The boiler is released. The aggregates (shutoff valve, maintained boiler return temperature with mixing valve, and boiler pump) are active, but the burner is still off.
The boiler is released and the burner with its stage 1 or the basic stage maintains the adjusted test mode setpoint.
The boiler is released and the burner with its stages 1 and 2 or the basic stage and modulating part maintains the adjusted test mode setpoint.
The boiler is released and the modulating burner runs to the modulation level according to the setting made. The burner will be switched off when the maximum boiler temperature limit value is exceeded.
Settings
Switching differential
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
6.5.1 2-position
Adjustable variables for 2-position control with a 1-stage burner:
• Boiler’s switching differential
• Minimum burner running time
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Burner
Operating line
TBo
Range Factory setting
Boiler switching differential
Burner run time min
1…20 K
0…60 min
6 K
4 min
The controller compares the actual value of the boiler temperature with the setpoint. If the boiler temperature falls below the setpoint by half the switching differential, the burner will be switched on. If the boiler temperature exceeds the setpoint by half the switching differential, the burner will be switched off.
TBo
TBoSetpt +
1
/
2
SDBo
TBoSetpt
TBoSetpt -
1
/
2
SDBo
Y
B
1
0
SDBo t
Boiler’s switching differential
Time
TBoSetpt Boiler temperature setpoint
Y
B
Burner control signal
t
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
71/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Minimum burner running time, burner cycling protection
If the switch-off point is reached before the minimum burner running time has elapsed, the burner will continue to operate until that time is completed (burner cycling protection). The minimum burner running time is given priority.
The burner’s switch-off point will be raised by half the boiler’s switching differential. If, within the minimum burner running time, the boiler temperature exceeds the setpoint by more than the full switching differential, the burner will be shut down although the minimum burner running time has not yet elapsed. On completion of the minimum burner running time, the burner’s switch-off point will be set to the boiler temperature setpoint plus half the switching differential.
TBo
TBo
TBoSetpt + SDBo
TBoSetpt +
1
/
2
SDBo
TBoSetpt
TBoSetpt -
1
/
2
SDBo
Basic stage t
BuRuntMin
1
0
BuRuntMin
Bu
1
0
Bu Burner
BuRuntMin
Minimum burner running time
SDBo
Boiler’s switching differential t
Time
TBoSetpt Boiler temperature setpoint
BuRuntMin
6.5.2 2-position
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Burner
Operating line
Release limit stage 2
Reset limit stage 2
Locking time stage 2
Range
0…500 K×m
0…500 K×m
0…60 min
BuRuntMin
Factory setting
50 K×m
10 K×m
10 min
6.5.3 Control basic stage and stage 2
This subsection describes the switching logic of the basic stage and the release and reset criteria for 2-stage burner operation.
As long as stage 2 is locked, the basic stage operates like a 1-stage burner.
As soon as stage 2 is released, the calculated switch-on and switch-off points for stage
2 apply.
Exception:
The second burner stage will be switched off as soon as the actual boiler temperature has risen to a level lying the setting value Delta boiler max (stage 2) below the
switched off and stage 2 locked.
72/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Burner stage 2
The release logic for 2-stage operation aims at ensuring an optimum switch-on time for stage 2 which, in addition to a time criterion, also considers the amount of heat deficit, calculated with a temperature-time integral.
Time criterion
Temperature-time integral
Logic for locking stage 2
As soon as the burner’s basic stage is switched on, the minimum locking time for burner stage 2 starts to run. This ensures that the burner will always operate with the basic stage for a certain minimum period of time.
The temperature-time integral is a continuous summation of the temperature differential over time. In this case, the decisive criterion is the difference by which the boiler temperature falls below the burner’s switch-on setpoint.
°C
TBo
52
TBuOffPt
50
48 a
TBoSetpt
TBUOnPt
46 t release
44 t
TBoSetpt Boiler temperature setpoint t t
TBuOffPt Burner’s switch-off temperature
TBuOnPt Burner’s switch-on temperature
TBo Actual value of the boiler temperature release
Time
Time to release
As long as the boiler temperature lies below the switch-on point – after the basic stage has been switched on – the controller will build up the release integral. If the boiler temperature lies above the switch-on point, the controller will reduce the release integral. Through the generation of the temperature-time integral it is not only the period of time that is considered, but also the extent of undershoot. This means that when the undershoot is significant, the release after the integral criterion will be reached earlier than with a small undershoot.
When the release integral (area “a” in the diagram) reaches the set value of the release integral of stage 2 (point in time t release
) and the minimum locking time has elapsed, stage 2 will be released. During the period of time burner stage 2 is released, the controller will activate and deactivate stage 2 according to the set switching differential.
The logic for locking burner stage 2 is based on the amount of excess heat, which is also calculated with the help of a temperature-time integral.
As long as the boiler temperature lies above the switch-off point – after the second stage has been switched off – the controller will build up the reset integral. If the boiler temperature lies below the switch-off point, the controller will reduce the reset integral.
The duration and the difference between switch-off point and boiler temperature will be summed up.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
73/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Note
74/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
°C
52
TBo b
TBuOffPt
50
48
TBoSetpt
TBuOnPt
46 t reset
44
TBo Actual value of the boiler temperature
TBoSetpt Boiler temperature setpoint t
TBuOffPt Burner’s switch-off temperature t
TBuOnPt Burner’s switch-on temperature t
Through the generation of the temperature-time integral it is not only the period of time that is considered, but also the extent of overshoot. This means that when the overshoot is significant, burner stage 2 will be locked earlier.
When the reset integral (area "b" in the diagram) reaches the set value of the reset integral of stage 2 (point in time t reset
), stage 2 will be locked and the basic stage switched off.
TBo
TBoSrtpt +
1
/
2
SDBo
TBoSetpt -
1
/
2
SDBo
t
BuSt1
1
0
t
INT
max.
max.
0
RlsINT RstINT
RstINT
t
RlsBuSt2
1
0
t
BuSt2
1
0
t
BuSt1 Burner 1
BuSt2
INT
Burner stage 2
Integral
RlsBuSt2
Release of burner stage 2
Rst Reset
SD Switching differential
Setpt Setpoint t
Time
TBo Boiler temperature
If, with stages 1 and 2 released, both stages are locked at the same time, the basic stage will be switched off with a delay of 10 seconds. Switching off in 2 stages also reduces the pressure shocks in the gas supply line. This prevents unnecessary lockout in the case of large boiler outputs.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
6.5.4 Control of modulating burners
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Burner modulating
Operating line Range Factory setting
Actuator run time
P-band Xp
1…600 s
1…200 K
60 s
20 K
Integral action time Tn
Derivative action time Tv
0…600 s
0…30 s
150 s
20 s
Modulating burners only modulate above a certain level. For standard forced draft burners, this level is at about 30 to 40 % of the rated capacity.
When the demand for heat is small, the basic stage cycles. When the demand for heat increases, the 3-position output or a DC 0…10 V output is used to control the combustion air damper.
At the same time, the amount of fuel supplied will also be increased, typically via an additional switch on the air damper, or by simultaneous control of the amount of fuel
(gas / air ratio).
P M BV OH Q...
Recommended values for modulating burners
z
SA
M
LK
Basic design of a forced draft burner
ACC Combustion air damper, fixed or motorized
M Fan
OH Oil preheater; located between nozzle and adjustable head with small light-oil burners, separate unit in the case of large heavy-oil burners
P Oil pump, coupled to fan motor
Q… Flame detector
SA Electromotoric air damper actuator
The functioning with regard to activation and deactivation of the basic stage corresponds to that of 2-stage burner operation. Release of modulation is analogous to the release of the second stage.
The parameters used for the release and reset integral are the same as those used for the 2-stage burner. Compared to the 2-stage burner, the release integral should be selected smaller however (because in this case, it is not the entire capacity of stage 2 that is switched on, but only the modulating part that is released), and the reset integral can be selected greater.
Release integral stage 2 or modulation: 10 K×m
Reset integral stage 2 or modulation 20 K×m
Locking time stage 2 or modulation 10 min
The locking time of stage 2 or modulation must be matched to the type of burner.
This ensures that the burner will always run in its basic stage for a minimum period of time.
On burner startup and release of the basic stage, the controller drives the damper actuator towards the fully closed position for a certain period of time. This ensures that, after the burner startup sequence (prepurging, ignition, stabilization of flame, etc.), the
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
75/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Release integral modulation damper actuator will be driven to the start position so that only the basic stage will be used for heating.
Deactivation or locking of modulation occurs at the same moment in time as the change from the basic stage to cycling operation. If not yet done, the controller will again drive the damper actuator to the fully closed position.
TBo
TBoSetpt + SDBo
TBoSetpt + ½ SDBo
TBoSetpt
1 K
1 K
TBoSetpt ½ SDBo
a b a t
St
Basic
Neutral zone
Settings
Actuator running time
Example
St
Modulat.
d c d d a b c d
SDBo
Release integral modulation (release integral stage 2 with 2-stage burner)
Reset integral modulation (reset integral stage 2 with 2-stage burner)
Neutral zone
On / off pulses
Boiler’s switching differential
St Basic Burner’s basic stage
St Modul. Burner’s modulation stage
TBoSetpt Boiler temperature setpoint
The controller has a neutral zone with a band of ±1 K about the current boiler temperature setpoint. If the boiler temperature stays within the neutral zone for a period of time beyond the adjusted integral action time, no more positioning pulses will be delivered.
If the boiler temperature does not stay long enough in the neutral zone, or outside of it, positioning pulses will drive the actuator toward the fully open or fully closed position.
Maximum limitation of the boiler temperature and minimum burner running time are handled analogously to 2-stage burner operation.
Control of the air damper must be matched to the plant’s behavior (controlled system) to ensure that if the load changes (e.g. increase of heat demand), the plant will quickly increase heat production in a way that the boiler temperature will only slightly deviate from its setpoint, and for short periods of time only.
The following settings can be made on the controller:
• Air damper running time
• Proportional band (Xp)
• Integral action time (Tn)
• Derivative action time (Tv)
To ensure correct control of the burner, the effective air damper running time must be set. The modulation range is decisive for the actuator’s running time.
Running time of damper actuator (90°) = 15 seconds, minimum position of damper actuator = 20°.
Maximum position of damper actuator = 80°.
Hence, the damper actuator running time effective for the control is as follows:
15 s * (80° – 20°)
90°
= 10 s
76/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Proportional band (Xp)
Integral action time (Tn)
Derivative action time
(Tv)
Setting rules for
Xp, Tn and Tv
Checking the control function
Control action is too slow
The proportional band has an impact on the controller’s P-characteristic.
With a setpoint / actual value deviation of 20 K, a setting of Xp = 20 K produces a manipulated variable corresponding to the damper actuator’s running time.
The integral action time has an impact on the controller’s I-characteristic.
The derivative action time has an impact on the controller’s D-characteristic. If Tv = 0, the controller has PI characteristics.
The majority of plants change their behavior depending on the load.
If the setting values are not adequately adjusted, the control system’s response is either too slow or too fast. If the control system operates correctly in the upper load range and not satisfactorily in the lower load range (or vice versa), average values must be used, which may lead to a slightly less satisfactory control performance in the load range which previously showed good performance.
It should be made certain that, when commissioning the modulating burner for the first time, the default parameters for Xp, Tn and Tv will be used. To optimize and check the control parameters, it is recommended to follow the procedure detailed below under
”Checking the control function”.
To check the behavior of the control system with the preset control parameters, the following procedure is recommended:
After the controller has reached and held the setpoint for a certain period of time, change the setpoint by 5 to 10 %, either up or down. When making this test, it is of advantage to have the plant operating in the lower load range where, usually, control is more difficult.
In principle, control must be stable, but it can be fast- or slow-acting.
If fast control is required, the boiler temperature must reach the new setpoint fairly quickly.
If fast control of a setpoint change is not a mandatory requirement, the control action can be rather slow. This offers practically non-oscillating control, which reduces wear on the actuator and on other electromechanical controls used in the plant.
If the correcting action does not produce the required result, the control parameters should be adjusted as follows:
If the control system’s response is too slow, setting parameters Xp, Tv and Tn must be decreased in steps. A new readjustment should be made only after the control action resulting from the previous readjustment is completed.
TBo
TBoSetpt
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
t
1. Reduce Xp in steps of about 25 % of the previous value.
2. Reduce Tv in steps of 1 to 2 seconds (when the value of 0 is reached, the controller operates as a PI controller).
If this is not sufficient:
3. Decrease Tn in steps of 10 to 20 seconds.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
77/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Control action is too fast
If the control system’s response is too prompt so that significant overshoot or even permanent oscillations occur, setting parameters Xp, Tn and Tv must be increased in steps. A new readjustment should be made only after the control action resulting from the previous readjustment is completed.
TBo
TBoSetpt
Setpoint compensation
Settings
t
1. Reduce Xp in steps of about 25 % of the previous value.
2. Increase Tv in steps of 2 to 5 seconds.
If this is not sufficient:
3. Increase Tn in steps of 10 to 20 seconds.
6.5.5 External boiler temperature control
The RMH760B delivers a DC 0…10 V signal as the boiler temperature setpoint for an external boiler temperature controller.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Setp compensation boiler
Operating line
Setpoint at 0 Volt
Setpoint at 10 Volt
Range
–150…50 °C
50…500 °C
Factory setting
0 °C
100 °C
Limit value 0…140 °C 10 °C
Using setting parameters, the DC 0…10 V output can be matched to the receiver’s input. In the case of setpoints below the limit value, the output indicates DC 0 V.
6.6 Protective boiler functions
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Operating line
Boiler temperature max
Boiler temperature min
Optimization min boiler temp
Boiler return temperature min
Bypass pump switching diff
Lock sig maintained boil ret temp
Frost prot (release input off)
Frost prot (release input Off)
Frost prot (release input off)
Protective boiler startup
Protective boiler startup
Delta boiler temp max (stage 2)
Range Factory setting
25…140 °C
8…140 °C
On / Off
95 °C
10 °C
On
---- / 8…140 °C
1…20 K
---- °C
6 K
None / Uncritical / Critical Critical
0…60 min 6 min
On / Off
On / Off
On / Off
Pump on / Pump off
On
Off
On
Pump on
0…10 K 1 K
78/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
80
70
60
50
40
6.6.1 Maximum limitation of the boiler temperature
This setting is used to provide maximum limitation of the boiler temperature setpoint.
For control of the burner, this value represents the switch-off point. In this range, the boiler’s switching differential downward is calculated.
Maximum limitation of the boiler temperature is always active. The only exception is the wiring test.
TBo
TBoMax
TBoSetpt
SDBo
20
SDB0
TBo
TBoMax
TBoMin
TBoSetpt
TBoMin
10 0 -10
Boiler’s switching differential
Boiler temperature
Maximum limit of the boiler temperature
Minimum limit of the boiler temperature
Boiler temperature setpoint
-20 °C
HD
6.6.2 Minimum
This setting is used to provide minimum limitation of the boiler temperature. For control of the burner, this value represents the switch-on point. In this range, the boiler’s switching differential upward is calculated.
Maintenance of the minimum boiler temperature is dependent on the boiler shutdown setting (see below).
When there is a heat request, the minimum boiler temperature is always active.
If a minimum return temperature is required, it must be ensured that the minimum boiler temperature will be set to a level which lies a few K above the minimum return temperature.
6.6.3 Optimization of minimum boiler temperature
If optimization of the minimum boiler temperature is set to On, the control system will select the switch-on point such that, normally, the boiler temperature will not drop below the minimum. Using this function, a load-dependent forward shift of the burner’s switchon point can be achieved. In that case, the minimum boiler temperature need not be determined with an unnecessarily great safety factor since with large loads, the burner switches on earlier and, with small loads, later. Hence, the range in which the boiler temperature can be shifted can be widened.
Based on the boiler temperature gradient, the controller calculates the burner’s switchon point to ensure that the boiler temperature will not drop below the minimum.
When the function is deactivated, the controller switches the burner on at the minimum boiler temperature TBoMin.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
79/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
80/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
TBoMin
TBoMin
Burner swich-on command
Optimization of minimum boiler temperature On
Burner swich-on command
Optimization of minimum boiler temperature Off
6.6.4 Protection
To protect the boiler against overtemperatures on burner shutdown because, possibly, none of the heat consumers draws heat, a consumer overrun time can be set.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Operating line Range Factory setting
Consumer overrun time 0…60 min 6 min
After the burner has shut down, the overrun time ensures that the heating circuits and
DHW heating will still draw heat for that period of time, provided they were consuming heat up to one minute before the burner was shut down. In any case, pumps and mixing valves have an overrun time of 60 seconds. For more detailed information, refer
to section 5.4 “Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun”.
The overrun time also applies to boiler pumps and shutoff valves (including mixing valves for the maintained boiler return temperature).
6.6.5 Pump kick and valve kick
The pump kick is a protective function which is performed periodically. It prevents pumps and / or valves from seizing after longer off periods. For more detailed informa-
tion, refer to section 5.5 “Pump kick and valve kick”.
6.6.6 Frost protection (release input Off)
If an external release input is switched to “Off", it can be determined here whether or not the frost protection function shall be active:
Entry Effect
On Frost protection active
Off Frost protection inactive
6.6.7 Frost protection for plant with boiler pump
Set whether plant frost protection acts on boiler pump. For details on plant frost protec-
tion, see Section 5.3 "Frost protection for the plant“.
6.6.8 Protective boiler startup
To protect the boiler against condensation, a minimum boiler temperature is usually preset. This ensures that, in normal operation, the boiler temperature will not fall below a minimum level.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Operating line Range Factory setting
Protective boiler startup On / Off On
To prevent the boiler temperature from staying below that minimum level for unnecessary lengths of time, the amount of heat drawn by DHW heating and the heating circuits can be restricted until the boiler temperature has again risen above the minimum limit value. Protective boiler startup generates critical locking signals (for more detailed
information, refer to subsection 5.6.2 “Load control”).
In the case of plant with mixing valve for the maintained boiler temperature, protective boiler startup is ensured by the mixing valve. In that case, locking signals for protective boiler startup will not be generated.
Boiler pump
Protective boiler startup and frost protection for the plant
It can be selected whether or not the boiler pump shall be switched off (pump off) when protective boiler startup is active.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Operating line Range Factory setting
Protective boiler startup Pump on / Pump off Pump on
Protective boiler startup can be interrupted by the controller in order to ensure frost protection for the plant in the event of burner faults, for example.
In the case of protective boiler startup and simultaneous frost protection for the plant, the boiler temperature gradient must turn positive within 15 minutes. Otherwise, the locking signal will become invalid for at least 15 minutes. Protective boiler startup becomes active after 15 minutes as soon as the boiler temperature gradient turns positive.
Without boiler shutdown
Automatic boiler shutdown
Summer
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
6.6.9 Boiler
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Protective boiler startup
Operating line Range Factory setting
Boiler shutdown Without / Automatic /
Summer
Automatic
Here, it can be selected when minimum limitation of the boiler temperature shall be active.
This setting ensures that the boiler is always maintained at the minimum boiler temperature.
This setting ensures that the boiler is maintained at the minimum boiler temperature when there is a heat request from one of the consumers. If there is no heat request, the boiler temperature may drop below its minimum.
When using the Summer setting, the boiler is not maintained at the minimum boiler temperature only when the boiler has identified summer operation. The change to summer operation takes place at midnight when, previously, the boiler has received no heat request from the heating circuits for 48 hours. A heat request from DHW heating will be accepted, however.
The boiler also identifies summer operation when it has received no valid boiler temperature setpoint for more than 48 hours, or when the composite outside temperature has exceeded the outside temperature limit value.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
81/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
6.6.10 Frost protection for the boiler
The boiler temperature is monitored to ensure frost protection for the boiler.
If the boiler temperature drops below 5 °C, the burner will be switched on.
When the boiler temperature returns to a level above TBoMin + SD (minimum boiler temperature plus switching differential), the burner will be shut down.
Maintained boiler return temperature through lower consumer setpoints
6.6.11 Maintained
Minimum limitation of the return temperature shall ensure that, in the area of the boiler inlet also, the temperature will not drop below the permissible level.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Operating line Range Factory setting
Boiler return temperature min
Lock sig maintained boil ret temp
---- / 8…140 °C
None / Uncritical /
Critical
----
Critical
In the case of a boiler with the boiler pump connected in series with the boiler, the maintained boiler return temperature is ensured by reducing the amount of heat drawn by the heating circuits. The function is activated as soon as a minimum limit value of the boiler return temperature is set and a return temperature sensor is present.
This function is also available when only a return temperature sensor is configured (that is, no boiler and no pump). It is intended for use in plants with no direct boiler control.
In a networked system, only one boiler return sensor may be used since its measured value can generate a locking signal. Locking signals may only have one single source.
TBo
BoPu
TRtBo
If the boiler return temperature drops below the limit value, a locking signal will be generated and delivered to all consumers. These will then lower their setpoints or switch their pumps off (e.g. the storage tank charging pump).
The type of locking signal can be parameterized. The factory setting generates a critical locking signal. This means that heating circuits, precontrol, DHW charging and, if present, a system pump would be switched off or reduced.
Setting Uncritical (uncritical locking signals) ensures that DHW heating, precontrol, and the system pump will not be impacted by the maintained boiler return temperature.
For the heating circuits, it can be parameterized whether or not they shall respond to uncritical locking signals.
It is important to check whether the return temperature sensor is exposed to return water in all operating states. If, during DHW charging, the return temperature is not correctly acquired, it must be made certain that the maintained boiler return temperature will have no impact on DHW heating. Also, the maintained boiler return temperature must not act on the main pump if the return temperature is only correctly acquired when the main pump runs.
Maintained boiler return temperature with bypass pump
In the case of a boiler with bypass pump (boiler pump parallel to the boiler), maintained boiler return temperature can be ensured by activating the bypass pump.
82/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
TBo
Control of the bypass pump parallel to burner operation
Maintained boiler return temperature controlled by mixing valve
ByPu
TRtBo
The bypass pump can be controlled either according to the acquired return temperature or, when there is no sensor, parallel to burner operation.
Normally, the return temperature sensor is installed upstream of the bypass pump (on the consumer side) to avoid too frequent switching of the bypass pump.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Operating line
Bypass pump switching diff
Range
0…20 K
Factory setting
6 K
The return temperature is controlled with the bypass pump in 2-position mode within the adjustable switching differential.
The pump will be activated when there is demand for heat and when the return temperature drops below its minimum limit value.
The pump will be deactivated when the return temperature exceeds its minimum limit value by the switching differential, or when there is no demand for heat.
TBo
TBoR
60
50
40
30
10 20 30
TBoRmin+SDByP
TBoRmin
t [min]
Br
1
0
t
TiOverrunCnsm
ByP
1
0
t
Br Burner
SDByP t
TBo
Switching differential of bypass pump
Time
Boiler temperature
TBoRmin Minimum limit value of the boiler return temperature
TiOverrunCnsm Consumer overrun time
In addition to activating the bypass pump, locking signals are generated if required and when a return temperature sensor is connected. If this is not required, setting “None“ can be selected for “Lock sig maintained boil ret temp”.
If no return temperature is available, the bypass pump will be controlled parallel to burner operation. The bypass pump always runs when released and when the basic burner stage is on.
When using a boiler with mixing valve in the boiler return (plant type H4-x), maintained boiler return temperature will be ensured by the separate mixing valve.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
83/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
TBo
TRtBo
BoPu
MnPu
VlvShOff
Faulty return temperature sensor
VlvRtMx
The 3-port mixing valve ensures both protective boiler startup and maintained boiler return temperature.
The main pump can also be configured, in addition to the boiler pump. In that case, it must be made certain that the main pump will not operate when the mixing valve is fully closed. To prevent this, a bypass or overflow valve can be installed.
In this type of plant, the main pump provides the function of a system pump. And with this type of plant, it must be made certain that the main pump will not operate when the main controller’s mixing valve is fully closed. It is recommended not to use a mixing valve in connection with the main controller.
To adapt the control parameters to the type of plant (actuator and controlled system), the same setting parameters as those used with the mixing heating circuit are available.
For more detailed information, refer to section 5.7 “Mixing valve control”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Return control
Operating line
Actuator run time
P-band Xp
Integral action time Tn
Range
1…600 s
1…100 K
0…600 s
Factory setting
120 s
50 K
60 s
If a minimum return temperature shall be ensured, the minimum boiler temperature must be selected accordingly. The minimum boiler temperature must be higher than the minimum return temperature.
In the case of plants with mixing valve for the maintained boiler return temperature, the mixing valve will be driven to the fully closed position when the return temperature sensor is faulty and then deenergized to allow manual adjustment.
If no return temperature sensor is configured, a fault status message will appear.
If a return temperature sensor is configured but no return temperature limitation set, the sensor will only be used for display purposes.
6.6.12 Protection against pressure shocks
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Limitations
Operating line Range Factory setting
Delta boiler temp max (stage 2) 0…10 K 1 K
To prevent pressure shocks in the gas network when stages 1 and 2 are simultaneously switched off, stage 2 is switched off before the maximum boiler temperature is reached, the difference being “Delta boiler temp max (stage 2)“.
When the boiler is locked, stage 1 is switched off after stage 2, the difference in time being 10 seconds.
84/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
6.7 Flue gas temperature supervision
Flue gas temperature supervision offers:
• Display of the current flue gas temperature
• Display of the maximum flue gas temperature acquired after a selected point in time
• Supervision of the flue gas temperature limit including alarm should the limit value be exceeded
An appropriate sensor must always be configured, independent of usage.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Boiler > Inputs
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
Flue gas temperature sensor Assign input
In contrast to the other temperature inputs, where the default configuration is a Ni1000 sensor, sensor type Pt1000 is used here. The type of sensor can be adapted under
Settings > Inputs at the configured terminal.
Through configuration of the sensor, the following functions are made possible:
Slave pointer function
Diagnostic values
This function is active as soon as a flue gas temperature sensor is configured.
Main menu > Boiler > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
Flue gas temperature maximum
It is always the maximum flue gas temperature that is saved and displayed. The displayed value can be adjusted like a setting value (e.g. to 0 °C), whereupon the slave pointer will start at zero again.
The maximum value is filtered to suppress faults. This means that the maximum flue gas temperature rises at a maximum rate of 1 K/s.
Supervision of maximum value
Supervision of maximum value and boiler stop
If a flue gas temperature limit value is parameterized, a fault status message will be delivered should the limit value be exceeded.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu
>
Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Flue temp supervision
Operating line Range Factory setting
Flue gas temperature limit value ---- / 0…400 °C ---- °C
When the actual flue gas temperature lies 5 K below the maximum value, the fault status message can be reset by making an acknowledgement. When resetting, the slave pointer value is also reset to the current value.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
>
Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Flue temp supervision
Operating line Range Factory setting
Impact of fault No stop / Stop No stop
Fault priority Urgent / Nonurgent Nonurgent
When a flue gas limit temperature is monitored, it can also be determined whether crossing of the limit value shall cause the boiler to shut down (No stop / Stop).
Main menu > Boiler > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Flue gas temperature
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Flue gas temperature maximum
The current flue gas temperature and the maximum flue gas temperature are available as diagnostic values.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
85/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Burner fault
86/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
6.8 Flue gas measuring mode
Flue gas measuring mode can be triggered either via a digital input (…Inputs > Flue gas
measuring mode) or operation.
Main menu > Boiler > Flue gas measuring mode
Operating line Range Factory setting
Preselection
Flue gas meas mode contact
Release stage 2/modulation
Actual value boiler temperature
Flue gas temperature
Off / On
0 / 1
Yes / No Yes
Off
When the flue gas measuring mode is activated, boiler pump and peripheral devices will be put into operation. The boiler is assigned a boiler temperature setpoint of 90 °C.
This value is limited by the maximum boiler temperature.
During the time the flue gas measuring mode is active, supervision of the maximum permissible flue gas temperature will not lead to a plant stop. However, should the maximum permissible flue gas temperature be exceeded, a fault status message will be displayed.
The function will automatically be ended after 30 minutes.
6.9 Boiler faults
If a boiler initiates lockout, it will be shut down until the fault is rectified.
A boiler is considered faulty if one of the following faults occurred:
• Burner fault
• Boiler pump fault
• Fault of shutoff valve (no checkback signal)
• Maximum permissible flue gas temperature exceeded (if plant stop is required)
• One of the 3 digital fault inputs indicates a fault
• Faulty boiler temperature sensor
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Boiler > Inputs
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
Checkback signal burner
Checkb sign shutoff valve
Fault burner
Fault input 1
Fault input 2
Fault input 3
[Boiler pump] overload
[Boiler pump B] overload
Flow signal pump
The type of fault input can be parameterized at menu item …Settings > Inputs at the relevant terminal.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs
Operating line
Normal position
Range
Open / Closed
Factory setting
Open
A burner fault can be indicated by the burner fault input, or it can be generated when there is no burner checkback signal from the controller.
The waiting time for the burner’s checkback signal can be adjusted (signal delay).
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Fault shutoff valve
Maximum flue gas temperature
Digital fault inputs
Fault settings
If there is no checkback signal from the shutoff valve, the boiler is considered faulty also. The waiting time for the checkback signal can be adjusted. If there is no checkback signal on completion of the waiting time, a fault will be signaled.
It can be selected whether or not flue gas temperatures above the maximum permissible level shall lead to a fault with boiler stop.
There are 3 digital fault inputs available having a default parameterization for water shortage, high-pressure and low-pressure. But it is also possible to use other fault text.
Depending on the type of fault, the signal delay, fault acknowledgement, priority and / or action can be parameterized. For fault inputs 1, 2 and 3, it is also possible to enter fault text.
For details about the meaning of these settings, refer to chapter 13 “Function block faults”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Checkb sign shutoff valve
Operating line
Signal delay start
Range
00.05…59.55 m.s
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Fault burner
Factory setting
02.00 m.s
Operating line
Fault acknowledgement
Range
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Factory setting
Acknowledge
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Checkback signal burner
Operating line
Signal delay start
Signal interruption operation
Impact of fault
Operating line
Fault acknowledgement
Fault acknowledgement B
Range
00.05…59.55 m.s
00.00…59.55 m.s
No stop / Stop
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Overload pump
Range
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Fault input 1
Factory setting
04.00 m.s
20.00 m.s
Stop
Factory setting
Acknowledge and reset
Acknowledge and reset
Operating line
Fault text
Impact of fault
Fault acknowledgement
Fault priority
Fault status message delay
Range
Max. 20 characters
No stop / Stop
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Urgent / Not urgent
00.00…59.55 m.s
Factory setting
Water shortage
Stop
Acknowledge
Urgent
00.05 m.s
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
87/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Fault input 2
Operating line
Fault settings
Impact of fault
Fault acknowledgement
Fault priority
Fault status message delay
Range
Max. 20 characters
No stop / Stop
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Urgent / Not urgent
00.00…59.55 m.s
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Fault input 3
Operating line
Fault settings
Impact of fault
Fault acknowledgement
Fault priority
Fault status message delay
Range
Max. 20 characters
No stop / Stop
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Urgent / Not urgent
00.00…59.55 m.s
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Flue temp supervision
Operating line
Flue gas temperature limit value
Impact of fault
Fault priority
Range
---- / 8…400 °C
No stop / Stop
Urgent / Not urgent
Factory setting
Overpressure
Stop
Acknowledge
Urgent
00.05 m.s
Factory setting
Underpressure
Stop
Acknowledge
Urgent
00.05 m.s
Factory setting
---- °C
No stop
Nonurgent
6.10 Burner hours run counter and burner start counter
For burner stage 1 or the burner’s basic stage, a checkback signal can be configured.
In addition to burner supervision, this checkback signal is used for the burner hours run counter and the burner start counter.
When there is no checkback signal, the burner hours run counter is started by the output relay for burner stage 1.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Boiler > Inputs
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
Checkback signal burner Assign input
The number of burner hours run and the number of burner starts are shown on the
“Inputs/setpoints“ menu. On the user level, they can only be read, on the service level, they can also be readjusted. It is thus possible to set the effective values.
or
Main menu > Boiler > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Burner hours run
Burner start counter
Range
0…99999 h
0…99999
Factory setting
0 h
0
88/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Sensor error
Burner faults
Boiler faults
Faults of the boiler pump
6.11 Fault handling
Number Text
40
41
321
Boiler sensor error
Boiler return sensor error
Effect
Urgent message; must be acknowledged.
No boiler stop; the burner is shut down
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged. No boiler stop
In the case of plant with mixing valve for the maintained boiler return temperature, the mixing valve will be driven to the fully closed position when the return temperature sensor is faulty and then deenergized to make possible manual adjustment.
Otherwise, the control system behaves like a plant without return temperature sensor
Flue gas temp sensor error Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged. No boiler stop
Number Text
2301
2311
Boiler burner fault
Effect
Urgent message.
Acknowledgement can be parameterized; factory setting: “Acknowledge”. Boiler stop
Burner no checkback signal Urgent message; must be acknowledged and reset. Effect can be parameterized; factory setting: “Stop”. Boiler stop
Number Text
2321
2331
2341
2351
2361
Boiler water shortage
Boiler overpressure
Effect
Priority, effect and acknowledgement can be parameterized.
Factory setting: “Urgent”. Boiler stop, must be acknowledged
Priority, effect and acknowledgement can be parameterized.
Factory setting: “Urgent”. Boiler stop, must be acknowledged
Boiler underpressure Priority, effect and acknowledgement can be parameterized.
Factory setting: “Urgent”. Boiler stop, must be acknowledged
Urgent message; must be acknowledged Shutoff valve no checkb signal and reset. Boiler stop
Flue gas overtemperature Priority and effect can be parameterized.
Factory setting: “Nonurgent”. No boiler stop, must be acknowledged and reset
Number Text
2401 [Boiler pump] overload
Effect
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be parameterized; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“.
No boiler stop
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
89/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Inputs/setpoints
90/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Number Text
2411
[Boiler pump] no flow
2421 [Boiler pump B] overload
2431
2441
[Main pump B] no flow
[Boiler pump] fault
Effect
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset. No boiler stop
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be parameterized.
Factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“.
No boiler stop
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset. No boiler stop
Urgent message; must not be acknowledged. Boiler stop
6.12 Text for boiler designation
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > …
Main menu > Settings > Boiler
Operating line
Boiler
Range
Max. 20 characters
Factory setting
Boiler
If required, specific text can be used to designate the boiler. This text will then appear on the menu and on the info display.
6.13 Diagnostic
Main menu > Boiler > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Release input
Actual value boiler temperature
Boiler temperature setpoint
Actual value return temp
Return temperature min
Checkb sign shutoff valve
[Boiler pump] overload
[Boiler pump B] overload
Flow signal pump
Fault burner
Checkback signal burner
Burner hours run
Burner start counter
Flue gas temperature
Flue gas temperature maximum
Flue gas temperature limit value
Flue gas meas mode contact
Fault text
Fault input 1
Fault text
Fault input 2
Fault text
Fault input 3
Attenuated outside temp
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Fault text for fault input 1
Fault text for fault input 2
Fault text for fault input 3
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Outputs
Limitations
Main menu
> Boiler > Outputs
Operating line
Burner stage 1
Burner stage 2
Signal modulating burner
Setpoint compensation
Boiler pump
Boiler pump B
Shutoff valve
Mix valve pos maint return temp
Main menu
> Boiler > Limitations
Operating line
Boiler temperature max
Boiler temperature min
Protective boiler startup
Boiler return temperature min
Burner run time min
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
6 Boiler temperature control
91/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Hydraulics of heat requests
7 Heat demand and heat requests
7.1 Heat
The following sources can deliver heat requests to the controller:
• The internal heating circuit
• The internal DHW circuit
• External controllers via the Konnex bus
• As a continuous DC 0…10 V signal
• As a 2-position signal
Heat requests can be delivered either via the main controller or the primary controller.
T
B
Primary controller
T
T
Main controller
A
B
Primary controller
T
T
T
Main controller
A
The internal heating circuit and the internal DHW circuit are connected to the main controller. Connection to the primary controller necessitates the use of a second device.
92/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
7 Heat demand and heat requests
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Main flow maximum setpoint
Main flow setpoint
Setpoint boost
+
+
Main controller
+
+
Primary controller
KNX
Heat demand transformers
Setpoint boost
Setpoint boost
+
+
Internal heating circuit
+
+
Internal
DHW heating
KNX
Heat request heating circuits
Heat request DHW
Heat request primary controller
Heat request heating circuits
Heat request DHW
Heat request primary controller
Heat request DC 0...10 V
Heat request heating curve
Heat request contact DHW
Heat request contact frost protection
KNX
Heat request air handling
Heat request individual room, air heating coil
Heat request individual room, radiator
Service level
Manual setpoint preselection
Heat request DC 0...10 V
Heat request heating curve
Heat demand transformers
Heat request contact DHW
Heat request contact frost protection
KNX
Heat request air handling
Heat request individual room, air heating coil
Heat request individual room, radiator
Note
The connection via the main controller and primary controller is described in chapter 8
“Main controller and primary controller”.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
7.2 Heat demand outputs
The main flow setpoint (without giving consideration to limitations) can be delivered via an analog output (DC 0…10 V). For that, function “Heat demand modulating“ on the main controller must be activated. The output can be matched to specific situations.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Heat demand modulating
Operating line
Value low
Value high
Range
–150…50 °C
50…500 °C
Factory setting
0 °C
100 °C
Limit value 0…140 °C 10 °C
The heat demand relay (to be configured on the main controller also) can indicate whether there is demand for heat. The switching points can be adjusted.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Heat demand relay
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
7 Heat demand and heat requests
93/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Example: Air handling plant
Operating line Range Factory setting
Limit value heat demand ON
Limit value heat demand OFF
0…140 °C
0…140 °C
20 °C
15 °C
Both outputs are always available, even if no main controller has been configured.
• If only a boiler is configured, the requests received will be forwarded to the boiler
• If neither a boiler nor a main controller is configured, the requests received from the heat distribution zone will be forwarded
For notes on configuration, refer to section 8.2 “Configuration”.
7.3 Heat demand transformer
Heat demand transformers are available both with the main controller and the primary controller. They receive and handle the heat request signals from:
• The individual room radiators (RXB…)
• The individual room air heating coils (RXB…)
• Air handling plant (RMU…)
If the main controller is not activated, the boiler can make use of the main controller’s heat demand transformer.
The transformers convert the position heat request signals (in %) into heat demand signals with a flow temperature setpoint.
The following example of an air handling plant shows this.
Air supply area
T
Room unit
(in reference room)
Central air handling
T
Ventilation
RMU...
0...100 %
Heat demand transformer
Refrigeration demand transformer
DHW precontrol
T T
Chilled water precontrol
Precontrol heating
Precontrol refrigeration
RMH760B
RMH760B
The heat demand transformers calculate a flow temperature setpoint based on the valve position of the air handling plant(s).
If the primary controller is capable of delivering an outside temperature signal, the flow temperature setpoint according to the heating curve will be used as the start value. If no outside temperature signal is available, the start value used will be the flow temperature at curvepoint 1.
This flow temperature start value is matched to the actual heat demand in a way that the valve position of the heat consumer with the greatest heat demand is 90 %.
• If the valve position is >90 %, the flow temperature will be increased
• If the valve position is <90 %, the flow temperature will be decreased
The maximum flow temperature readjustment can be parameterized.
94/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
7 Heat demand and heat requests
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Adaptation of the flow temperature
Note
To ensure that minimum opening travel of the valve will not generate a demand for heat, a switch-on or switch-off threshold can be defined. The factory settings are as follows:
• A demand for heat will be calculated only when the valve positions are >10 %
• When the valve positions of all consumers are <5 %, the demand for heat will be suppressed again
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Demand control
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Demand control
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Demand control
Operating line
[Curvepoint 1] outside temp
[Curvepoint 1] flow temp
[Curvepoint 2] outside temp
[Curvepoint 2] flow temp
Flow temp correction max
Control mode
Request evaluation
Limit value request on
Limit value request off
Flow temperature
Range
–50…50 °C
0…140 °C
–50…50 °C
0…140 °C
0…100 K
Slow / Medium / Fast
Maximum / Average
Off value…100 %
0…On value %
Factory setting
–10 °C
70 °C
20 °C
70 °C
10 K
Medium
Maximum
10 %
5 %
(Curvepoint 1):
Flow temp.
1
Max. flow temp. readjustment
(Curvepoint 2):
Flow temp.
2
(Curvepoint 1):
Outside temp.
(Curvepoint 2):
Outside temp.
Outside temperature
Adaptation of the flow temperature can be set as follows:
• The rate of change of flow temperature readjustment can be set under > Demand
control > Control action
• The kind of evaluation of the consumers’ valve positions can be selected under
> Demand control > Request evaluation
− When using the Maximum setting, the flow temperature will be readjusted in a way that the valve position of the consumer with the greatest heat demand is 90
−
%
When using the Average setting, the flow temperature will be readjusted in a way that the valve positions of the 4 largest consumers will be 90 % on average
This setting does not ensure that the heat demand of all consumers can be satisfied. It makes certain, however, that an individual consumer cannot force the flow temperature to high levels (e.g. because a window was left open).
The heating curve settings of the heat demand transformers also apply to the heat demand contact of the heating curve (operating line Heating curve request 2-pos).
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
7 Heat demand and heat requests
95/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setting the limit value request
The “On range“ and the “Off range“ depend on the settings made:
OFF
ON
Limit value request off
Limit value request on
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
100
OFF…100 Setting range for limit value request On (example with OFF = 30 %)
0… ON Setting range for limit value request Off (example with ON = 45 %)
[%]
96/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
7 Heat demand and heat requests
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
8 Main controller and primary controller
8.1 Overview of function block
a a d d d a d d d a a d d d a d d d
B
V
B
V
Controller diagrams
Basic configuration
Extra configuration
2)
Heat requis.
Main controller
Main pump
Heat demand
1)
B
2)
Heat requis.
Primary controller
System pump
1)
B
3P
Y Q Q Y Q
3P
Y
Q Q
In terms of control principle, both function blocks are primary controllers. For this reason, the term “primary controller“ is used for both function blocks in the following descriptions, unless specific reference to function block “primary controller” is made.
VlvMn/PrCtr
T
TFl
Mn/SyPu
Mn/SyPu B
T
TFl
Mn/SyPu
Mn/SyPu B
T
T
TRt
Mn/SyPuEr
Mn/SyPuEr B
Mn/SyPuErFlow
VlvMn/PrCtr
TRt
Mn/SyPuEr
Mn/SyPuEr B
Mn/SyPuErFlow
Primary controller (use of mixing valve) Main controller (use of heat exchanger)
Mn/SyPu
Main / system pump
Mn/SyPu B
Main / system pump B
Mn/SyPuEr
Fault input main pump / system pump
Mn/SyPuEr B
Fault input main pump / system pump B
Mn/SyPuErFlow Flow supervision main pump / system pump
TFl
TRt
VlvMn/PrCtr
Flow temperature sensor
Return temperature sensor
Mixing valve / 2-port valve
8.2 Configuration
With plant types H1-x, the main controller comes activated per default. In that case, it is always the valve, the flow and return temperature sensor that are preconfigured.
With plant types H2-x, the primary controller comes activated per default. In that case, it is always the mixing valve, a pump and the flow temperature sensor that are preconfigured.
For more detailed information, refer to section 3.2 “Basic configuration”.
With all the other plant types, the function blocks can be activated via “Extra configuration”. A function block is activated by assigning an output to a terminal.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
97/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Outputs
Inputs
Note on the requests
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Main controller > Outputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Primary controller > Outputs
Operating line
Mixing valve 3-pos
Mixing valve modulating
Main pump
Main pump B
System pump
System pump B
Heat demand modulating
Heat demand relay
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Only with main controller
Only with main controller
Only with primary controller
Only with primary controller
Only with main controller
Only with main controller
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Main controller > Inputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Primary controller > Inputs
Operating line
Flow sensor
Return sensor
[Main pump] overload
[Main pump B] overload
[System pump] overload
[System pump B] overload
Flow signal pump
Heat request modulating
Heating curve request 2-pos
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Only with main controller
Only with main controller
Only with primary controller
Only with primary controller
DHW request 2-pos
Frost prot request 2-pos
Heat requests from other devices can be accepted via bus. In addition, one analog and
3 digital inputs per function block are available for signaling heat requests.
8.3 Controller
If only a pump or twin pump is configured, the primary controller consists of system pump control. A control loop is only obtained when configuring a mixing valve (or other valve) so that the flow can be controlled.
If a main controller with mixing valve is used with a boiler, it must be determined whether or not flow through the boiler is to be ensured.
Y1
M1
B1
B1
M1
M1
B1*
B7
B7*
B7
Y1
Primary controller type 1:
With mixing valve or 2-port valve
B1 Flow temperature sensor (* = optional, for display only)
B7 Return temperature sensor (* = optional, for display only)
M1 Main pump / system pump (can be a twin pump)
Y1 Mixing valve or 2-port valve
Primary controller type 2:
With pump
Primary controller type 1 with mixing valve or heat exchanger with 2-port valve offers maximum limitation of the return temperature while primary controller type 2 only provides control of a system pump depending on demand.
98/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Fault setting primary controller
Fault setting main controller
Plant operation
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
The flow or return temperature sensor of primary controller type 2 can be used for display purposes.
By configuring the outputs, it is determined whether primary controller type 1 or 2 is used.
Without configuration of a mixing valve, primary controller type 2 is automatically used.
But a flow temperature increase can also be defined with primary controller type 2 to compensate for temperature losses in the case of long pipes. For more detailed informa-
tion about flow temperature increase, refer to section 8.7 “Setpoint increase”.
8.3.1 Mixing valve control
For control of the mixing valve, a 3-position or DC 0…10 V actuator can be used. The selection is made by configuring the relevant output.
8.3.2 Pump control
Pump control offers a number of monitoring choices independent of whether the pump is a single pump or twin pump.
For more detailed information about pump control and twin pumps, refer to section 5.8
“Pump control and twin pumps”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Fault settings > Overload pump
Operating line
Fault acknowledgement
Fault acknowledgement B
Range
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Factory setting
Acknowledge and reset
Acknowledge and reset
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Fault settings > Overload pump
Operating line
Fault acknowledgement
Fault acknowledgement B
Range
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Factory setting
Acknowledge and reset
Acknowledge and reset
8.4 Plant
Plant operation indicates whether the primary controller is switched on and whether the pump is running.
Main menu > Main controller > Plant operation
Main menu > Primary controller > Plant operation
Operating line
Preselection
Setp preselection manual**
State
Cause
Range
Auto / Off*
---- / 8…140 °C
Off / On
Commissioning /
Request /
Frost protection for consumer /
Frost protection for the flow /
Factory setting
Auto
----
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
99/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Operating line Range
Frost protection for the plant /
Overtemp protection/overrun /
Plant operation selector /
No request
Factory setting
* Frost protection functions ensured
** Only with main controller
Preselection (plant operation selector)
Setpoint preselection manual
⇒
The primary controller can be switched off for service purposes. The valve will close and the pump will be deactivated, or valve and pump start their overrun.
When in the “Off” position, the heat demand signal will not be passed on!
When “Off“ is preselected, the internal frost protection function will remain active and frost protection-related heat requests (frost protection for the flow) from externally will be accepted and handled.
When service work is completed, the selector must be set back to “Auto”.
Using this setting, a minimum request for the main controller can be preselected, which means that maximum selection with the requests from the consumers will be maintained.
State
Cause
The primary controller’s state is indicated (On / Off).
It is indicated why the current state is active.
8.5 Heat demand and heat request
Heat request heating circuits
KNX
Heat request DHW
Heat request primary controller
MAX
Heat request DC 0...10 V
Heat request heating curve
Heat request contact DHW
Heat request contact frost protection
Heat request air handling
Heat demand transformers
KNX
Heat request individual room, air heating coil
Heat request individual room, radiator
Function blocks “Main controller” and “Primary controller” collect the heat demand from all consumers. These are:
• Heating circuits
• DHW heating
• Other primary controllers
• Heat demand signals from individual room controllers for radiators
• Heat demand signals from individual room controllers for air heating coils
• Heat demand signals from primary air handling plant
100/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Extra configuration
Example:
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
A heat demand transformer converts the last 3 types of signal into a flow temperature setpoint.
In addition, an analog input and up to 3 digital inputs as heat request inputs can be configured on the main controller and on the primary controller. These are always available at the main controller, even if no main controller plant element has been configured. The inputs then act on the boiler and on the heat demand outputs.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Main controller > Inputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Primary controller > Inputs
Operating line
Heat request modulating
Heating curve request 2-pos
Range
DHW request 2-pos
Frost prot request 2-pos
From all request signals received, the “Max” block generates the maximum value. This maximum value represents the flow temperature setpoint for the primary controller. The setpoint will be raised by the amount of the setpoint increase and forwarded to a heat source or another primary controller as “Heat demand from precontrol”.
8.5.1 Heat request modulating
Using a DC 0…10 V signal, a heat request for the main controller or primary controller can be preselected.
The analog input can be matched to the DC 0…10 V signal source:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Heat request
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Heat request
Operating line
[Modulating] setpoint at 0 V
[Modulating] setpoint at 10 V
[Modulating] limit value
°C
120
100
2
80
Range
–150…50 °C
50…500 °C
0…140 °C
Factory setting
0° C
100 °C
10 °C
60
40
3
20
0
-20
0 2 4 6 8 10
DC 0...10 V c
Value in °C at DC 0 V d
Value in °C at DC 10 V e
Limit value for heat demand (temperatures < limit value = no heat demand)
The DC 0…10 V input signal shall correspond to a flow temperature setpoint range of
20…120 °C. Below DC 0.5 V, the controller shall shut down.
The following parameters are to be set:
Setpoint at DC 0 V: 20 °C
Setpoint at DC 10 V: 120 °C
Limit value: 25 °C
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
101/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Digital inputs
102/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
8.5.2 Heat request 2-position
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Heat request
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Heat request
Operating line
[2-pos] setpoint DHW
[2-pos] priority DHW
Range
5…140 °C
None [DHW request] /
Shifting [DHW request] /
Absolute [DHW request] /
None [max selection] /
Shifting [max selection]
[2-pos] setpoint frost prot 5…140 °C
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Demand control
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Demand control
Factory setting
70 °C
Shifting [DHW request]
70 °C
Operating line
[Curvepoint 1] outside temp
[Curvepoint 1] flow temp
[Curvepoint 2] outside temp
[Curvepoint 2] flow temp
Range
–50…50 °C
0…140 °C
–50…50 °C
0…140 °C
Factory setting
–10 °C
70 °C
20 °C
70 °C
3 types of digital inputs are available. They are distinguished by different handling of the heat demand signals and by offering different setting choices.
• A signal received at input “Heating curve request 2-pos“ is handled like a heat demand signal from a heating circuit. The setpoint is dependent on the outside temperature and is determined with the same heating curve as that used for demand
control. For more detailed information about demand control, refer to section 7.3
• A signal received at input “DHW request 2-pos“ is handled like a heat demand signal from DHW heating. A constant setpoint can be preselected. In addition, priority of the resulting DHW request can be set.
For more detailed information about DHW priority, refer to section 10.10 ”DHW priority”
• A signal received at input “Frost prot request 2-pos“ is handled like a heat request due to risk of frost. A constant setpoint can be preselected
Depending on the plant’s operating state, a heating curve request in the summer can be ignored, for example, while consideration is given to a request for frost protection.
Whether the input shall be active when the contact is open or closed can be parameterized for each individual input.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs > RMH760.X… (or RMZ78…)
Operating line Range Factory setting
Normal position Open / Closed Open
Normal position ”Open“ means that the input is active when the contact is closed.
8.5.3 Heat demand outputs
In addition, a digital output (relay) and / or analog output (DC 0…10 V) can be configured on the main controller as a heat demand output.
For further information refer to sections 7.2 “Heat demand outputs” and 8.2
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Load control
Note
Load reduction
Load increase
Settings
Main controller
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
8.5.4 Heat demand transformers
The heat demand transformers described in chapter 7 “Heat demand and heat requests”.
8.6 Mixing valve control
8.6.1 General
The heat output for mixing valve control can be reduced by functions of higher priority
(e.g. limitation of the return temperature) or by functions of other plants (boiler, DHW heating) via load control.
The following mixing valve settings are valid for both 3-position and DC 0…10 V actuators.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Mixing circuit controller
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Mixing circuit controller
Operating line
Actuator run time
P-band Xp
Range
1…600 s
1…100 K
Factory setting
150 s
50 K
Integral action time Tn 0…600 s 60 s
Locking signal gain 0…200 % 100%
• For more detailed information about mixing valve control and its settings, refer to
section 5.7 “Mixing valve control”
• Locking signal gain is used to preselect to what degree the primary controller shall respond to signals received from load control
8.6.2 Load
Load control signals from a heat source can have an impact on the primary controller:
A load reduction can be triggered by one of the following functions:
• Protective boiler startup
• Minimum limitation of the boiler return temperature
The primary controller does not respond to locking signals triggered by DHW heating.
From the consumer’s point of view, a load increase can be effected in the form of pump and / or mixing valve overrun. In that case, the load is only maintained.
8.7 Setpoint
Typically, a mixing valve requires a setpoint increase, enabling it to compensate for boiler temperature variations. With system pumps, this setpoint increase is not a basic requirement for compensating boiler temperature variations. However, in the case of long pipes between boiler and consumers, heat losses on the way to the consumers can occur so that a setpoint increase can be desirable in these situations also.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > …
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Main controller
Operating line
Setpoint increase
Range
0…50 K
Factory setting
0 K
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
103/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Primary controller
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > …
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Primary controller
Operating line
Setpoint increase
Range
0…50 K
Factory setting
10 K
8.8 Limit and protective functions
Frost protection for the plant
Frost protection for the flow
8.8.1 Frost
Here, the setting is made whether or not “Frost protection for the plant” shall act on the pump for precontrol.
For more detailed information about frost protection for the plant, refer to section 5.4
“Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun”.
“Frost protection for the plant“ is only available if an outside sensor is present (local sensor or via Konnex bus).
The function can be deactivated.
The flow temperature is monitored to ensure it will not drop below a minimum level.
Should it fall below 5 °C, a heat demand signal is sent to the heat source and the mixing valve will open.
The function will be ended as soon as the flow temperature has risen to 7 °C. It is active for a minimum of 5 minutes.
Maximum limitation of the flow temperature
Minimum limitation of the flow temperature
Limitation of the rate of flow temperature increase
8.8.2 Limitations
This setting is used to ensure maximum limitation of the flow temperature setpoint.
This setting is used to ensure minimum limitation of the flow temperature setpoint.
Minimum limitation is only active when there is a demand for heat.
The function can be deactivated by using setting “----“.
This function is only available with primary controller type 1. The rate of increase of the flow temperature setpoint can be limited to a maximum (heating up brake). In that case, the maximum possible increase of the flow temperature setpoint is the selected rate of temperature increase per unit of time (K/h).
Limitation of the rate of flow temperature increase effects the following:
• Prevention of cracking noises in the pipework
• Prevention of excessive loads on heat generating equipment
The function can be deactivated by using setting “----“.
TFlSetpt
TFlSetpt t t
∆ t
Time
Unit of time
∆
TFlSetpt Rate of setpoint increase per unit of time t
Maximum increase =
∆
TFlSetpt
∆ t
104/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Limitations of the return temperature
Response of main pump
/ system pump in the event of locking signals
Settings
Refer to subsection 8.8.3 “Limitation of the return temperature”.
The respective setting determines whether or not the main pump or the system pump shall respond to locking signals:
Setting
Main pump locking signal = Off
Main pump locking signal = On
System pump locking signal = Off
System pump locking signal = On
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Limitations
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Limitations
Effect when a locking signal occurs
Pump will be deactivated
Pump will continue to operate
Pump will be deactivated
Pump will continue to operate
Operating line
Flow temperature max
Flow temperature min
Flow temperature rise max
System pump locking signal
Frost protection for the plant
Range
0…140 °C
---- / 0…140 °C
---- / 1…600 K/h
Off / On
Off / On
Factory setting
140 °C
---- °C
---- K/h
Off
On
Return sensor
Note
Settings
8.8.3 Limitation return temperature
Both the main controller and the primary controller offer maximum limitation of the return temperature depending on the active consumers. The following types of limitation are available:
• Maximum limitation in space heating mode
• Maximum limitation in DHW heating mode
Both have the following in common:
• A return temperature sensor must be configured
• Limitation of the return temperature is only possible with primary controller type 1
Maximum limitation of the return temperature with primary controller type 1:
Y1
M1
B1 B1
M1
B7
B7
Y1
Main controller Primary controller
Minimum limitation of the return temperature is not supported.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Limitations
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Limitations
Operating line
[Curvepoint 1] outside temp
[Curvepoint 1] return temp
[Curvepoint 2] outside temp
[Curvepoint 2] return temp
DHW return temp max
Legionella return temp max
Range
–50…50 °C
---- / 0…140 °C
–50…50 °C
---- / 0…140 °C
---- / 0…140 °C
---- / 0…140 °C
Factory setting
–20 °C
---- °C
10 °C
---- °C
---- °C
---- °C
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
105/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Maximum limitation of the return temperature
Maximum limitation in space heating mode
If the return temperature exceeds the limit value, the primary controller’s flow temperature setpoint will be lowered. If the return temperature drops below the limit value, reduction of the flow temperature setpoint will be negated again. Limitation is provided in the form of an I-controller whose integral action time can be adjusted.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Mixing circuit controller
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Mixing circuit controller
Operating line
[Tn] return temp limitation max
Area
0…60 min
Factory setting
30 min
Maximum limitation will be effective when only heating and ventilation are active at the respective primary controller. It will be deactivated as soon as DHW heating is started.
With this limitation, the return temperature limit value changes depending on the outside temperature. Maximum limitation will be activated when a valid value is set for at least one maximum return temperature setpoint.
TRtLim
[Curvepoint 1]
Return temperature
[Curvepoint 2]
Return temperature
Special cases:
Maximum limitation in
DHW heating mode
[Curvepoint 1]
Outside temperature
[Curvepoint 2]
Outside temperature
TOeff
TRtLim
TOeff
Limit value of return temperature limitation
Composite (effectively acting) outside temperature
Curvepoint 1 Maximum return temperature limit value, active at low outside temperatures
Curvepoint 2 Minimum return temperature limit value, active at high outside temperatures
Setting Effect
Return temperature curvepoint 1 = return temperature curvepoint 2
Outside temperature curvepoint 1 = outside temperature curvepoint 2
Return temperature curvepoint 1 = ----
Constant limitation of the return temperature. Outside temperature is irrelevant
Limit value of return temperature changes abruptly at the curvepoints
Constant return temperature limitation with curvepoint 2 as the maximum return temperature setpoint. Outside temperature is irrelevant
Return temperature curvepoint 2 = ----
Return temperature curvepoint 1 and return temperature curvepoint 2 = ----
Constant return temperature limitation with curvepoint 1 as the maximum return temperature setpoint. Outside temperature is irrelevant
In space heating mode, limitation of the return temperature is deactivated
This limitation is effective when DHW heating is active at the primary controller. In that case, maximum limitation in space heating mode will be deactivated.
Maximum limitation in DHW heating mode is constant, that is, independent of the outside temperature.
The limitation can be overridden by maximum limitation in DHW heating mode with the legionella function activated. For more detailed information, refer to the next section.
106/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Maximum limitation in
DHW heating mode with legionella function activated
This limitation too will be activated only when a valid value has been set. If the value is invalid (entry of “----“), there will be no limitation.
This limitation is effective when the legionella function of a DHW circuit is active at the primary controller. In that case, the 2 maximum limitations in space heating and DHW heating mode will be deactivated.
Maximum limitation in DHW heating mode with the legionella function activated is constant, that is, independent of the outside temperature. This limitation too will be activated only when a valid value has been set. If the value is invalid (entry of “----“), there will be no limitation.
Meter inputs
Settings
Meter input
Type of limitation
Limit value
Integral action time Tn
8.8.4 Pulse limitation
Pulses for load or volume limitation can be fed to both the main controller and the primary controller. Prerequisite for pulse limitation is a main or primary controller plant type with mixing valve or other seat valve.
The pulses are delivered via the meter inputs of function block “Meter”. For more
set up.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller > Limitations > Pulse limitation
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller > Limitations > Pulse limitation
Operating line
Meter input
Type of limitation
Limit value
Integral action time Tn
Range
---- / 1…4
Absolute / Scaled
5…4000 pulses/min
0…255 min
Factory setting
----
Absolute
75 pulses/min
60 min
The meter input is an input of function block “Meter“ which is used for limiting the number of pulses. All inputs selected must be configured to a terminal.
There are 2 types of limitation to choose from:
• Absolute: The limitation takes effect when the limit value is crossed
• Scaled: The limit value is fixed at 75 pulses/min. The limit value can be changed, but with no effect.
If less than 5 pulses/min are received, fault status message No pulse signal meter 1 (or
…2, …3 or …4) will be delivered after 20 seconds. Heat meters with a scaled output send 120 pulses/min if there is no supply of heat or no volumetric flow. Together with pulse limitation, this prevents hydraulic creep.
From the limit value, pulse limitation starts throttling the actuating device (mixing valve).
The setting is only active with absolute limitation. With scaled limitation, the limit value can be set, but the function is performed with 75 pulses/min (fixed value).
The setting value determines the rate at which the flow temperature will be lowered:
• Short integral action times lead to quick reductions
• Long integral action times lead to slow reductions
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
107/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Main controller
Primary controller
Faulty flow sensor
Faulty return sensor
108/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
8.8.5 Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun
To protect the boiler against overtemperatures after the burner has shut down (when there are no more active heat consumers), an overrun time for the consumers can be set on the boiler controller.
After the burner has shut down, the overrun time ensures that the heating circuits and
DHW heating will draw heat for that period of time, provided they were consuming heat up to one minute before the burner was shut down. In any case, pumps and mixing valves have an overrun time of 60 seconds.
With primary controller type 1, the mixing valve maintains the former setpoint during the overrun time and the pump continues to run; with primary controller type 2, the pump only operates during the overrun time.
8.8.6 Pump kick and valve kick
The pump and valve kick is a protective function which can be periodically performed. It prevents pumps and / or mixing valves from seizing after longer off periods.
For more detailed information, refer to section 5.5 “Pump kick and valve kick”.
8.9 Text designation
If required, specific text can be assigned to the main controller or the primary controller.
This text will then appear on the menu and on the info display.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Main controller
Operating line
Main controller
Range
Max. 20 characters
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller
Operating line
Primary controller
Range
Max. 20 characters
Factory setting
Main controller
Factory setting
Primary controller
8.10 Fault
When commissioning is completed (Commissioning menu quit), the system checks whether the required sensors have been connected. In the event of an open-circuit or short-circuit, a fault status message will be delivered.
Number Text Effect
54
Main contr flow sens error Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
57
Prim controller error flow sensor
In the case of an error of the flow temperature sensor, the mixing valve will be driven to the fully closed position to become inactive (3-position actuator), enabling it to be manually operated.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Number Text
58
Prim controller error ret sensor
Effect
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Error in connection with heat requests
Faulty main pump
Faulty system pump
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Number Text Effect
59
Main contr return sens error
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Main controller and primary controller behave as if no return temperature sensor was present. Limitation of the return temperature is inactive.
Number Text Effect
2202
2203
Main contr h’request mod error
P’contr h’req error
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
An error at the input is interpreted as “No heat demand“.
Number Text
2491
2492
2493
2495
2494
[Main pump] overload
Effect
factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“
[Main pump B] overload Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be parameterized; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“
[Main pump] no flow
[Main pump B] no flow
[Main pump B] fault
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be parameterized;
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset
Urgent message; must not be acknowledged. Plant stop
Number Text
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
[System pump] overload
[System pump B] overload
[System pump] no flow
Effect
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be parameterized; factory setting: „Acknowledge and reset”
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be parameterized; factory setting: „Acknowledge and reset”
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset
[System pump] no flow B Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset
[System pump] fault Urgent message; must not be acknowledged. Plant stop
8.11 Diagnostic
Main menu > Main controller > Inputs/setpoints
Main menu > Primary controller > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Actual value flow temp
Flow temperature setpoint
Actual value return temp
Return temperature max
Heat request modulating
Heating curve request 2-pos
DHW request 2-pos
Frost prot request 2-pos
Range
…°C
…°C
…°C
…°C
---- ( = not connected) / …°C
0 / 1 (1 = closed)
0 / 1 (1 = closed)
0 / 1 (1 = closed)
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
109/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Operating line
[Main pump] overload*
[Main pump B] overload*
[System pump] overload**
[System pump B] overload**
Flow signal pump
* Only with main controller
** Only with primary controller
Range
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
Main menu > Main controller > Outputs
Main menu > Primary controller > Outputs
Operating line
Heat demand modulating*
Heat demand relay*
Main pump*
Main pump B*
System pump**
System pump B**
Mixing valve position
* Only with main controller
** Only with primary controller
Range
…°C
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
0…100 %
Main menu > Main controller > Limitations
Main menu > Primary controller > Limitations
Operating line
Flow temperature max
Flow temperature min
Flow temperature rise
Return temperature max
Pulse limitation
Range
Inactive / Active
Inactive / Active
Inactive / Active
Inactive / Active
Inactive / Active
110/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
8 Main controller and primary controller
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
9 Heating circuit control
9.1 Overview of function block
a a a a a a d d d d d d d
B
V
Heating circuit diagram
2)
Heating circuit 3
HC- pump
1)
B
Q
R1 R2
Q Q Q
3P
Y
Timer function
Special day input
Holiday input
Q Q
T
TO
HCtrVlvMx
TFlHCtr
HCtrPu
T
TR
T
Basic configuration
T
HctrPu
TRtHCtr
Heating circuit pump
HctrPu_B Heating circuit pump B
HCtrVlvMx Heating circuit mixing valve
TFlHCtr Flow temperature sensor
TO
Outside sensor
TR
TRtHCtr
Room temperature sensor
Return temperature sensor
HCtrPu_B
9.2 Configuration
With the following plant types, the heating circuits are activated per default:
• Heating circuit 1 with plant types Hx-2, Hx-3, Hx-4, Hx-5, Hx-6, and Hx-7
• Heating circuit 2 with plant types Hx-4, Hx-5, Hx-6, and Hx-7
• Heating circuit 3 with plant types Hx-6, and Hx-7
Each heating circuit always has a mixing valve, pump and flow temperature sensor preconfigured. Plant types H5-x and H6-x also have the return temperature sensor preconfigured.
Heating circuit 1 is preconfigured based on the basic module or the RMZ782B heating circuit module. Heating circuits 2 and 3 are always preconfigured on the RMZ782B heating circuit module.
For more detailed information, refer to section 3.2 “Basic configuration”.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
111/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
The heating circuit can be configured to any type of module. If the RMZ782B is replaced by some other module, all settings using type reference RMZ782B… via “Extra configuration“ must be reconfigured.
Extra configuration
Outside sensor
Solar intensity and wind speed sensor
Function blocks can always be activated via “Extra configuration“, independent of the type of plant. A function block is activated by assigning an output to a terminal. Here, the heating circuit can be configured to any terminals that are free. If all outputs of the heating circuit are set invalid, the heating circuit will be deactivated.
For weather-compensated heating circuit control, the outside temperature is required. It can be configured as follows:
• For heating circuit 1, on the following menu:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous > Inputs > Outside sensor
• For the 2 other heating circuits, on the following menu:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 2 (or 3) > Inputs > Outside
sensor
The outside temperature can also be transmitted via the Konnex bus.
In addition, a solar intensity sensor and wind speed sensor for common usage by all heating circuits can be configured on the following menu:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous > Inputs The impact on the individual heating circuits can be parameterized.
For more detailed information, refer to section 14.6 “Weather data”.
Inputs
Outputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs
Operating line
Outside sensor*
Flow sensor
Room sensor
Return sensor
Room setpoint adjuster abs
Room setpoint adjuster rel
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Return temperature limitation
External room temperature setpoint adjuster with absolute room temperature setpoints
External room temperature setpoint adjuster with room temperature setpoint readjustment of ±3 K
Fault input heating circuit pump
Pump B in the case of twin pumps
[Heating circuit pump] overload
[Heat circuit pump B] overload
Flow signal pump
Room operating mode
Flow supervision heating circuit pump(s)
External preselection
Timer function
Special day input
Comfort extension
Holiday input
* Outside sensor:
Only heating circuits 2 and 3 have their own outside temperature. Heating circuit 1 shares the outside temperature with other function blocks in the controller. The outside sensor is to be configured under … > Miscel-
laneous > Inputs.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Outputs
Operating line
Outside temperature relay*
Mixing valve 3-pos
Mixing valve modulating
Heating circuit pump
Heating circuit pump B
Adjustable values / display / remarks
112/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Extra configuration
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
Heating limit relay
Operating mode relay 1
Operating mode relay 2
* Outside temperature relay:
Only heating circuits 2 and 3 have their own outside temperature. Heating circuit 1 shares the outside temperature with other function blocks in the controller. The outside temperature relay for the outside temperature of heating circuit 1 is to be configured under Miscellaneous > Outputs.
9.2.1 3-position modulating mixing valve
Control of the mixing valve can be accomplished either with a 3-position or DC 0…10 V actuator. The type of actuator is to be selected via “Extra configuration“.
The output is to be activated via “Extra configuration“:
Main menu >
Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Outputs >
Mixing valve 3-pos Assign terminal
Main menu >
Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Outputs >
Mixing valve 3-pos Assign terminal
Fault settings in the heating circuit
9.2.2 Pump control
The heating circuit pump offers the same choices as all the other pumps. An individual pump can also be monitored; optionally, a twin pump can be used as a heating circuit pump. For that, the relevant output must be configured.
For more detailed information, refer to section 5.8 “Pump control and twin pumps”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Fault settings > Overload pump
Operating line
Fault acknowledgement
Fault acknowledgement B
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Acknowledge and reset
Acknowledge and reset
9.3 Operating modes in the heating circuit
9.3.1 Room operating modes
The room operating mode determines the state of a heated room. A differentiation is to be made between preselected room operating mode and the state of the room operating mode. Room operating mode is only available as a preselection.
The user can preselect the following operating modes for space heating:
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
113/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Room operating mode
Preselection
Auto
Comfort
Precomfort
Use
Factory setting. The room operating mode changes automatically according to the time program
The room is constantly maintained at the Comfort setpoint. This operating mode is selected when the room is constantly occupied
The room is constantly maintained at the Precomfort setpoint.
This operating mode is selected when occupancy of the room can be expected
Economy
Protection
If the room is not used for a number of hours, or if a reduced room temperature is desired, the recommended operating mode is Economy.
Normally, this is the operating mode selected for the night
In Protection mode, the room will be heated only when there is risk of frost, causing water pipes to freeze, etc. The room temperature will be maintained at a level above 0 °C
Depending on the state of the room operating mode, some other room temperature setpoint will apply. The flow temperature setpoint, the heating limit and the optimization functions will be influenced, depending on the current room temperature setpoint.
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Room operating mode
Operating line
Preselection
Factory setting
Auto
State
Range
Auto /
Comfort /
Precomfort /
Economy /
Protection
Comfort /
Precomfort /
Economy /
Protection
Holidays or
11
/
Special day
or
11
/
Timer function or /
Konnex presence button /
Room optg mode selector /
Room optg mode contact /
External master
For a description of the control priorities …
12
, refer to subsection 9.3.7 “Control priorities in the heating circuit”.
Preselection
Room operation selector
⇒
Here, the plant user can select the required operating mode. In mode, the setpoint is determined either by the time program or the plant user. If desired, one of the continuous modes (Comfort, Precomfort, Economy or Protection) with a fixed setpoint can be selected.
In Protection mode, the heating system shuts down, but safety-related functions, such as frost protection, will stay active.
State The display shows the heating circuit’s setpoint that is currently maintained.
Cause Different reasons can have led to the current state. Decisive is the control priority (refer
to subsection 9.3.7 “Control priorities in the heating circuit”).
114/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Time switch
Operating mode during holidays
Note
Overriding the
24-hour program
Room unit QAW740
3rd-party devices with Konnex interface
Presence button
Timer function
Conventional switches and buttons
Extra configuration
Settings
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
In preselected room operating mode , the time switch changes the room operating mode or the room temperature setpoint in accordance with the program entered.
During holidays, a fixed preselected setpoint is used:
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Room operating mode
Operating line Range
Room operating mode holidays Economy / Protection
The holiday function is only active in room operating mode .
Factory setting
Economy
9.3.2 User request in the room
The plant user has several choices to override the current 24-hour program and to switch to some other setpoint. Following can be used to override operation from the room:
• Switch or button (directly connected)
• Konnex operator units (e.g. QAW740)
• Bus operator unit RMZ792
On the QAW740 room unit, the plant user can select the room operating mode via the mode button (preselection of operating mode) or the timer button.
User interventions can also take place via a 3rd-party device with Konnex interface (S-
Mode). Precondition is that preselection of the room operating mode is set to .
In room operating mode , the presence button can be used to change the room operating mode for the period of time until the next switching point of the time switch is reached. Changeover takes place between Comfort or Precomfort and Economy.
The timer function is identical with the timer function triggered via a conventional button. For this reason, the setting used for the duration is also the same. The mode of
operation of this function is described in subsection 9.3.4 “Timer function”.
External switches or buttons for overriding the room operating mode can be connected to inputs “Room operating mode” and “Timer function”. The mode of operation of these inputs is described in the 2 following subsections.
They override the other control interventions in accordance with the control priority.
9.3.3 Room operating mode contact
Using a configurable input, a contact signal for changing the room operating mode can be acquired. Changeover takes place between the current operating mode and a selectable fixed operating mode.
The input is to be activated via “Extra configuration“:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs >
Room operating mode Assign terminal
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Space heating
Operating line
Preselected room optg mode
Heat limit with Comfort preset
Range
Comfort / Precomfort /
Economy / Protection
Inactive / Active
Factory setting
Comfort
Inactive
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
115/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Heating limit with preselected Comfort mode
If Comfort mode is preselected via the room operating mode contact, the heating limit can be activated with these settings.
If, in accordance with the time program, Comfort mode is active, the heating limit always applies, independent of this setting.
9.3.4 Timer function
Using a configurable input, the pulse triggered by a button can be acquired to extend
Comfort mode in operating mode
The timer function starts immediately.
. The timer’s time can be adjusted.
A
60 min 60 min
B
ON
OFF
60 min
Extra configuration
Settings
Note on QAW740
Tip
Purpose
C
A Room operating mode according to the time switch
B
Timer function
C
Resulting room operating mode
The input is to be activated via “Extra configuration“:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs >
Timer function Assign terminal
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Space heating
Operating line
Timer function
Range
0…720 min
Factory setting
60 min
This setting does not apply to the QAW740 room unit; in that case, the setting is to be made directly on the room unit.
The activated timer can be stopped by changing the room operating mode (e.g. via the room operation selector).
9.3.5 Room operating mode outputs
Function block outputs “Operating mode R1“ and “Operating mode R2“ enable the resulting room operating mode of a heating circuit to be output via one or 2 relays. This is always possible, even if heating circuit control is not used.
116/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Application example Forwarding the resulting room operating mode from the Qx relay outputs of the
RMH760B to a Synco™200 controller:
G
Configuration of both operating mode relays
Settings
Note on factory setting
Meaning of adjustable values
Display values
G
G0
Qx3
Qx4
Qx3
Qx4
G
G0
M D1 M D2
N1 N2
G0
N1 RMH760B
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Outputs
Operating line
Operating mode relay 1
Operating mode relay 2
Adjustable values / display / remarks
--- / N.Q1…, etc. (only free relays) / assignment of operating mode relays
--- / N.Q1…, etc. (only free relays) / assignment of operating mode relays
On the “Settings” menu, the operating mode relay to be energized can be defined for each room operating mode.
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Space heating
Operating line
Comfort relay control
Precomfort relay control
Economy relay control
Protection relay control
Range
--- / R1 / R2 / R1+R2
--- / R1 / R2 / R1+R2
--- / R1 / R2 / R1+R2
--- / R1 / R2 / R1+R2
Factory setting
---
---
R2
R1+R2
The factory setting has been chosen such that the digital outputs can be connected directly to the digital inputs of the Synco™200 controller.
Since the Synco™200 controllers do not use the Precomfort mode, an automatic change from Precomfort to Comfort mode will be made. This setting can be changed to suit individual needs.
The adjustable values previously listed under "Settings" have the following meaning:
Value set
---
R1
R2
State of relay R1
Normal position
Operating position
Normal position
State of relay R2
Normal position
Normal position
Operating position
The Outputs menu shows the state of the operating mode relays:
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Outputs
Operating line
Operating mode relay 1
Operating mode relay 2
Current state
Off or On
Off or On
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
117/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant operation
Preselection
State
Cause
9.3.6 Plant operation
Plant operation indicates whether the heating circuit is switched on and whether the pump operates.
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Plant operation
Operating line
Preselection
State
Range
Auto / Off*
On / Off
Factory setting
Auto
* Frost protection functions are ensured
Frost protection for the room /
Heating limit switch /
Cooling active /
Room temp limitation max /
Optimum stop control /
Quick setback /
Quick setback + optimum stop /
Optimum start control /
Boost heating /
Boost heating + opt start /
User request room /
User request external /
Overtemperature protection / overrun /
Plant operation selector /
No request/
Frost protection for the flow /
Frost protection for the plant
The heating circuit can be switched off for service purposes. The mixing valve will close and the heating circuit pump will be deactivated on completion of pump overrun. When preselecting “Off”, the internal frost protection function remains active.
. After completion servicing, the selector must be set back to
The boiler’s state is indicated (On / Off).
It is indicated why the current state is active.
⇒
9.3.7 Control
The following illustration shows the priorities of the different interventions via digital inputs and via the Konnex bus as well as operation on the controller or the QAW740 room unit.
Lower numbers indicate higher priorities.
118/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Interventions via digital inputs
Holiday contact
Special day contact
10
9
On, Off
On, Off
Calendar
Switching program
Timer button
(pushbutton at digital Input)
Room operating contact
8
On, Off
4
On, Off
User requisition
Resulting operating mode
Time program Cmf, Pcf, Eco, Prt
Operating on the controller, or room unit, or via bus
Cmf, Pcf, Eco, Prt
12
Special day, holidays
11
Settings 24-hour program, holiday/special day program
Settings calendar
On, Off
7
6
Auto, Cmf,
Pcf, Eco, Prt
5
Timer button
Presence button
Room operating mode selector on RMH760B controller
Timer button or mode button on QAW740 room unit
Resulting operating mode
Cmf, Pcf, Eco, Prt
Cmf, Pcf, Eco, Prt
3
Off, Auto
2
From user requisition room
(RMU7... controller)
Plant operating mode selector
Heating circuit control (part plant)
Pump, mixing valve
On, Off
1
Wiring test
Priority Name
1
2
Resulting control command pump, mixing valve
On, Off
Wiring test
External master
Room optg mode contact
Room operating mode selector
External master
Explanation
In the wiring test (highest priority), the plant components can be directly controlled, independent of all other settings
The controller-internal safety functions will be overridden!
The plant operation selector has the second highest priority and can only be overridden by the controller’s frost protection function
If the heating circuit operates in a room control combination as a slave, the operating mode is preselected by the external master (heating circuit or ventilation).
In that case, interventions of priority f
through can only be made on the master
Using the room operating contact, a fixed operating mode can be preselected. This operating mode overrides room operation selector g
on the controller
The room operation selector can be used to switch from operating mode to a continuous operating mode with the respective setpoint.
In operating mode , the setpoint is determined by the time switch or the presence button and the timer
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
119/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Priority Name
/
Presence button and timer button
11
12
Special day contact
Holiday contact
Calendar
Time switch
Explanation
The current time program can be overridden by presence button or timer button .
The timer button at digital input (or of a 3-party
Konnex device) can also override the room operating mode.
If 2 or more functions are triggered, the function activated last will prevail
The current 24-hour program will be overridden by the special day contact. In the time switch, the special day program will be activated
The current 7-day program will be overridden by the holiday contact. The room operating mode can be selected
If a special day is active, the associated 24-hour program of the time switch will be activated. Holidays, if entered, will be overridden. If holiday mode is active, the selected room operating mode applies
In the time switch, the associated 24-hour program will be activated in accordance with the current weekday. The 24-hour program forwards the current room operating mode, the next setpoint, and the time up to the next switching point
9.4 Room temperature setpoints
Remote setpoint adjuster
9.4.1 Settings
The setpoints for the 4 room operating modes can be preselected by the plant operator via operation. The setting values limit each other.
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Room setpoints
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Room setpoints
Operating line
Comfort
Precomfort
Economy
Protection
Range
19…35 °C
16…21 °C
10…19 °C
Factory setting
21 °C
19 °C
16 °C
1…16 °C 10 °C
The preselected setpoints for Comfort and Precomfort mode can be readjusted by
±3 K on the QAW740 room unit.
It is possible to use a conventional room temperature setpoint adjuster (absolute or relative). For more detailed information about this subject, refer to the following 2 sections.
The 4 setpoints are to be readjusted according to the following rules:
• Simultaneous readjustment of Comfort and Precomfort setpoints
• When the Economy setpoint is reached, it will be shifted together with the Precomfort setpoint
• In Protection mode, the Comfort, Precomfort and Economy setpoints are limited
120/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Display of inputs and setpoints
Settings
Display values
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
The effective setpoint appears on the Main menu and on the info page.
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Current room temp setpoint
Room setpoint absolute*
Room setpoint relative*
* Only if configured via “Extra configuration“
Adjustable values / display / remarks
…°C
…°C
…°C
9.4.2 Raising the Economy setpoint
The room temperature setpoint in Economy mode is increased as a function of the composite outside temperature. The increase is greater at low outside temperatures and reduced to zero at high outside temperatures, whereby starting and end point are adjustable.
The function helps prevent peak loads when changing from Economy to Precomfort or
Comfort mode.
TRSetpt
TRSetptCmf
TRSetptPreC
TRSetptEco+∆ / TRSetptPreC+∆
TRSetptEco+
∆
TRSetptEco
EndPt
SrtPt
TOeff
TRSetpt
–15°C
EndPt
–5°C
SrtPt
End point of increase (–15 °C in the graph)
Starting point of increase (–5 °C in the graph)
Composite (effectively acting) outside temperature
Room temperature setpoint
TOeff
TRSetptEco
Economy setpoint
TRSetptEco+
∆ Increased Economy setpoint
TRSetptPreC
Precomfort setpoint
TRSetptPreC+
∆ Increased Precomfort setpoint
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line
Economy increase starting point
Economy increase end point
Range
–15…50 °C
–50…–5 °C
The Inputs/setpoints menu shows the state of the increase:
Factory setting
–5 °C
–15 °C
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Economy increase
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Inactive / Active
9.4.3 Room temperature setpoint adjuster, absolute
For the preselected room temperature setpoints Comfort and Precomfort, a remote setpoint adjuster (e.g. BSG21.1) can be configured.
The 4 setpoints will be readjusted according to the following diagram.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
121/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
The figure at the top shows the difference between the remote setpoint adjuster and the adjusted Comfort setpoint for heating. This difference impacts the other setpoints very differently. This is shown in the figure at the bottom.
+10 K
Setpt C H Cmf
0 K
0 K
0 K
Impact on the
Comfort setpoint
Note
Impact on the
Precomfort setpoint
122/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
-10 K z.B. / e.g.:
Setpt C Prt 32 °C
Setpt C Eco 28 °C
Setpt C PreC
Setpt C Cmf
Setpt H Cmf
Setpt H PreC
25 °C
23 °C
21 °C
19 °C
Setpt H Eco 16 °C
Setpt H Prt 12 °C
C Cooling
Cmf Comfort
Eco Economy
H Heating
Prt Protection
Setpt Setpoint
The current Comfort setpoint is the setpoint adjusted with the remote setpoint adjuster.
Although the Comfort setpoint is predefined by the remote setpoint adjuster, a fixed
Comfort setpoint for heating need be entered on Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) >
Room setpoints. From the difference between the fixed Comfort setpoint “Heating“ and the adjustment made with the remote setpoint adjuster, the current Comfort setpoint
“Cooling” can be calculated:
Comfort setpoint “Cooling” + (remote setpoint minus Comfort setpoint “Heating”)
The RMH760B has no Comfort setpoint “Cooling”. The impact on the Comfort setpoint
“Cooling“ as described above is only possible in connection with a room control combina-
tion. For more detailed information, refer to subsection 9.10.3 “Room control combination”.
The setpoint shift is limited by the setpoints for Protection mode. Also refer to the graph above.
The Precomfort setpoints are shifted also:
Hence, the current Precomfort setpoint “Heating” is calculated as follows:
Precomfort setpoint “Heating“ + (“Remote setpoint” minus Comfort setpoint “Heating“)
And the current Precomfort setpoint “Cooling” is calculated as follows:
Precomfort setpoint “Cooling“ + (“Remote setpoint” minus Comfort setpoint “Heating“)
The note above in paragraph “Comfort “ also applies analogously to the Precomfort setpoint.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Impact on the
Economy setpoint
Extra configuration
Setting
Notes
Extra configuration
Settings
Outside temperature
Composite outside temperature
The Economy setpoints are shifted only if, otherwise, the Precomfort setpoints would lie outside the Economy setpoints. Also refer to the graph above.
The input is to be activated via “Extra configuration“:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs >
Room setpoint adjuster abs Assign terminal
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs
Operating line
Value low
Range
0 °C…value high
Factory setting
0 °C
Value high Value low…50 °C 50 °C
The range set here must accord with the scale of the remote setpoint adjuster. The factory settings are matched to the BSG21.1 remote setpoint adjuster and must not be changed with this type of setpoint adjuster.
• It is not recommended to use a QAA25 room temperature setpoint adjuster since its characteristic is not linear so that setpoint deviations of maximum 1 K would occur.
Compensation is not possible
• DC 0…10 V setpoint adjusters cannot be connected. The input is ready preconfigured for 0…1,000 Ω
• The adjusted setpoint represents the Comfort setpoint. At the same time, the Precomfort setpoint is displaced parallel so that the difference between the 2 setpoints will be maintained
9.4.4 Room temperature setpoint adjuster, relative
For room temperature setpoint readjustments in the Comfort and Precomfort modes, a remote setpoint adjuster (e.g. QAA27 with room temperature sensor) can be configured.
The input is to be activated via “Extra configuration“:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs >
Room setpoint adjuster rel Assign terminal
There are no settings required.
9.5 Weather-compensated heating circuit control
The flow temperature setpoint of heating circuit control is determined by the heating curve and other influencing factors.
The main reference variable of heating circuit control is the outside temperature. It can be acquired by different devices:
• By the locally connected outside sensor
• Via bus from some other device
The controller delivers 3 different types of outside temperatures whereby heating circuits 2 and 3 have access to their own outside temperature. The other applications
(heating circuit 1, pumps, boiler, demand transformers, etc.) share a common outside temperature.
Depending on the type of building construction, the outside temperature acts on the space with a certain delay. For this reason, the reference variable used by the heating curve is not the actual but the composite outside temperature.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
123/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Attenuated outside temperature
Heating curve
Other influences
To determine the heating limit (summer / winter operation), the attenuated outside temperature is also required (see below).
The heating curve is determined by the 2 curvepoints at the design temperature and the theoretical heating limit. Heat transmission in the space is not linear, however.
When there is a small differential between flow temperature and room temperature, the ability of heat transmission decreases. This is taken into account by the heating curve.
The setpoint predefined by the heating curve can also be influenced by the following factors:
• The room temperature setpoint
• The current room temperature (room temperature influence)
Composite outside temperature
Attenuated outside temperature
⇒
9.5.1 The composite and the attenuated outside temperature
Identifiers used:
TO
Actual outside temperature
TOeff
Composite (effectively acting) outside temperature
TOfil
Outside temperature filtered with the building time constant
TOstrDmp Attenuated outside temperature
τ
Bldg
Building time constant pWindow Proportion of windows in %
The composite outside temperature is made up of the actual outside temperature To and the outside temperature TOfil filtered with the building time constant
τ
Bldg. The proportion of windows p
Window
(adjustable from 0…100 %) determines the proportions with which the 2 temperatures are considered.
The composite outside temperature is used for the heating curve and the heating limit.
To obtain the attenuated outside temperature, the actual outside temperature TO is filtered twice with the building time constant
τ
Bldg.
TO p
Window
100
+
TOeff
+
τ
Bldg
100-p
Window
100 p
Window
= 50%
TOfil
τ
Bldg
TOstrDmp
⇒
For the heating limit, the actual, the composite and the attenuated outside temperature are considered.
The controller is supplied with the proportion of windows set to 50 % so that the composite outside temperature represents the mean value of the actual and the filtered outside temperature.
It is calculated as follows:
TOeff = (0.5 × TO) + (0.5 × TOfil)
124/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Heating curve
Curvepoints
Radiator exponent
TO
25
20
15
10
5
TOstrDmp
TO
TOeff
0
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Space heating
Operating line
Building time constant
Range
0…200 h
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Heating curve
Operating line
Proportion of windows
Range
0…100 %
t
Factory setting
20 h
Factory setting
50 %
9.5.2 Heating curve
The heating curve is defined by 2 curvepoints:
1
: At the design temperature
• By the outside temperature TODef
A
• By the flow temperature SetPTFlDef
B
2
: At the theoretical heating limit
• By the outside temperature TOHi
C
• By the flow temperature SetPTFlHi
D
TFl
1
B
SetPTFlDe sHC
2
D
SetPTFlHi
SetPTRN
TODe TOHi
TOeff
A C
The nonlinear heat transmission is considered by the radiator exponent nH. The following table gives an overview of the different types of heating systems normally used:
Heat transmission via…
Underfloor heating system
Flat radiators
Radiators to DIN 4703
Convectors
Radiator exponent nH
1.05…1.1
1.26…1.33
1.3
1.25…1.45
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
125/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Inflection point
Note
Example
Rule of thumb:
Example above:
Heating curve
Notes
126/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
With a radiator exponent between 1…1.5, the heating curve is only slightly deflected and can therefore be replaced by linearized sections. This is achieved by setting another curvepoint, the so-called inflection point.
The inflection point lies 30 % below the outside temperature at which the flow temperature setpoint is 20 °C and the outside temperature
A
at curvepoint c.
This means that curvepoint d
(usually set at the heating limit) does not directly determine the location of the inflection point.
The basic heating curve applies to a room temperature setpoint of 20 °C. At lower or higher setpoints, the heating curve is appropriately displaced (also refer to subsection
9.5.3 “Influences on the flow temperature setpoint”).
Outside temperature at a flow temperature setpoint of 20 °C = 20 °C
Outside temperature A = –10 °C
30 % of that range = 9 K
Hence, the inflection point is at an outside temperature of 11 °C.
TFl
60
50
40 nH = 1.5
38 °C
30
20
10
0
-10 -5 0 5 nH = 1.0
10
32 °C
15
9 K = 30 %
30 K = 100 %
20
"20/20 °C"
25
TO
The lift at the point of inflection is dependent on the flow temperature setpoint and the radiator exponent.
Rule of thumb for calculating the lift at the inflection point:
Lift ≈ (Flow temperature setpoint
at nH = 1
– 20 °C) × (nH – 1)
Lift ≈ (32 °C – 20 °C) × (1.5 – 1) = 6 K
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Heating curve
Operating line
[Curvepoint 1] outside temp
[Curvepoint 1] flow temp
Range
–50…10 °C
25…140 °C
Factory setting
–11 °C
60 °C
[Curvepoint 2] outside temp
[Curvepoint 2] flow temp
5…30 °C
5…140 °C
15 °C
30 °C
Radiator exponent 1.00…2.00 1.30
• The heating curve is identical to that of the DESIGO system
• Setting of the radiator exponent can be derived from the type of heating system and is based on physical ground
9.5.3 Influences on the flow temperature setpoint
The basis used for the flow temperature setpoint is the heating curve. In addition, the setpoint is influenced by the following variables:
• Room temperature setpoints
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Impact of the room temperature setpoint
• Room temperature
• Boost heating (refer to subsection 9.7.3 “Quick setback and boost heating”)
The basic heating curve applies to a room temperature setpoint of 20 °C. A positive room temperature setpoint change
∆
TR corresponds to a displacement of the heating curve by the same amount toward the outside temperature and to a displacement by the same amount toward the flow temperature.
TFl
SpTFlDe
TOeff
+
+
TFl
-
SpTFlHi
SpTRN
TODe TOHi
TOeff
+
Example
Impact of the room temperature
Settings
⇒
SpTR
+
SpTR
-
20 °C
Roughly, this corresponds to the value of:
∆
TFl =
∆
TRw × (sHc + 1) sHc =
SpTFlDe – SpTFlHi
ToHi – ToDe
Setpoint readjustment
∆
TRw = 2 K.
∆
TFl = ? sHc =
60 – 30
(15– [–5 ])
= 1.5
⇒ ∆
TFl = 2 K × (1,5 + 1) = 5 K
A deviation of the actual room temperature from the room temperature setpoint has an impact on the flow temperature setpoint only when room temperature influence is activated.
Connection of a room temperature sensor does not automatically activate the room influence.
An analog sensor can be used as a room temperature sensor (Extra configuration), or a room unit transmits the room temperature signal via bus.
In plants where the heating circuit operates in connection with a ventilation system as a room control combination, the room temperature sensor of the ventilation system must not be located in the extract air!
The set room temperature influence defines the gain factor with which the room temperature deviation shall be weighted. The heating curve handles this amplified room temperature as a readjusted room temperature setpoint.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line
Room influence
Range
---- / 0…10
Factory setting
----
TFl
SpTFlDe
TOeff
+
+
TFl
-
SpTFlHi
SpTRN
TODe TOHi
TOeff
+
SpTR
TR
-
+
TR × V
-
+
-
20 °C
SpTR
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
127/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Rule of thumb Due to the room temperature deviation ∆ TV, the change of flow temperature setpoint corresponds roughly to the value of:
∆ TFl= ∆ TR × V × (sHc + 1)
∆
TFl Change of flow temperature setpoint
∆
TR Change of room temperature setpoint
V
Room temperature influence sHc Heating curve slope
Sp Setpoint
TRx Room temperature
During boost heating, the room temperature setpoint increase also produces an increase of the flow temperature setpoint. In that case, the greatest of the 2 values is used for generating the setpoint.
TRBoost
MAX TReff
SpTR
TR
-
TR
+
-
TR × V
The resulting room temperature setpoint has a minimum limitation of 5 °C and a maximum limitation of 35 °C.
Impact of solar radiation
Only one solar intensity sensor can be connected to a controller. For configuration and
parameterization, refer to chapter 12 “Function block miscellaneous”.
The impact of solar radiation is to be set individually for each heating circuit. It can be deactivated (setting ”---“).
Settings
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Commissioning > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line
Impact of solar radiation
TOeff
TFl
SpTFlDe
SpTFlHi
SpTRN
TODe sHc
TOHi
TOeff
sHc
Range
---- / 0.0…15.0 K
+
-
TFl
Factory setting
----
Influence of wind speed
TFl =
Isun × TRsnNom
1000 W/m
2
× (sHc + 1)
Isun
∆
TRsnNom Room temperature increase with 1000 W/m
2 sHc Heating curve slope
The solar intensity sensor is to be configured via “Extra configuration”. If required, the controller’s DC 0…10 V input is to be matched to the sensor output.
DC 0…10 V
≅
0…1,000 W/m
2
is the factory setting.
Setting of the solar radiation impact must always be matched to the type of building.
The setting to be made is the room temperature increase
∆
TRsnNorm resulting from a solar radiation of 1,000 W/m
2
.
Based on this parameter and the current (slightly) attenuated solar radiation, the controller calculates the flow temperature readjustment ∆ TFl due to solar radiation (Isun) as follows:
∆
TFl =
Isun × ∆ TRsnNorm
1000
× (sHc + 1)
Only one wind speed sensor can be connected to a controller. For configuration and
parameterization, refer to chapter 12 “Function block miscellaneous”.
128/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Settings
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
The influence of the wind speed is to be set individually for each heating circuit. It can be deactivated (setting ”---“).
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line
Influence of wind speed
Range Factory setting
---- (none) / 0.0…10.0 K ----
The setting to be made is the room temperature drop resulting from a wind speed of
20 m/s. The influence refers to the design temperature at curvepoint c .
TFl
SpTFlDe sHc
+
TFl
TOeff
-
SpTFlHi
SpTRN
TODe sHc
SpTR
TOHi
TOeff
+
TO
Vwd
-
SpTR - TO
TFl =
Vwd - 0.8
20 - 0.8
×
SpTR - TO
20 - TODE
× TRwdNom × (sHc + 1)
∆
TRwdNom Room temperature drop at 20 °C sHc
SpTR
TODE
Heating curve slope
Room temperature setpoint
Outside temperature at the design temperature
TOeff
Vwd
Effective outside temperature
Filtered wind speed
The wind speed sensor is to be configured via “Extra configuration“. If required, the controller’s DC 0…10 V input is to be matched to the sensor output.
DC 0…10 V ≅ 0…20 m/s is the factory setting.
Setting of the wind influence must always be matched to the location of the building.
The setting to be made is the room temperature drop
∆
TrwdNorm resulting from a wind speed of 20 m/s at a room temperature of 20 °C and the design temperature A, which corresponds to the lower curvepoint.
Based on this parameter and the current (slightly) attenuated wind speed, the controller calculates the flow temperature readjustment ∆ TFl due to the wind.
∆
TFl =
Vwd – 0.8
19.2
×
SpTR – TO
20 – TODE
×
∆
TRwdNorm × (sHc + 1)
9.5.4 Heating limit switch
The heating limit switch is capable of deactivating the heating circuit pump and of shutting down the supply of heat to the heating circuit.
This prevents the waste of heating energy at higher outside temperatures.
To determine the heating limit, the following outside temperature values are taken into
consideration (refer to subsection 9.5.1 “The composite and the attenuated outside temperature”):
• The actual outside temperature TO
• The composite (effectively used) outside temperature TOeff
• The attenuated outside temperature TostrDmp
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Space heating
Operating line
Comfort heating limit
Economy heating limit
Heat limit with Comfort preset
The following applies:
Range
---- / –5…25 °C
---- / –5…25 °C
Inactive / Active
Factory setting
17 °C
5 °C
Inactive
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
129/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Comfort heating limit
Economy heating limit
• If the Comfort heating limit is set to “----“ (none), a heating limit will only exist in
Economy mode and Protection mode . There will be no change to summer operation
• If the Economy heating limit is set to “----“ (none), the Comfort heating limit will be active in Economy mode and Protection mode
• If all 3 temperatures lie 1 °C below the Comfort heating limit, heat will be delivered in Comfort mode and Precomfort mode
• If one of the 3 temperatures lies above the Comfort heating limit, the delivery of heat will be locked
• If all 3 temperatures lie 1 °C below the Economy heating limit, the delivery of heat will be released in Economy mode and Protection mode
• If one of the 3 temperatures lies above the Economy heating limit, the delivery of heat will be locked
TOact
TOStrDmp
TOeff
Comfort heating limit
Eco heating limit
Heating limit when Comfort is preselected
HDCmf
HDEco
Whether the heating limit function shall be active in operating mode “Continuously
Comfort “ can be selected on the “Space heating“ menu.
This setting is always active, independent of whether the operating mode was switched to “Continuously Comfort
“ or through the room operating mode contact.
Exempted from this is the room control combination with an RMU7… ventilation controller; here, the heating limit is always active.
Summer / winter operation
(information for ventilation)
For operation in combination with the ventilation controller, summer / winter operation changeover is used as an overriding function.
When the attenuated outside temperature exceeds the Comfort heating limit, a change to summer operation will take place; this also applies to operating mode “Continuously
Comfort “.
Setpoint
3-position actuator /
DC 0…10 V actuator
9.6 Mixing valve control
9.6.1 Control
The flow temperature setpoint determined by weather-compensated heating circuit control generates the effectively active setpoint for mixing valve control while giving consideration to load control.
Mixing valve control can be effected with a 3-position or DC 0…10 V actuator. The type of actuator is to be selected via “Extra configuration“.
The following mixing valve settings apply to both the 3-position and the DC 0…10 V actuator:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Mixing circuit controller
130/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Load reduction
Load increase
Settings
T
Operating line
Actuator running time
P-band Xp
Integral action time Tn
Range
1…600 s
1…100 K
0…600 s
Factory setting
150 s
50 K
60 s
For more detailed information about mixing valve control and its setting aids, refer to
section 5.7 “Mixing valve control”.
9.6.2 Load
The heat output of mixing valve control can be reduced by functions of higher priority
(e.g. by return temperature limitation) or by functions of other plants (boiler, DHW heating). This is accomplished via load control.
T
T
Heat source
Heat consumer
Heat consumer
Heat demand
Load control
Load reduction can be triggered by one of the following functions:
• Protective boiler startup
• Limitation of the return temperature
• DHW heating with shifting priority
• DHW heating with absolute priority
From the consumer's point of view, a load increase can be effected in the form of pump and / or mixing valve overrun. In principle, this means load maintenance.
9.7 Optimization
The opimization functions are activated or influenced by the following settings:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line
Type of optimization
Forward shift on max
Early shutdown max
Quick setback
[Boost heating] setpoint increase
Room temperature rise
Range
With room model /
With room temp sensor
0…48 h
00.00…06.00 h.min
Off / On
0…20 K
1…600 min/K
Factory setting
With room model
0 h
00:00 h.min
On
5 K
60 min/K
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
131/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Caution
Room model
9.7.1 Type of optimization
The type of optimization determines whether the optimization functions and boost heating are performed based on the acquired room temperature or whether the room model is used.
In plants where the heating circuit operates in connection with a ventilation system as a room control combination, the room temperature sensor used for the ventilation plant must not be located in the extract air!
The room model calculates the room temperature based on the outside temperature, the building time constant and the rate of room temperature increase.
If no room temperature sensor is connected, the optimization functions can work with this room model.
TR
Cmf
Settings
Optimum start control
With room model
TRw
TRM
Economy
t
T
RM
TRw
Room model temperature
Room temperature setpoint
In the case of sudden positive changes of the room temperature setpoint, the room model temperature will be updated with the rate of room temperature increase. In the case of sudden negative changes, the room model temperature will approach the composite outside temperature at a rate of 3 times the building time constant, whereby the process is stopped as soon as the current room temperature setpoint is reached.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line
Type of optimization
Range
With room model /
With room temp sensor
Factory setting
With room model
9.7.2 Optimum start and stop control
The purpose of optimum start control is to reach a temperature level 0.25 K below the
Comfort or Precomfort setpoint when occupancy according to the time program starts.
For that purpose, the heating circuit must be switched on at an earlier point in time. The extent of forward shift depends primarily on the outside temperature.
If a room temperature sensor is installed, the controller also gives consideration to the room temperature when calculating the forward shift. Also, the controller learns the necessary heating up time per K room temperature.
When the required room temperature is reached, the time difference to the target time will be ascertained. Based on the deviation, the controller can readjust the heating up time per K room temperature and calculate the next forward shift with the new value.
If no room temperature sensor is connected, or when the room model shall be used, the rate of room temperature increase (in min/K) can be set.
132/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
The maximum forward shift can also be set. Optimum start control can be deactivated by entering 0 hours as the maximum heating up period.
Settings
Optimum stop control
⇒
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line
Forward shift on max
Room temperature rise
Range
0…48 h
1…600 min/K
Factory setting
0 h
60 min/K
Optimum stop control switches off the heating circuit at the earliest possible point in time so that the room temperature will lie 0.5 K below the Comfort or Precomfort setpoint when the time switch changes from Comfort or Precomfort mode to Economy or
Protection mode.
Optimum stop control is possible only when type of optimization “With room temperature sensor“ has been selected.
Settings
Maximum early shutdown
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line Range Factory setting
Early shutdown max 00.00…06.00 h.min 00.00 h.min
Maximum early shutdown limits the extent of maximum forward shift. When choosing setting “00:00“, optimum stop control will be deactivated.
Quick setback
Settings
Room temperature
Boost heating
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
9.7.3 Quick setback and boost heating
The purpose of quick setback is to reach the new setpoint as quickly as possible when changing the room operating mode.
During the time quick setback is active, the heating circuit pump is deactivated and the heating circuit’s mixing valve fully closed. The heating circuit remains off until the required room temperature is reached.
The “Quick setback“ function can be deactivated on the service level.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line Range Factory setting
Quick setback Off / On On
Quick setback is started when the room operating mode changes from Comfort or
Precomfort to Economy or Protection .
It will be ended when the room temperature has reached the new setpoint or when a change back to Comfort mode is made.
If a room temperature sensor is installed, the actual value of the room temperature will be used for aborting quick setback.
If there is no sensor, the temperature of the room model is used to make the calculation. In that case, the setback time will depend on the outside temperature and the building time constant.
The purpose of the “Boost heating” function is to work with shorter heating up times.
During the time boost heating is active, the room temperature setpoint is raised by an adjustable value.
The room temperature setpoint increase heating due to boost heating and the room influence produce an increase of the flow temperature setpoint. The larger of the 2 influences will prevail.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
133/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Deactivation
Activation
Boost heating is activated when a change is made from room operating mode Economy or Protection to Comfort or Precomfort and when the room temperature lies
0.25 K or more below the setpoint.
TR
TRSetpt
SetptTR
SetptCmf
TR
SetptEco
TRSetpt
SetptCmf
SetptEco
∆SetptTR
Room temperature setpoint
Setpoint, room operating mode Comfort or Precomfort
Setpoint, room operating mode Economy or Protection
Setpoint increase
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Optimizations/influences
Operating line
[Boost heating] setp increase
Range
0…20 K
Factory setting
5 K
9.8 Limit and protective functions
9.8.1 Maximum limitation of the room temperature
If a room temperature sensor is connected, maximum limitation of the room temperature can be activated.
In contrast to room temperature influence with modulating action on the flow temperature setpoint, maximum limitation of the room temperature works with 2-position control.
⇒
When the actual room temperature exceeds the room temperature setpoint by the adjustable room limitation increase, the heating circuit pump will be deactivated.
When the pump is deactivated, the heating circuit does not call for heat.
When the actual room temperature drops below the switch-off point by the room temperature’s switching differential, the heating circuit pump will be activated.
134/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
TR
TRx
TRw + TR
TRw + TR - TRSD
TRw on
Pump
off on
TR
TRSD
t
Settings
Room limitation increase
Room lim switching differential off
TRw
TR
t Time
∆TR
Temperature differential for switching the heating circuit off
TR Room temperature
TRSD Temperature differential for switching the heating circuit on
TRw Room temperature setpoint
TRx Actual value of room temperature
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Limitations
Operating line
Room limitation increase
Room lim switching differential
Range
---- / 0.5…5.0 K
0.2…5.0 K
Factory setting
----
0.2 K
The room limitation increase is used to set the temperature differential for switching off the heating circuit.
The room limitation switching differential is used to set the temperature differential for switching on the heating circuit.
9.8.2 Limitation return temperature
The heating circuit’s mixing valve can be used to provide maximum limitation of the return temperature. Minimum limitation is not supported. By contrast, the boiler supports minimum limitation with certain restrictions for all consumers. For more detailed
information, refer to subsection 9.8.3 “Minimum limitation of the return temperature“.
Y1
B1
M1 M1
B1
B7
B7
Y1
Main controller
B1 Flow temperature sensor
B7 Return temperature sensor
M1 Heating circuit pump
Y1 Heating circuit mixing valve
Primary controller
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
135/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Extra configuration
Settings
Maximum limitation
The function is to be activated via “Extra configuration“:
… > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs > Return sensor
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Limitations
Operating line
[Curvepoint 1] outside temp
[Curvepoint 1] flow temp
Range
–50…50 °C
---- / 0…140 °C
Factory setting
–20 °C
---- °C
[Curvepoint 2] outside temp
[Curvepoint 2] flow temp
–50…50 °C
---- / 0…140 °C
10 °C
---- °C
The return temperature limit value is either fixed or it changes as a function of the outside temperature. Limitation will be activated when at least one valid maximum return temperature limit is set.
TRtLim
[Curvepoint 1]
Return temperature
[Curvepoint 2]
Return temperature
Special cases
[Curvepoint 1]
Outside temperature
[Curvepoint 2]
Outside temperature
TOeff
TRtLim
TOeff
Limit value of return temperature limitation
Composite (effectively acting) outside temperature
Curvepoint 1 Maximum return temperature limit value, active at low outside temperatures
Curvepoint 2 Minimum return temperature limit value, active at high outside temperatures
Setting Effect
[Curvepoint 1] return temp =
[Curvepoint 2] return temp
Constant return temperature limitation.
The outside temperature is of no importance
[Curvepoint 1] outside temp =
[Curvepoint 2] outside temp
Return temperature limit value, changes abruptly at the curvepoints
[Curvepoint 1] return temp = - - -
[Curvepoint 2] return temp = - - -
[Curvepoint 1] return temp and [Curvepoint 2] return temp = - - -
Constant return temperature limitation with [curvepoint 2] maximum return temperature limit value. The outside temperature is of no importance.
Constant return temperature limitation with [curvepoint 1] maximum return temperature limit value. The outside temperature is of no importance
Return temperature limitation is deactivated
If the return temperature exceeds the limit value, the primary controller’s flow temperature setpoint will be lowered. If the return temperature drops below the limit value, the reduction of the flow temperature setpoint will be negated again.
Limitation works as an I-controller whose integral action time can be adjusted.
136/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Mixing circuit controller
Operating line
[Tn] return temp limitation max
Range
0…60 min
Factory setting
30 min
9.8.3 Minimum
Using the boiler return temperature sensor, it is possible to implement a common minimum limitation of the return temperature for all consumers (heating circuits and
DHW heating) with no need for configuring a boiler. If the boiler return temperature drops below the adjusted minimum limit value, the amount of heat drawn by the consumers will be restricted by locking signals.
For more detailed information about the configuration, refer to subsection 6.6.2
"Minimum limitation of the boiler temperature“.
For information about the parameterization of this function, refer to subsection 6.6.1
“Maintained boiler return temperature”.
Frost protection for the plant
Frost protection for the flow
Maximum limitation of the flow temperature
Minimum limitation of the flow temperature
Heating up brake
9.8.4 Frost functions and general protective functions
It can be selected whether or not frost protection for the plant shall act on the heating circuit pump.
The flow temperature is monitored for minimum limitation. If the flow temperature falls below 5 °C, a heat demand signal is sent to the heat source and the mixing valve will open. The function will be stopped as soon as the flow temperature has risen to 7 °C.
The function is active for a minimum of 5 minutes.
This setting ensures maximum limitation of the flow temperature setpoint.
This setting ensures minimum limitation of the flow temperature setpoint. Minimum limitation is only active when there is a demand for heat.
Setting “---“ (none) deactivates the function.
The rate of increase of the flow temperature setpoint can be limited to a maximum
(called ”heating up brake”). In that case, the maximum the flow temperature setpoint can increase is only the selected temperature per unit of time (K per hour). This function prevents knocking noises in the pipework and excessive loads on the heat source.
Setting “---“ deactivates the function.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
137/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Meter inputs
Settings
Meter input
Type of limitation
Limit value
138/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
TFlSetpt
TFlSetpt
Maximum increase:
∆ TFlSetpt
∆ t t t t
∆ t
Time
Unit of time
∆
TflSetpt Rate of setpoint increase per unit of time
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Limitations
Operating line
Flow temperature max
Flow temperature min
Flow temperature rise max
Frost protection for the plant
Range
0…140 °C
---- / 0…140 °C
---- / 1…600 K/h
Off / On
Factory setting
80 °C
----
----
On
9.8.5 Pulse limitation
Every heating circuit is capable of handling pulses for limiting the load and the volumetric flow. Prerequisite for the limitation of pulses is a heating circuit plant type with mixing valve.
The pulses are delivered via the meter inputs of function block “Meter”. For more
set up.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Limitations > Pulse limitation
Operating line
Meter input
Type of limitation
Limit value
Integral action time Tn
Range
--- / 1…4
Absolute / Scaled
5…4000 pulse/min
0…255 min
Factory setting
---
Absolute
75 pulse/min
60 min
The meter input is an input of function block ”Meter“ used for the limitation of pulses.
Only inputs configured to a terminal can be selected.
There are 2 types of limitation to choose from:
• Absolute: Limitation takes effect when the limit value is crossed
• Scaled: The limit value is fixed at 75 pulses/min. It can be adjusted but without having any effect. If less than 5 pulses/min are received, fault status message No
signal meter 1 (or …2) will be delivered after 20 seconds. Heat meters with a scaled output deliver 120 pulses/min if there is no supply of heat or no volumetric flow. Used together with pulse limitation, this prevents hydraulic creep.
From the limit value, pulse limitation starts throttling the actuating device (mixing valve).
The setting is only active when the limitation is absolute. With the scaled limitation, the
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Integral action time (Tn) limit value can be set, but the function is always performed with 75 pulses/min (fixed value).
The setting value determines the rate at which the flow temperature setpoint will be lowered:
• Short integral action times lead to fast reductions
• Long integral action times lead to slow reductions
9.8.6 Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun
To protect the boiler against overtemperatures after the burner has shut down, a consumer overrun time can be set on the boiler controller.
9.8.7 Pump kick and valve kick
The pump kick is a protective function that is carried out periodically. It prevents pumps and / or mixing valves from seizing after longer off periods.
9.9 Heat
The heating circuit sends its heat demand as a temperature request to the heat source.
T
T
T
Setpoint increase mixing valve
Heat source
Heat consumer
Heat consumer
Wärmebedarf
Leistungssteuerung
The temperature request for the current heat demand is calculated based on the flow
temperature setpoint of the heating circuit (heating curve, subsection 9.5.2, and influ-
ences, subsection 9.5.3) plus an adjustable setpoint increase for the mixing valve.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Mixing circuit controller 1
Operating line Range Factory setting
Setp increase mixing valve 0…50 K 10 K
The setpoint increase is used to define by what amount the temperature request (to the boiler or the primary controller) shall be raised against the flow temperature setpoint.
For detailed information, refer to chapter 14 “Communication“.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
139/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Extra configuration
Averaging
Type of sensor
Example
Room temperature via bus
Sending
9.10.1 Text designation
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
Operating line
Heating circuit 1*
Time switch 1**
Range
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Factory setting
Heating circuit 1*
Time switch 1**
* Or heating circuit 2 or 3
** Or time switch 2 or 3
The text entered here appears on the menu and on the info display in place of the original text.
9.10.2 Acquisition of the room temperature
The room temperature is required for the optimization functions and for influencing the flow temperature setpoint.
The input is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs >
Room sensor Assign terminal
A heating circuit can handle a maximum of 2 room temperatures. In that case, it is of no importance whether the room temperature is acquired locally or via the Konnex bus.
The average will be generated from the 2 actual values.
The type of room temperature sensor can be selected:
Example
with input terminal RMH760.X4:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs > RMH760.X4 > Type
The following choices are available:
• LG-Ni 1000
• 2 × LG-Ni 1000
• T1
• Pt1000
• DC 0…10 V
A maximum of 2 LG-Ni 1000 sensors can be connected to the same terminal. This cannot automatically be identified by the controller. For this reason, in that case,
2 × LG-Ni 1000 sensors must be selected when parameterizing the terminal inputs.
If the controller is connected to the bus, the room temperature can be transmitted and received via bus. In addition to the room zone, the controller must have a valid device address set.
With default address 255, there will be no communication via bus.
If the room temperature is acquired directly at the device, it will be transmitted in the heating circuit’s room zone (geographical zone (apartm.)) via bus so that it will become available to all devices on the bus.
The room temperature can also be acquired by bus-compatible room sensors or room units (e.g. QAW740) and be sent directly via bus. The associated room zone (geographical zone (apartm.)) is to be set at the sensor or room unit.
140/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Receiving
Important
The room temperature transmitted via bus is received by the heating circuit, provided the room zones (geographical zone (apartm.)) of the transmitter accord with those of the receiver.
The following variants are available:
Variant Effect
1 room sensor directly connected
The heating circuit operates with its own room temperature.
When communication is activated, the room temperature signal will be delivered throughout the heating circuit’s geographical zone
2 room sensors directly connected
1 room sensor (or
1 QAW740 room unit)
2 room sensors or
1 Konnex room sensor and 1 QAW740 room unit *
1 directly connected room sensor and
1 Konnex room sensor
(or 1 QAW740 room unit)
The heating circuit operates with the average value of the 2 sensors.
When communication is activated, the average value will be delivered throughout the heating circuit’s geographical zone as the room temperature
When communication is activated, the heating circuit receives the room temperature signal of the same geographical zone.
The heating circuit operates with the room temperature received
When communication is activated, the heating circuit receives the room temperature signals of the same geographical zone.
The heating circuit operates with the average value of the 2 temperature signals received
When communication is activated, the heating circuit receives the room temperature signal of the same geographical zone.
The heating circuit operates with the average value of the 2 temperatures
Diagram
T
T
T
T
T
T
Synco
T
Synco
Synco
Synco
Synco
* 2 QAW740 room units are not permitted! Operation in the room can only take place on one device
T
When using the room control combination with ventilation, special attention must be paid to the sensor's location on the ventilation side.
Mounting the sensor for the room temperature in the extract air in combination with a heating circuit is not permitted!
The sensor for room temperature control of the ventilation system must be located in the room. If this is not observed, the heating circuit will work with the wrong temperature when the ventilation plant is shut down.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
141/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Note
Behavior after a power failure
Extra configuration
Settings
Communication
Example:
2 heating circuits
9.10.3 Room control combination
The heating circuit of the RMH760B can be combined with a heating circuit of some other controller. The combination of 2 room control systems is required when one heating circuit is used for the underfloor heating system and one for the radiators, for example. Another example is the combination of ventilation and heating in a room (e.g. in a hall).
If only the time program shall be commonly used, this can be done without a room control combination. In that case, the time switch of the heating circuit is to be operated
as a master or slave. For more detailed information, refer to section 5.1 “Time switch”.
In the event of a power failure, the slave’s operating mode is Comfort master sends another signal via bus
.
until the
For more detailed information about ventilation, refer to the Basic Documentation on the RMU7…B (P3150).
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
Operating line Range Factory setting
Room control combination Master /
Slave external setpoint /
Slave internal setpoint
Master
There are no settings required.
The room operation selector must be operated and the setpoints (if externally) adjusted at the maser.
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
Operating line
Geographical zone (apartm.)
Range
---- / 1…126
Communication is described in chapter 14 “Communication“.
Factory setting
----
Requirement:
The basic load is covered by a weather-compensated heating circuit and the loaddependent part by a second heating circuit with or without room influence. The 2 heating circuits shall operate parallel and be controlled by a common switching program or room operation selector.
142/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Solution:
Using the extra function “Room control combination“, one of the 2 heating circuits as the master can predefine the operating mode for the second heating circuit, which is configured as the slave.
If required, the setpoints can also be adopted by the master. This is accomplished with the configuration “Slave external setpoint“.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Example:
Ventilation and heating
Requirement:
A heating circuit covers the basic load and a ventilation plant the individual load (heat demand) in the space.
This application can also accommodate a common time switch or common preselected operating modes, if required.
Summer operation
Important
Faulty flow temperature sensor
⇒
Combination of ventilation and heating
Solution:
Using the extra function “Room control combination“, the heating circuit can be operated as the slave and receives the room operating mode and the time program predefined by the ventilation controller. It can be selected whether the setpoints for the heating circuit shall be adopted externally (to be adjusted on the ventilation controller) or internally (to be adjusted on the heating controller).
Heating circuit and ventilation must be assigned to the same geographical zone. A room unit, if present, must also be assigned to the same geographical zone.
The ventilation controller always assumes the function of the room control master.
A room unit, if present, always acts on the room control master.
During summer operation (heating circuit switched off via the heating limit), the ventilation controller adopts the sustained mode.
Summer / winter operation changeover is ascertained via the heating limit (refer to
subsection 9.5.4) and sent to the ventilation controller via bus
The ventilation controller’s room temperature sensor must not be installed in the extract air duct! Otherwise, functions ”Room temperature influence“ and “Optimization with room temperature” are not allowed to be activated.
9.11 Fault
As soon as commissioning is completed (by quitting the Commissioning menu), a check is made to see if the configured sensors are connected. Should a short-circuit or open-circuit in connection with the sensor or the measuring line occur, a fault status message will be delivered.
The number of the heating circuit or HC in the error text indicates the heating circuit or aggregate where a fault occurred.
Number Text Effect
50
55
[HC 1] error flow sensor
[HC 2] error flow sensor
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
52 [Heat circuit 3] flow sens error
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
In the case of a faulty flow temperature sensor, the mixing valve will be driven to the fully closed position to become inactive (3-position actuator), enabling it to be manually operated.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
143/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Faulty return temperature sensor
Faulty room temperature sensor
Faulty room controller combination
Pump fault in heating circuit 1
Number Text Effect
51
56
[HC 1] error return sensor
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
[HC 2] error return sensor
Nonurgent message; must be acknowl-
53 [Heat circuit 3] return sens error edged
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
In the event of a faulty return temperature sensor, the heating circuit behaves as if no return temperature sensor was present. Return temperature limitation is deactivated.
Number Text
60 Room temp sensor error
HC 1
65
68
61
66
69
Room temp sensor error
HC 2
Room temp sensor error
HC 3
>2 room sensors in heat circuit 1
>2 room sensors in heat circuit 2
>2 room sensors in heat circuit 3
Effect
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Urgent message; must be acknowledged.
More than 2 room temperature sensors in the same geographical zone
Urgent message; must be acknowledged.
More than 2 room temperature sensors in the same geographical zone
Urgent message; must be acknowledged.
More than 2 room temperature sensors in the same geographical zone
Number Text
5401
5411
5421
5402
5412
5422
Effect
Room master failure in HC 1 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged. No master
Room master failure in HC 2 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged. No master
Room master failure in HC 3 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged. No master
>1 identical geogr zone [1] Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged. More than one master in zone of heating circuit 1
>1 identical geogr zone [2] Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged. More than one master in zone of
>1 same geogr zone [3] heating circuit 2
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged. More than one master in zone of heating circuit 3
Number Text
2521 [Heat circuit 1 pump] overload
Effect
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset”.
No heating circuit stop
144/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Pump fault in heating circuit 2
Pump fault in heating circuit 3
Note
Number Text
2522
2523
2524
2525
[Heat circuit 1 pump B] overload
[Heat circuit 1 pump] no flow
[Heat circuit 1 pump B] no flow
[Heat circuit 1 pump] fault
Effect
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset.“.
No heating circuit stop
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset. No heating circuit stop
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset. No heating circuit stop
Urgent message; must not be acknowledged. Heating circuit stop
Number Text
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
[Heat circuit 2 pump] overload
[Heat circuit 2 pump B] overload
[Heat circuit 2 pump] no flow
[Heat circuit 2 pump B] no flow
[Heat circuit 2 pump] fault
Effect
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset.“.
No heating circuit stop
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset.”
No heating circuit stop
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset.
No heating circuit stop
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset.
No heating circuit stop
Urgent message; must not be acknowledged
Heating circuit stops
Number Text Effect
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
[Heat circuit 3 pump] overload
[Heat circuit 3 pump B] overload
[Heat circuit 3 pump] no flow
[Heat circuit 3 pump B] no flow
[Heat circuit 3 pump] fault
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset.“.
No heating circuit stop
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset.“.
No heating circuit stop
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset.
No heating circuit stop
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset.
No heating circuit stop
Urgent message; must not be acknowledged
Heating circuit stops
For description of outside sensor errors, refer to subsection 12.3.2 “Fault handling”.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
145/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Inputs / setpoints
Outputs
Limitations
146/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
9.12 Diagnostic
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Actual value outside temp
Simulation outside temperature
Composite outside temp
Attenuated outside temp
Actual value flow temp
Flow temperature setpoint
Room sensor temp.
Actual value room temp
[Room temperature 1] bus
[Room temperature 2] bus
Room temperature model value
Current room temp setpoint
Room setpoint absolute
Room setpoint relative
Actual value return temp
Return temperature max
[Heating circuit pump] overload
[Heat circuit pump B] overload
Flow signal pump
Room operating mode
Timer function
Special day input
Holiday input
Adjustable values / display / remarks
…°C
…°C
…°C
…°C
…°C
According to section 9.6 “Mixing valve control” (load control considered)
…°C
…°C
…°C
…°C
…°C
…°C; according to preselection made by the user, current room operating mode and interventions
…°C
…°C
…°C
…°C
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = pump flow in operation)
0 / 1 (1 = operating mode according to contact)
0 / 1 (1 = timer function will be activated)
0 / 1 (1 = switching program according to special day is active)
0 / 1 (1 = operation according to holiday settings)
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Outputs
Operating line
Outside temperature relay
Mixing valve position
Heating circuit pump
Heating circuit pump B
Heating limit relay
Operating mode relay 1
Operating mode relay 2
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Off / On
0…100 % (3-position and modulating)
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Limitations
Operating line
Flow temperature max
Flow temperature min
Flow temperature rise
Return temperature max
Pulse limitation
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Inactive/ Active
Inactive/ Active
Inactive/ Active
Inactive/ Active
Inactive/ Active
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
9 Heating circuit control
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Function block
DHW plant diagram
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
10.1 Overview of function block
For applications with storage tank (DHW types DHW 0 through DHW 5), the following function block is available: a a d d d a d d d a a d a d d d d d d
B
V
B
V
B
V
Primary
Secondary Tank
Consumer
DHW
Circulation
2)
1)
B
Maintain.
temp.
2) 1)
B
2)
1)
B
3P
Y Q Q
3P
Y Q Q Q
3P
Y Q Q Q
For application with direct DHW heating (DHW 6), the following function block is available: a a d a d d d d d d
B
V
Primary Secondary
Consumer
DHW
Circulation
2) 2)
1)
B
3P
Y
3P
Y Q Q Q
1 = TStTaTop
2 = TStTaBot
TFlSec
T
VlvCons
TFlCons
TFlPr
T
PrPu
VlvPr
SecPu
ElHtr
1
2
CiPu
TRt
TFlPr
ElHtr
Flow temperature sensor, primary
Electric immersion heater
SecPu Secondary pump
TflCons Flow temperature sensor, consumer
TFlSec Flow temperature sensor, secondary
VlvPreHeatSec
TRt Return temperature sensor
TStTaBot Storage tank sensor at the bottom
TStTaTop Storage tank sensor at the top
VlvCons Consumer mixing valve
VlvPr Primary mixing valve
VlvPreHeatSec Maintained secondary circuit
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
147/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Basic configuration
Extra configuration
Outputs
Inputs
10.2 Configuration
10.2.1 General
With plant types x–1, x–3, x–5, x–7, DHW heating is activated per default. The DHW plant type preselected per default depends on the type of plant:
Plant type
H0-x, H2-x, H3-x, H4-x
Default DHW plant type
DHW 2
H1-x
H5-x
DHW 4
DHW 3
H6-x
DHW 6
DHW heating with storage tank is always preconfigured to the RMZ783B DHW module.
For configuration of plant types, refer to section 3.2 “Basic configuration”.
DHW heating can be configured to any of the modules. If the preselected RMZ783B is replaced by some other module, all settings using type reference RMZ783… via “Extra configuration” must be reconfigured.
As a basic rule, function blocks can always be activated via “Extra configuration”, independent of the type of plant. A function block is activated by assigning a pump or mixing valve output to a terminal.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Outputs
Operating line
DHW plant type
Primary mixing valve 3-pos
Primary mixing valve modulating
Primary pump
Primary pump B
Maintained sec temp 3-pos
Maintained sec temp modulating
Secondary pump
Secondary pump B
Electric immersion heater
Consumer mixing valve 3-pos
Consumer mixing valve mod
Circulating pump
Circulating pump B
Legionella function relay
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Display of the DHW plant type. For further information, see below
DC 0…10 V
Primary twin pump
For DHW heating with storage tank and external heat exchanger
DC 0…10 V
For DHW heating with storage tank and external heat exchanger
Secondary twin pump
DC 0…10 V
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Inputs
Operating line
Primary flow sensor
Return sensor
[DHW primary pump] overload
[DHW primary pump B] overload
Primary pump flow signal
Flow sensor secondary
Flow signal
[DHW sec pump] overload
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Return temperature limitation
Fault input primary pump
Fault input primary pump B
Flow supervision primary pump
Only with heat exchanger
Only with DHW plant type DHW 6
Fault input secondary pump
148/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Operating line
[DHW sec pump B] overload
Secondary pump flow signal
Storage tank sensor top
Storage tank sensor bottom
Forced charging
Flow sensor consumers
[DHW circ pump] overload
[DHW circ pump B] overload
Circulating pump flow signal
DHW optg mode
Special day input
Holiday input
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Fault input secondary pump B
Flow supervision secondary pump
Optionally for consumer control
Fault input circulating pump
Fault input circulating pump B
Flow supervision circulating pump
DHW operating mode will be preselected and activated via the input
DHW time switches according to special day
DHW heating according to holiday DHW operating mode
10.2.2 DHW plant types
The DHW plant type results from the configured outputs. It is defined based on the configuration of the outputs and will be displayed on the first line.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Outputs > DHW plant type
The following types of DHW plant can be configured:
Plant type
DHW 0
DHW 1
DHW 2
Description
Storage tank charging with electric immersion heater (with no impact on the plant’s heat generation).
Options:
• Storage tank sensor at the top
• Storage tank sensor at the bottom
• Consumer control
• Circulating pump
Storage tank charging with primary pump (controlled via the storage tank temperature).
Options:
• Storage tank sensor at the bottom
• Circulating pump
• Consumer control
• Electric immersion heater
Storage tank charging with mixing valve control based on the charging temperature (controlled via the storage tank temperature).
Options:
• Storage tank sensor at the bottom
• Circulating pump
• Consumer control
• Electric immersion heater
• Return temperature limitation
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
149/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
150/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Plant type
DHW 3
Description
Storage tank charging with external heat exchanger and flow control based on the charging temperature
(controlled via the storage tank temperature).
Options:
• Maintained secondary circuit
• Storage tank sensor at the bottom
• Circulating pump
• Consumer control
• Electric immersion heater
• Return temperature limitation
DHW 4
Storage tank charging with external heat exchanger, primary pump and mixing valve control based on the charging temperature or the primary flow temperature (controlled via the storage tank temperature).
Options:
• Primary flow sensor
• Maintained secondary circuit
• Storage tank sensor at the bottom
• Circulating pump
• Consumer control
• Electric immersion heater
• Return temperature limitation
DHW 5
Storage tank charging with external heat exchanger and primary pump
(controlled via the storage tank temperature).
Options:
• Primary flow sensor
• Maintained secondary circuit
• Storage tank sensor at the bottom
• Circulating pump
• Consumer control
• Electric immersion heater
DHW 6
Direct DHW heating (permanent release or optional control with flow switch).
Options:
• Flow switch (recommended)
• Circulating pump
• Consumer control
• Return temperature limitation
If the DHW plant type is undefined (display showing “---“), the function block will not be activated.
10.2.3 3-position
Mixing valve control can be provided either with a 3-position or DC 0…10 V actuator.
The type of actuator used is to be selected via “Extra configuration”.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Extra configuration
Fault settings DHW
Note
DHW operating mode
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
The output is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Outputs > Mixing valve 3-
pos Assign terminal
Main menu >
Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Outputs > Mixing valve
modulating Assign terminal
10.2.4 Pump control
All DHW pumps offer the same choices as any other pump in the controller. Supervision is also possible for an individual pump; optionally, every DHW pump can be a twin pump. For that, the respective outputs must be configured.
For more detailed information, refer to section 5.8 “Pump control and twin pumps”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Fault settings > Overload primary pump
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Fault settings > Overload secondary pump
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Fault settings > Overload circulating pump
Operating line
Fault acknowledgement
Fault acknowledgement B
Range
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Factory setting
Acknowledge and reset
Acknowledge and reset
10.3 Operating modes and setpoints
10.3.1 DHW operating modes
The DHW operating mode defines the setpoint at which the storage tank or the flow temperature is maintained.
Consumer control (optional) has a direct impact on the DHW temperature in the consumer network. As a result, the settings made here will probably not be noticed by the
DHW consumer, or only with a certain delay.
Main menu > DHW > DHW optg mode
Operating line
Preselection
State
Cause
Range
Auto /
Normal /
Reduced /
Protection /
Normal /
Reduced /
Protection /
DHW time switch /
Holidays or /
Special day or /
DHW operation selector /
DHW operating mode contact /
Forc charg contact /
Legionella program /
Electric
Factory setting
Auto
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
151/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Operating line
DHW operating mode holidays
Range
… Control priorities (refer to subsection 10.3.4)
* The legionella function will not be performed
Auto /
Normal /
Reduced /
Protection*
Factory setting
Protection*
Preselection (DHW operation selector)
Here, the plant user can select the required operating mode. In operating mode Auto , the current setpoint will be determined by the time program.
If required, it is possible to switch to continuous operation with a fixed setpoint. The selected setpoint can be overridden by a control intervention of higher priority (e.g. by legionella program f ).
⇒
In Protection mode , legionella program f will not be performed.
State It is indicated at what setpoint DHW heating presently operates.
Cause
DHW operating mode during holidays
Time switch / calendar
There may be different reasons for the current state. Decisive is the control priority.
During the holiday period, the setpoint is predefined by this setting. Using the Auto setting, DHW heating can be excluded from the holiday period. In that case, changeover takes place according to the DHW time switch.
For information about the action of the holiday DHW heating mode on the circulating
pump, refer to subsection 5.2.2. “Holidays”.
In operating mode “Auto “, the current 24-hour program switches the setpoint between
“Normal “ and ”Reduced “.
Overriding the 24-hour program
Manual forced charging
DHW operating mode contact (switch)
Extra configuration
Settings
10.3.2 User
The 24-hour program can also be overridden by configuring conventional switches or pushbuttons.
In the case of DHW plant types with storage tank, the plant user can trigger forced storage tank charging to the normal setpoint via a pushbutton, thus overriding the current 24-hour program.
For more detailed information, refer to subsection 10.4.2 “Forced charging”.
Using a switch, the user can switch to continuous operation with a fixed setpoint, thus overriding the current 24-hour program.
The input is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Inputs > DHW optg
mode Assign terminal
The type of DHW operating mode to be used for overriding the 24-hour program can be selected on the service level.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line
Preselected optg mode input
Range
Normal / Reduced /
Protection
Factory setting
Normal
152/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant operation
Preselection for the plant operation selector
State
Cause
10.3.3 Plant
Plant operation indicates whether DHW heating is switched on and what its state is.
Main menu > DHW > Plant operation
Operating line
Preselection
State
Range
Auto / Off*
Off /
DHW ready /
Charging active /
Electric
Factory setting
Auto
Cause Plant operation sel /
DHW user request /
Legionella function /
Overtemp protection/overrun /
Frost protection storage tank /
Frost protection for the flow /
Summer operation /
* The frost protection functions are ensured (according to control priority d
For service purposes, DHW heating can be switched off. The primary valve will fully close, the pumps start their overrun and will then be deactivated.
On completion of servicing, the plant operation selector must be set back to “Auto“.
The current state of DHW heating is displayed.
It is indicated why the current state is active.
Plant types
DHW 0…DHW 5
⇒
10.3.4 Control
The following diagram shows the priorities of the different choices of intervention via digital inputs and via operation on the controller.
Lower numbers indicate higher priorities.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
153/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Interventions via digital inputs
Holiday contact
Specual day contact
9
8
On, Off
On, Off
Calendar
Switching program
Resulting operating mode
Normal, Reduced, Protection
DHW operating mode contact
Forced charging with push button
6
On, Off
5
On, Off
Cmf, Pcf, Eco, Prt
11
Special day, holidays
10
Operating on the controller, or via bus
Settings 24-hour program, holiday/special day program
Settings calendar
Auto, Normal,
Reduced, Protection
7
Legionella on, off
4
DHW mode selector
Settings legionella function
Resulting operating mode
Legionella, Normal, Reduced, Protection
DHW charging control
Pump, mixing valve etc.
Off, Auto
3
On, Off
2
On, Off
1
Electric immersion heater
DHW plant operation selector
Wiring test
On, Off
Priority Size
Wiring test
Explanation
During the wiring test (highest priority), the plant components can be directly controlled, independent of all other settings
The controller-internal safety functions will be overridden!
Plant operation selector The plant operation selector has the second highest priority and can only be overridden by the controller-internal frost protection functions
Electric immersion heater
When the heat source changes to summer operation, DHW heating, if installed, will switch over to the electric immersion heater.
The controller-internal frost protection functions continue to be ensured. By contrast, the legionella program will be overridden
Legionella protection The legionella program can be started in any of the operating modes, with the exception of preselected operating mode
“
Protection”
Forced charging Using button “Forced charging” (DHW push), recharging to the normal setpoint can be triggered in any of the operating modes. Forced charging can also be performed during holiday periods
154/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type DHW 6 (direct
DHW heating)
Priority Size
DHW operating mode contact
DHW operation selector
Special day contact
Holiday contact
Explanation
Using the DHW operating mode contact, a fixed operating mode can be preselected. This operating mode overrides DHW operation selector in the controller
Using the DHW operation selector, it is possible to switch from operating mode Auto to a continuous operating mode with the respective setpoint.
In operating mode Auto , the setpoint is determined by the calendar and the time switch
The current 24-hour program will be overridden by the special day contact. The associated special day program is to be set on the DHW time switch
The current 24-hour program can be overridden by the holiday contact with a fixed setpoint
Calendar
Holidays/special days
If a special day is active, the associated 24-hour program of the DHW time switch will be activated.
Holidays, if entered, will be overridden.
If holiday mode is active, a preselected fixed setpoint can be maintained.
When using holiday operating mode Auto , DHW heating during the holiday period will not be affected
Time switch In the time switch, the associated 24-hour program will be activated in accordance with the current weekday
The control priorities with DHW plant type DHW 6 are analogous to those with
DHW 0…DHW 5. Exceptions:
• Forced charging
• Electric immersion heater
Setpoints (setting)
Note on consumer control
Consumer setpoints
10.3.5 DHW
The setpoints for the operating modes (Normal / Reduced / Protection) can be preselected by the plant user via operation. The setting values limit each other.
In addition, on the service level, the setpoints for the legionella program can be set. The normal setpoint limits the setting range downward.
Main menu > DHW > Setpoints…
Operating line
Legionella setpoint
Normal setpoint
Reduced setpoint
Frost protection setpoint
Range
55…140 °C
40…70 °C
5…55 °C
5…40 °C
Factory setting
70 °C
55 °C
40 °C
5 °C
The setpoints preselected for storage tank charging or direct DHW consumption must be matched to the setpoints of (optional) consumer control; in other words, the settings selected here should at any point in time lie above the setpoints of consumer control. It may be necessary to give consideration to the different time programs.
The setpoints for consumer control are described in subsection 10.11.6 “Consumer control”.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
155/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Inputs / setpoints
(display)
Settings
The setpoint currently active for storage tank charging appears on the Main menu and on the info page.
Main menu > DHW > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Storage tank temp setpoint
Range
5…140 °C
Factory setting
For detailed information about the generation of the storage tank temperature setpoint,
refer to subsection 10.4.1 “Charging control via the storage tank temperature”.
10.4 Storage tank charging
Storage tank charging (DHW 0…DHW 5) and thus primary control (refer to section 10.7
“Primary control“) can be started and / or terminated via different functions:
• Storage tank temperature (according to the current operating mode)
• Maximum charging time
• Forced charging
The following settings enable the functions to be activated or matched to specific needs:
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line
Switching differential
Setback DHW setpoint bottom
Charging time max
Forced charging
Range
1…20 K
0…20 K
---- / 5…250 min
Never /
With 1st change to normal /
With every change to normal
Factory setting
5 K
5 K
----
Never
Storage tank sensor at the top
Starting storage tank charging
Ending storage tank charging
⇒
10.4.1 Charging control via the storage tank temperature
Normally, storage tank charging is controlled via the storage tank temperature.
Charging is started as soon as the storage tank temperature drops below the switch-on point; it ends when the storage tank temperature setpoint (TStTaSetpt) is reached.
Charging can also be activated via forced charging and aborted when the maximum
charging time is reached (refer to subsections 10.4.2 “Forced charging” and 10.4.3
If there is no storage tank sensor at the bottom, charging control is effected via one sensor only.
To start storage tank charging, the storage tank temperature must have dropped below the storage tank temperature setpoint (TStTaSetpt) by the amount of the (adjustable) switching differential (SDDhw).
Charging is ended as soon as the storage tank temperature has reached the setpoint.
SDDhw
ON
T
TStTaTop
OFF
T
ON
T
OFF
=
TStTaSetpt
TStTa
156/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Storage tank sensor at the bottom
Extra configuration
Settings
Storage tank sensor at top and bottom
Starting storage tank charging
Ending storage tank charging
Example
Starting charging
Ending charging
An additional storage tank sensor can be configured for storage tank charging control.
The storage tank sensor at the bottom allows better usage of the storage tank volume.
The function is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
… > Inputs > Storage tank sensor bottom Assign terminal
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line Range Factory setting
Setback DHW setpoint bottom 0…20 K 5 K
When using an additional storage tank sensor at the bottom of a stratification storage tank, it can be ensured that the tank will be fully charged.
In the case of storage tanks with good stratification, consideration can also be given to the anticipated temperature differential by setting the DHW setpoint drop at the bottom
(TStTa SetptRed).
Storage tank charging is started when both temperatures (TStTaTop and TStTaBot)
drop
below their switch-on points (T on
).
For storage tank charging to end, both temperatures (TStTaTop and TStTaBot) must
exceed
their switch-off point (T
OFF
).
P
ON
SDDhw
ON
P
OFF
OFF
T
TStTaTop
TStTaSetpt
+
SDDhw
TStTaTop
T
TStTaBot
P
ON
ON
P
OFF
OFF
⇒
TStTaSetptNorm TStTaSetptRed
TStTaBot
Type of storage tank = stratification storage tank with 2 storage tank sensors
Storage tank temperature setpoint = 55 °C
Switching differential for storage tank charging = 5 K
Setpoint reduction at the bottom for storage tank charging = 3 K
Charging is started when the 2 following conditions are satisfied:
• Temperature at the top sensor = ≤50 °C and
• Temperature at the bottom sensor = ≤47 °C
Charging is ended when the 2 following conditions are satisfied:
• Temperature at the top sensor = >55 °C and
• Temperature at the bottom sensor = >52 °C
Charging would be ended with a stratification of 3 K and a storage tank outlet temperature of 55°C.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
157/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Storage tank temperature setpoint
Summary:
Starting forced charging
Ending forced charging
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line
Switching differential
Range
1…20 K
Factory setting
5 K
Setback DHW setpoint bottom 0…20 K 5 K
In operating modes “Normal “ and “Reduced ”, the storage tank temperature setpoint corresponds to the adjusted setpoint.
In Protection mode , the storage tank temperature shall not fall below the adjusted setpoint. For this reason, the storage tank temperature setpoint will be raised by the amount of the switching differential.
When the legionella program is active, it must be made certain that the storage tank will be charged up to the legionella protection setpoint. To ensure this, the storage tank temperature setpoint will be increased by the amount of the adjusted reduction of the
DHW setpoint at the bottom.
Operating state Assigned setpoint
Normal DHW setpoint = normal setpoint
Reduced
Protection
DHW setpoint = reduced setpoint
DHW setpoint = frost protection setpoint + switching differential
Legionella DHW setpoint = legionella protection setpoint + reduction of
DHW setpoint at the bottom
10.4.2 Forced
Normally, storage tank charging is started only when the storage tank temperature has fallen below the switch-on point (storage tank temperature setpoint minus switching differential). Forced charging can enforce charging even if this switch-on criterion is not satisfied.
If forced charging is activated and the storage tank temperature lies at least 1 K below the normal setpoint , forced charging will be started.
Charging will be ended via the storage tank temperature.
TStTaSetp
Norm
SDDhw
Red
ON
OFF
TStTaSetp
Norm
t
Without forced charging
SDDhw
Red
ON
OFF
SDDhw Switching differential DHW heating
Norm DHW operating mode “Normal”
Push DHW push, forced charging triggered
t
With forced charging
Red DHW operating mode “Reduced” t Time
TstTa Temperature at the storage tank sensor
158/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Forced charging
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line
Forced charging
Range
Never /
With 1st change to normal /
With every change to normal
Factory setting
Never
If the storage tank shall already be fully charged at the beginning of the day (to the normal setpoint ), the setting to be selected is With 1st change to normal.
This setting will initiate forced charging the first time the DHW time switch changes over to the normal setpoint .
Manual forced charging
Forced charging can also be triggered manually via a pushbutton. For that, a digital input is to be configured.
Extra configuration
Settings
Inputs > Forced charging Assign terminal
No settings are required when triggering forced charging via a pushbutton.
Aborting
Settings
10.4.3 Maximum
To prevent the heating circuits from being locked or limited by DHW priority for extended periods of time, the charging time can be limited.
If, on completion of the selected maximum charging time, charging is still active, storage tank charging will be aborted.
In that case, charging will be locked during the maximum charging time. On completion of the waiting time, charging control will again take place via the storage tank temperature.
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line Range Factory setting
Charging time max ---- / 5…250 min ----min
Charging time limitation is not active in the following cases:
• In Protection mode
• In summer operation
• When there is no DHW priority
• With shifting DHW priority, when the heat source supplies sufficient amounts of heat
• When using setting “----“
Forced charging will stop an active charging time limitation.
10.4.4 Maintained secondary circuit
T
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
The maintained secondary circuit protects the storage tank's stratification by supplying to the storage tank only water of higher temperatures (in accordance with the setpoint).
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
159/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Extra configuration
Settings
Maintained secondary circuit delta
Mixing valve function
In addition, the maintained secondary circuit serves as an additional discharge protection. But the “Discharge protection“ function remains active because the secondary pump is controlled based on the primary temperatures on the heating side.
The maintained secondary circuit can only be used in connection with DHW plant types
DHW 3 through DHW 5.
The maintained secondary circuit is activated via configuration of the mixing valve.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Outputs > Maintained sec temp 3-
pos > … or
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Outputs > Maintained sec temp
modulating Assign terminal
For adapting the control parameters to the type of plant (actuator and controlled system), the setting parameters to be used are the same as those used for mixing valve control. They apply to both 3-position and DC 0…10 V actuators.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller maint sec temp
Operating line
Actuator running time
P-band Xp
Integral action time Tn
Maintained sec circuit delta
Range
1…600 s
1…100 K
0…600 s
–20…20 K
The maintained secondary circuit controls to the following setpoint:
Factory setting
150 s
50 K
60 s
0 K
Setpoint maintained secondary circuit = DHW setpoint + maintained secondary circuit delta
On completion of storage tank charging, the secondary pump will be deactivated and the mixing valve will fully close. If the secondary sensor is faulty, the mixing valve for the maintained secondary circuit will be opened.
10.5 Direct DHW heating
DHW 6
Settings
160/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
DHW heating takes place directly via the heat exchanger. Since there is no storage tank so that charging control cannot be provided, control is permanently enabled.
The setpoint to be delivered by the heat source is made up of the current DHW setpoint plus the setpoint increase of the heat exchanger.
For specific adaptation of the control parameters to the type of plant (actuator and controlled system), additional setting parameters are available for direct DHW heating.
They apply to both 3-position and DC 0…10 V actuators.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line
Heat exchanger setp increase
Actuator running time opening
Range
0…50 K
1…600 s
Factory setting
10 K
15 s
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Operating line
Actuator running time closing
P-band Xp at min load
P-band Xp at max load
Integr action time Tn at min load
Integr act time Tn at max load
Deriv act time Tv at min load
Deriv act time Tv at max load
Range
1…600 s
1…200 K
1…200 K
0…600 s
0…600 s
0…255 s
0…255 s
Factory setting
15 s
100 K
33 K
30 s
6 s
8 s
2 s
10.5.1 Adapting the control parameters
Among other things, the characteristics of the controlled system are affected by the current DHW consumption and the connection conditions on the primary side.
Connection conditions
Example
Giving consideration to the load
Actuator running time
Note
Proportional band (Xp)
For the different types of plant, the connection conditions on the primary side can change depending on the time of year.
In the winter, the primary line operates at 6 bar and 120 °C, but in the summer only at
2 bar and 90 °C. This means:
In order to convey constant amounts of energy, the primary valve’s stroke in the summer must be different from that in the winter.
The controller acquires these changes and constantly adjusts the control action.
The velocity of flow on the secondary side has a great impact on the control characteristics. Since this shall not lead to any disadvantages for the user in the case of direct
DHW heating, additional setting choices have been made available. These are the following setting parameters:
• The P-band for the minimum load
• The integral action time for the minimum load
• The derivative action time for the minimum load
• The P-band for the maximum load
• The integral action time for the maximum load
• The derivative action time for the maximum load
This means that changing connection conditions need not be considered since the controller makes automatic readjustments.
For DHW control, the actuator running time must be set. When using asymmetric actuators, the actuator running times for opening and closing can be individually set. In the case of symmetric actuators, the actuator running times to be entered for opening and closing are the same.
It is important to also set the actuator running times when using DC 0…10 V actuators.
Only these settings ensure correct functioning of the control system.
The proportional band influences the controller’s proportional behavior.
With a setpoint / actual value deviation of 20 K, a setting of Xp = 20 produces a manipulated variable corresponding to the actuator’s running time.
Integral action time Tn
Derivative action time Tv
The integral action time influences the controller’s integral behavior.
The derivative action time influences the controllers D-behavior. If the integral action time is set to 0, the controller produces no PI behavior.
Setting rules for Xp, Tn and Tv
The plant’s behavior changes depending on the load. To ensure that the control system will produce satisfactory results both in the upper and lower load range, different values
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
161/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Tip
Checking the control function with maximum loads
Note on maximum load
Control action is too slow
can be set for both load ranges. For the medium load ranges, the values will be averaged in a continuous process.
When commissioning direct DHW heating for the first time, the default values of Xp, Tn and Tv should be used. To optimize and check the control parameters, it is recommended to follow the procedure detailed below under ”Checking the control function…”.
To check the control behavior with the preset control parameters, the following procedure is recommended:
1. With the controller shall maintain the setpoint for a certain period of time.
2. Then, increase or decrease the setpoint by 5…10 %. During this period of time, the controller ascertains the connection conditions and adjusts the PID controller. For this reason, it is important to start with the maximum load.
• Maximum load means the highest velocity of flow on the DHW side at the highest setpoint (usually, this is the legionella protection setpoint)
• Basically, stable control behavior is called for, which should rather be fast than slow, meaning that the DHW temperature should reach the new setpoint as quickly as possible
If the correcting action does not produce the required result, the control parameters should be readjusted as follows:
Setting parameters Xp, Tv and Tn must be decreased in steps while the load is at its maximum. A new readjustment should be made only after the correcting action resulting from the previous readjustment is completed.
TDhw
TDhwSetpt
Control action is too fast
1. Decrease Xp in steps of about 25 % of the previous value while the load is at its maximum.
2. Decrease Tv in steps of 1 to 2 seconds (when the value of 0 is reached, the controller operates as a PI controller).
If this is not sufficient:
3. Decrease Tn in steps of 10 to 20 seconds while the load is at its maximum.
t
If there is significant overshoot or even continuous oscillations, setting parameters Xp,
Tv and Tn must be increased in steps while the load is at its maximum. A new readjustment should be made only after the correcting action resulting from the previous readjustment is completed.
TDhw
TDhwSetpt
1. Decrease Xp in steps of about 25 % of the previous value while the load is at its
t
maximum.
162/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Checking the control function at minimum load
Notes on minimum load
2. Increase Tv in steps of 2 to 5 seconds while the load is at its maximum.
If this is not sufficient:
3. Increase Tn in steps of 10 to 20 seconds while the load is at its maximum.
To check the control, the start is made again with the preset control parameters, but this time under minimum load conditions.
• Minimum load means the lowest velocity of flow on the DHW side (e.g. circulation load) at the reduced setpoint
• For the control system, the load under frost protection conditions is only of minor importance; for this reason, the frost protection setpoint should not be selected
• Under these minimum load conditions, the controller should maintain the setpoint for a certain period of time. Then, increase or decrease the setpoint by 5…10 %
If the correcting action does not produce the desired result, control parameters Xp, Tv and Tn should be readjusted this time under minimum load conditions according to the above paragraphs “Control action is too slow” and “Control action is too fast”. When readjusting the parameters, “…while the load is at its maximum“ should be replaced here by “… when the load is at its minimum”.
10.5.2 Requirements for the plant
The correct location of the secondary flow sensor is very important! If no flow switch is used, it must be made certain that the flow sensor immerses into the heat exchanger.
If the flow sensor is not correctly sited, there is a risk of excessive heat exchanger
temperatures
.
Apart from certain hydraulic prerequisites, good control performance can only be achieved under the following conditions:
1. Use of a fast-acting actuator having a running time of ≤15 seconds
2. The time constant of the secondary flow temperature sensor as an immersion sensor should be about 2 seconds
3. The secondary flow temperature sensor should be located about 100 to 200 mm outside the heat exchanger (item 4. must be satisfied; otherwise, refer to items 1. and 2.)
4. Use of a flow switch
5. The circulation pipe joins the DHW supply line by the heat exchanger
10.5.3 Flow switch
When using a flow switch, the controller can detect start and end of DHW consumption at an early stage, enabling it to respond accordingly. This gives the controller a lead over control systems which only use a flow temperature sensor, also preventing excessive water temperatures.
Extra configuration
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Use of a flow switch proves particularly advantageous in the case of smaller plants, such as single-family homes, but improves plant performance in all other cases as well.
Fault status supervision is not possible since short-circuits and open-circuits are permitted states.
The flow switch is to be activated by assigning a terminal:
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
163/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setting
Mode of operation
Calculation of the minimum stroke
Example
Flow switch with circulating pump
Setting
Main menu >Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Inputs > Flow signal Assign terminal
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line
Min stroke with flow signal
Range
0…100 %
Factory setting
25 %
When DHW consumption starts, the flow switch will open the primary valve up to the set "Min stroke with flow signal“, independent of the flow temperature. The setting is to be made in % of the maximum stroke.
When DHW consumption is finished, the valve will close fully and immediately.
Normally, in summer operation, the valve opening required for 100 % load is about 80
%. This percentage is called the design point and must be included in the calculations.
The “Min stroke with flow signal” can be calculated as follows:
Minimum stroke with flow signal =
Heat exchanger volume secondary
∅ DHW consumption × opening time × design point
Example of calculating the load limit to be set for a heat exchanger with the following characteristics:
Water content on the secondary side = 1.0 liter
Average DHW consumption = 0.33 liters / second
Opening time of DHW actuator
Design point
= 15 seconds
= 80 % (0.8)
Minimum stroke with flow signal =
1.0
0.33 × 15 × 0.8
× 100 = 25 %
This value is used as a guide value and can vary depending on the plant’s hydraulic layout. It is recommended to start with the calculated minimum stroke and then proceed as follows:
• Decrease the value if the DHW flow temperature significantly overshoots after consumption
• Increase the value if the DHW flow temperature significantly undershoots
The impact of flow switch and PID controller is matched in a way that the actuator travels to the new position as quickly as possible. After the flow switch has responded, the control system will resume control of the actuator on the primary side.
The end of DHW consumption is also detected by the flow switch, and actuator Y1 on the primary side will be driven to the fully closed position.
In contrast to plant types with storage tank, the circulation losses cannot be compensated here via the storage tank, but must be continuously drawn from the heating network.
When the flow switch indicates the end of DHW consumption, the primary valve will not be fully closed for this reason. If the valve’s position exceeds the set ”Min stroke with flow signal”, it will start to close until the minimum stroke is reached. From this position, valve control is started. For this reason, the controller must be aware of externally operated circulating pumps:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line
External circulating pump
Range
Yes / No
Factory setting
No
The assumption is made that the external circulating pump operates 24 hours a day.
164/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Note
Notes
Thermal disinfection
Piping network
Circulating pump
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Further setting choices for the circulating pump are described in subsection 10.11.3
The cold water must join the DHW from the circulation pipe right by the heat exchanger.
If, for plant reasons, this is not possible, the “Min stroke with flow signal” must be set to
0 %.
10.5.4 Maximum
The maximum charging time is also active with direct DHW heating. Subsection 10.4.3
“Maximum charging time” contains additional details on this function.
The controller is supplied with the function deactivated.
10.5.5 Legionella
During the time the legionella program is active, the circulating pump must operate.
For direct DHW heating, the information given in the following section “Legionella protection”.
If no circulating pump is used, it is recommended to deactivate the legionella function.
In that case, the legionella protection frequency must be set to “Never“.
10.6 Legionella
The “Legionella protection” function can be an important measure aimed at preventing the growth of legionella viruses.
However, the legionella program is no guarantee for preventing the growth of legionella viruses because these might occur in plant sections that the function cannot reach.
10.6.1 General
Legionella viruses develop significant growth in the temperature range of 35…45 °C. At temperatures above 50 °C, they stop growing.
Legionella viruses are killed at temperatures above about 55 °C; the higher the temperature, the shorter the time required to kill them.
There are different opinions regarding the effectiveness of thermal disinfection.
Control measures, such as the legionella function, are only effective in connection with other measures (primarily building construction measures, but also chemical disinfection and UV radiation).
The legionella function ensures thermal disinfection of the storage tank. It is important here that the entire DHW storage tank will be brought to the required temperature. This poses problems in connection with certain types of storage tanks (with electric immersion heater or coiled heat exchanger) where cold water accumulates beneath the heat exchanger. These problems can only be solved by taking adequate measures.
In addition to the legionella function, it should be made certain that the DHW setpoint and the switching differential are adjusted such that the switch-on point will not be too low (e.g. 55 °C).
It is also important to thermally disinfect not only the storage tank but also the entire piping network. It must be made certain that there are no dead pipes or piping that has not been used for longer periods of time.
If possible, the circulating pump should run during the legionella program.
Ideally, during the legionella program, the taps are in use.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
165/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Practical problems in connection with legionella protection
The legionella protection function contradicts with requirements in terms of energy savings, the formation of scale (the higher the storage tank temperature, the more scale) and protection against scalding (above 60 °C).
Attention must be drawn to the risk of scalding when opening taps on completion of the legionella function.
Starting the legionella program
Ending the legionella program
10.6.2 Sequence of legionella function
Using the legionella program, the DHW storage tank and, optionally, the circulation piping
(with the help of the circulating pump) can be maintained at the legionella protection setpoint for the required period of time.
Legionella protection is also available with direct DHW heating, but a holiday time (period of time legionella protection is provided) is possible only when the circulating pump runs.
The legionella program can be enabled either daily or weekly at a selectable point in time.
As with forced charging, storage tank charging is started as soon as the storage tank temperature (or one of the 2) lies 1 K below the legionella protection setpoint.
The legionella program will not be performed in the following cases:
• When the DHW operation selector is set to Protection mode
• During holiday mode when the selected DHW holiday mode is Protection
• When the DHW operating mode contact forces DHW heating to Protection mode
• When the plant operation selector is set to “Off“
• When storage tank charging is effected with an electric immersion heater, but without storage tank sensor
If, during the period of time the legionella protection program is performed, the storage tank temperature (or both storage tank temperatures) can be kept at the required setpoint, the legionella function will be ended.
If, in addition, consumer control with a circulating pump has been configured, the consumer’s flow temperature sensor is also required to acquire the legionella protection setpoint for the legionella protection period. If the circulating pump is switched off during the time the legionella function is active, consumer control will be exempted from legionella protection.
The legionella function is ended only when, during the time of legionella protection, all temperatures have been at their legionella protection setpoint, or above it.
TiLegioHld TiLegioHld
TDhw
TDhwSetpt
166/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
TDhwSetpt - SDDhw
TDhwSetpt - SDDhw - 2 K
1
2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
3
SDDhw t
Switching differential DHW heating
Time
TDhw DHW temperature
TDhwSetpt DHW temperature setpoint
TiLegioHld Holding time of legionella function (period of time legionella protection is provided) c
Circulating pump d e
Enabling the legionella function
Start conditions for legionella function satisfied
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
t
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Supervision
Setpoints
Legionella protection setpoint
Legionella setpoint with consumer control
Various settings
Legionella protection frequency
During the time the legionella program is active, the circulating pump continues to operate as preselected.
The circulating pump can be specifically activated to become included in the legionella function. For that purpose, parameter “Circulating pump operation legio“ is used. If this parameter is set to “On“, the circulating pump will operate according to characteristic
1
in the graph above. Exception is direct DHW heating (plant type DHW 6). With this type of plant, the circulating pump always runs, independent of the flow temperature.
If the circulating pump operates due to the preselection made, it will continue to run during the time the legionella program is performed, independent of the DHW temperature.
During the time the legionella program is active, function “Charging time limitation“ will also be active.
The legionella function is monitored to see if it can be successfully completed within 48 hours. Successful means that the legionella protection setpoint (minus switching differential) could be maintained without interruption, also at the optional sensors (storage tank sensor at the bottom, consumer’s flow temperature sensor).
If the legionella protection setpoint cannot be maintained, or not for the required period of time, a fault status message will be delivered:
Number Text Effect
2101 Legionella protection error
Message must be acknowledged.
Error disappears only when the legionella program has been successfully completed
In the case of a legionella protection error, the legionella program will be aborted and restarted only when, according to the program, the legionella function will be enabled the next time.
The following settings have an impact on the legionella function:
The value set is the setpoint for disinfection that shall be maintained during the time the legionella function is active.
Main menu > DHW > Setpoints
Operating line
Legionella setpoint
Range
55…140 °C
Factory setting
70 °C
The legionella setpoint for consumer control lies below the legionella setpoint for DHW heating, the difference being the legionella setpoint reduction.
Main menu > DHW > Setpoints consumers
Operating line
Legionella setpoint reduction
Range
0…20 K
Factory setting
2 K
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Legionella function
Operating line
Legionella protection frequency
Range
Never / Daily /
Monday…Sunday
Factory setting
Monday
Legionella protection time
Legionella protection period
Circulating pump operation legio
00:00…23:59
00.00…06:00 h.min
Off / On
05:00
00.30 h.min
On
This defines if and how often the function shall be activated. In the case of a weekly interval, the required weekday can be selected.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
167/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Legionella protection time
Legionella protection period
Legionella protection and circulating pump
This defines the time of day the legionella function shall be started.
It is defined here for what period of time the DHW temperature shall be maintained at the legionella protection setpoint.
Using setting “On“ on operating line Circulating pump operation legio, the circulating pump will be activated according to the following rule, independent of the pump’s time program:
In the case of DHW plant types with storage tanks, the circulating pump starts to run as soon as the storage tank temperature has reached the level of “Legionella protection setpoint minus switching differential”. With direct DHW heating, the circulating pump always runs when the legionella function is active.
If the circulating pump operates due to its time program, this setting will have no impact. This means that the setting will activate a stopped pump, but will not deactivate a running pump.
Extra configuration
Settings
10.6.3 Legionella function relay
The state of the legionella function can be delivered via a configurable output for further handling.
The output changes to “On“ as soon as the legionella function is started and remains on until the function is ended.
The output is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Outputs > Legionella function
relay Assign terminal
There are no settings required.
Plant types
DHW 1 and DHW 5
DHW 2, DHW 3 and
DHW 4
DHW 6
Primary control
Setpoint
3-position or
DC 0…10 V actuator
10.7 Primary
With plant types DHW 1 and DHW 5, the charging temperature is not controlled. But it can be indirectly influenced by appropriate selection of DHW priority or by the temperature request.
Charging is effected through control of the secondary pump or primary pump based on the storage tank temperature.
The other plant types are also controlled via the storage tank temperature but, in addition, the secondary temperature or the primary flow temperature will be controlled.
With plant type DHW 6, primary control is always enabled while the secondary flow temperature is controlled.
With plant types DHW 2 and DHW 4, control is accomplished via a mixing valve, with plant types DHW 3 and DHW 6 via a 2-port valve.
The setpoint for primary control is dependent on the operating mode and, according to plant type, on the respective setpoint increase.
Control can be effected with a 3-position or DC 0…10 V actuator. The type of actuator is to be selected via “Extra configuration”.
The following settings apply to both the 3-position and the DC 0…10 V actuator.
168/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Setpoint increase DHW charging
Setpoint increase mixing valve
Setpoint increase heat exchanger
Setpoint increase storage tank
Control setpoint
Primary flow sensor
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line Range
Actuator running time
P-band Xp
Integral action time Tn
1…600 s
1…100 K
0…600 s
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
Factory setting
150 s
50 K
60 s
10.7.1 Primary temperature setpoint
To be able to bring the DHW storage tank to the required setpoint or, in the case of direct DHW heating, to the required continuous flow temperature, heat generation and transmission and, sometimes, primary control, require a setpoint increase.
The following setpoint increase can be set on the service level depending on the selected plant type.
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line
Setp increase DHW charging
Setp increase mixing valve
Setp increase heat exchanger
Range
0…50 K
0…50 K
0…50 K
Factory setting
10 K
10 K
10 K
Setpoint increase storage tank 0…50 K 2 K
The setpoint increase for DHW charging must be set with plant types using a coiled type storage tank (DHW 1 and DHW 2).
The setpoint increase for the mixing valve is to be set with plant types using primary mixing valves (DHW 2 and DHW 4).
The setpoint increase for the heat exchanger is to be set with plant types using a stratification storage tank (DHW 3, DHW 4, and DHW 5), or with direct DHW heating
(DHW 6).
The setpoint increase for the storage tank is to be set with plant types using a stratification storage tank and primary control (DHW 3 and DHW 4). This increase acts on the setpoint of primary control, but not on the request to heat generation.
The setpoint of primary control is thus generated from the required storage tank temperature setpoint plus a plant type-dependent setpoint increase.
If, with plant type DHW 4, a primary flow sensor is configured, control will be effected according to that sensor. In that case, the heat exchanger’s setpoint increase must also be considered for the control setpoint.
The following table shows the generation of the control setpoint:
Plant type
DHW 2
Control via the …
Primary flow temperature
Storage tank temperature setpoint
+ setpoint increase DHW charging
Secondary flow temperature
DHW 3 Storage tank temperature setpoint + setpoint increase storage tank
DHW 4 Storage tank temperature setpoint
+ setpoint increase
Heat exchanger setp increase*
Storage tank temperature setpoint + setpoint increase storage tank
DHW 6 DHW temperature setpoint
* Optional sensor:
The primary flow temperature setpoint will automatically be lowered when the secondary flow temperature exceeds the secondary flow temperature setpoint by more than 1 K
169/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Display of setpoints
Load reduction
Settings
Load increase
Flow temperature
The effective setpoint appears on the Main menu and on the info page.
Main menu > DHW > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Storage tank temp setpoint
Flow temp sec setpoint
Primary flow temp setpoint
Adjustable values / display / remarks
0…140 °C
0…140 °C
0…140 °C
10.7.2 Load
DHW charging can be influenced by load control signals from a heat source or primary controller.
Load reduction can be triggered by one of the following functions:
• Protective boiler startup
• Minimum limitation of the boiler return temperature
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line
Locking signal gain
Range
0…200 %
Factory setting
100 %
From the consumer’s point of view, a load increase can be effected in the form of pump and / or mixing valve overrun. This will force the consumer to continue to draw heat.
Overrun is not possible with direct DHW heating since there is no pump on the secondary side. Overrun does not act on the circulating pump.
By setting the DHW priority, a load reduction on the heating circuits can be enforced.
When the priority is active, there is thus more heat available for DHW heating, and the charging time becomes shorter.
For more detailed information, refer to section 10.10 “DHW priority“.
10.8 Limitation and protective functions
10.8.1 DHW
The flow temperature is monitored to prevent the storage tank from being discharged.
Discharging protection can become active during storage tank charging or during overrun and deactivate the charging pump or primary pump.
⇒
To ensure that the function will also be performed when the charging pump is deactivated (with no flow past the sensor), the flow temperature of the primary controller or that of the boiler is used.
If a primary controller is used without a pump, it is possible that there will be no flow past the flow temperature sensor. For this reason, discharging protection can be deactivated.
In the case of plants with heat exchanger, the primary flow temperature is used, if available.
The flow temperature must be acquired either locally by the same controller or by some other device which communicates via bus.
For detailed information, refer to chapter 14 “Communication”.
170/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Storage tank charging active
Overrun active
Maximum limitation of the return temperature
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line
Discharge protection
Range
Yes / No
Factory setting
Yes
During storage tank charging, discharging protection switches the respective charging pump off if:
DHW plant type
DHW 1
DHW 2
Condition for switching off
Flow temperature < [storage tank temperature* + 1/8 setpoint increase of DHW charging]
Discharging protection with
Primary pump
DHW 3
DHW 4
DHW 5
Primary flow temperature < [storage tank temperature** + 1/
8 setpoint increase of heat ex-
Secondary pump changer]
During overrun, discharging protection switches the primary pump off if:
DHW plant type Condition for switching off
DHW 1
DHW 2
Flow temperature < storage tank temperature**
DHW 4
DHW 5
During overrun, discharging protection switches the secondary pump off if:
DHW plant type
DHW 3
DHW 4
DHW 5
Condition for switching off
Flow temperature < storage tank temperature**
Flow temperature < storage tank temperature**
* If 2 storage tank sensors are used, the lower value will be considered
** If 2 storage tank sensors are used, the higher value will be considered
10.8.2 Limitation
With DHW plant types using a primary mixing valve, return temperature limitation can be configured. This applies to plant types DHW 2, DHW 3, DHW 4 and DHW 6.
DHW 2 DHW 3, DHW 4
TFlSec
DHW 6
TFlSec
TFlPr
PrPu
TRt
Sec
Pu
FlSwi
TRt
VlvPr
TRt
VlvPr
VlvPr
FlSwi Flow switch (optional)
PrPu Primary pump
SecPu Secondary pump
TFlPr Primary flow sensor
TFlSec Secondary flow sensor
TRt Return sensor
VlvPr Primary mixing valve
If the return temperature exceeds the limit value, the flow temperature setpoint of the
DHW circuit will be lowered. If the return temperature drops below the limit value, the reduction of the flow temperature setpoint will be negated again. Limitation operates as an I-controller whose integral action time can be adjusted.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
171/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Extra configuration
Settings
Return temperature limitation during DHW heating
Return temperature limitation during the time the legionella function is active
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line
[Tn] return temp limitation max
Range
0…60 min
Factory setting
30 min
The return temperature sensor must be assigned a terminal via “Extra configuration”:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Inputs > Return sensor Assign terminal
The function is to be activated via “Settings“:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Limitations
Operating line
DHW return temp max
Legionella return temp max
Range
---- / 0…140 °C
----/ 0…140 °C
Factory setting
---- °C
---- °C
This limitation is active provided a valid value has been set and the legionella function is active. The limitation can be overridden by return temperature limitation in connection with the legionella function.
Maximum limitation with DHW heating is constant, that is, independent of the outside temperature.
Maximum limitation of the return temperature during DHW heating will be deactivated.
Maximum limitation of the return temperature is constant during the time the legionella function is active, that is, independent of the outside temperature. This limitation too will be activated only when a valid value has been set. If the value is invalid (“---“), there will be no limitation during the time the legionella function is active.
Frost protection for the storage tank
⇒
10.8.3 Frost protection functions
Frost protection for the DHW storage tank is ensured in all operating modes and is activated as soon as one of the 2 storage tank sensors acquires a temperature below
5 °C.
A temperature request will then be sent to the heat source, and the storage tank heated up until both storage tank temperatures have reached 5 °C (plus the adjusted switching differential) thereby exceeding 6 °C, independent of the operating mode.
Frost protection for the storage tank is started when the plant operation selector is set to “Off“ and / or in summer operation the storage tank is charged via the electric immersion heater.
Frost protection for the flow
With plant types DHW 2 through DHW 5, the flow temperature is monitored also.
If it falls below 5 °C, the primary pump will be activated with plant type DHW 2, and the secondary pump with all the other plant types. When the temperature exceeds 6 °C, the pump will be switched off again.
During the time frost protection for the flow is active, no heat request is sent to the heat source.
10.8.4 Pulse limitation
DHW heating can handle pulses for limiting the output or the volumetric flow. Prerequisite for pulse limitation is a DHW plant type with mixing valve, that is, DHW 2, DHW 3,
DHW 4, or DHW 6.
172/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Meter inputs
Settings
Meter input
Type of limitation
Limit value
Integral action time (Tn)
The pulses are delivered via the meter inputs of function block “Meter”. For more
detailed information about this function block, refer to chapter 11 “Function block meter”.
After one or several meter inputs have been configured, pulse limitation can be set up.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Limitations > Pulse limitation
Operating line
Meter input
Type of limitation
Limit value
Integral action time Tn
Range
--- / 1…4
Absolute / Scaled
5…4000 pulses/min
0…255 min
Factory setting
---
Absolute
75 pulses/min
60 min
The meter input is an input of function block “Meter” and used for the limitation of pulses. Only inputs configured to a terminal can be selected for pulse limitation.
2 limitation choices are available:
• Absolute: Limitation will be activated when the limit value is crossed
• Scaled: The limit value is fixed at 75 pulses/min. The limit value can be set, but this has no effect. If less than 5 pulses/min are received, fault status message No signal
meter 1 (or …2) will be delivered. Heat meters with a scaled output deliver
120 pulses/min if there is no supply of heat or no volumetric flow. Together with pulse limitation, this prevents hydraulic creep.
From the limit value, pulse limitation starts throttling the actuating device (mixing valve).
The setting is only active when the limitation is absolute. In the case of scaled limitation, the limit value can be set, but the function works with 75 pulses/min (fixed value).
The setting value determines the rate at which the flow temperature setpoint will be lowered:
• Short integral action times lead to a faster reduction
• Long integral action times lead to a slower reduction
Consumer overrun
Direct DHW heating
Primary pump and secondary pump
10.8.5 Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun
To protect the boiler against overtemperatures on burner shutdown because there may be no more consumers drawing heat, a consumer overrun time can be set on the boiler controller.
When the burner has shut down, overrun ensures that the heating circuits and DHW heating will still draw a certain amount of heat during that period of time, provided they were consuming heat up to one minute before shutdown occurred. In any case, pumps and mixing valves have an overrun time of 60 seconds.
For more detailed information, refer to section 5.4 “Pump overrun and mixing valve overrun”.
In the case of direct DHW heating, overrun is not possible since there is no pump on the secondary side. Overrun does not act on the circulating pump.
Overrun applies to both the primary and the secondary pump.
To carry the residual heat away from the heat exchanger, plant types DHW 4 and DHW
5 (with heat exchanger and primary pump) offer a setting for an additional overrun time of the secondary pump:
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
173/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Settings
Settings
174/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line
Overrun time secondary pump
Range
0…60 min
Factory setting
1 min
10.8.6 Pump kick and valve kick
Pump kick and valve kick are protective functions that are performed at a certain interval.
They prevent pumps and / or actuators from seizing after longer off periods.
10.9 Heat
DHW heating sends its heat demand as a temperature request to the heat source.
The temperature request for the current heat demand of DHW heating is dependent on the plant type and calculated as follows:
Plant type
Temperature request
DHW 0
DHW 1
DHW heating works autonomously, that is, independent of heat generation. No temperature request will be delivered
Storage tank temperature setpoint + setpoint increase DHW charging
DHW 2
DHW 3
Storage tank temperature setpoint + setpoint increase heat exchanger
+ setpoint increase mixing valve
Storage tank temperature setpoint + setpoint increase heat exchanger
DHW 4
DHW 5
Storage tank temperature setpoint + setpoint increase heat exchanger
+ setpoint increase mixing valve
Storage tank temperature setpoint + setpoint increase heat exchanger
DHW 6
DHW temperature setpoint + setpoint increase heat exchanger
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line Range Factory setting
Setp increase DHW charging
Setp increase mixing valve
0…50 K
0…50 K
10 K
10 K
Setp increase heat exchanger 0…50 K 10 K
Setpoint increase storage tank acts on the control, but not on the temperature request.
The amount of heat required for DHW heating can have a considerable impact on the temperature request to the heat source. Here, the selected DHW priority is of great
importance. For more detailed information, refer to the following section “DHW priority”
and to chapter 14 "Communication".
10.10 DHW priority
Using DHW priority, preference can be given to DHW heating by reducing the output of the heating circuits. The output reduction can be either shifting or absolute.
In addition, the heat request to the heat source can be restricted to the DHW user request.
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line
Priority
Range
None [DHW request] /
Shifting [DHW request] /
Absolute [DHW request] /
None [max selection] /
Shifting [max selection]
Factory setting
Shifting [DHW request]
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
No priority
Shifting priority
Absolute priority
No priority / maximum selection
Shifting priority / maximum selection
Note
During DHW heating, there is no restriction for the heating circuits with regard to heat consumption.
But the heat source provides maximum limitation of the temperature for DHW heating.
If the heat source does not reach the required flow temperature setpoint, the amount of heat drawn by the heating circuits will be restricted by a load reduction. Apart from that, the heating circuits can draw heat without any restriction.
The heat source provides maximum limitation of the temperature for DHW heating.
During DHW heating, the heating circuits are not allowed to draw any heat.
The heat source delivers the temperature to satisfy the heat demand for DHW heating.
With regard to heat consumption during DHW heating, there are no restrictions for the heating circuits.
The heat source delivers the temperature according to maximum selection of DHW heat demand and heat demand from other consumers.
If the heat source does not reach the required flow temperature setpoint, the amount of heat drawn by the heating circuits will be restricted via load reduction. Apart from that, the heating circuits can draw heat without any restriction.
The heat source delivers the temperature according to maximum selection of DHW heat demand and heat demand from other consumers.
The priority function only acts on the heating circuits, not on ventilation systems.
10.11 Auxiliary functions
Extra configuration
Settings
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
10.11.1 Text designation for DHW and time switches
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW
Operating line Range Factory setting
DHW
DHW time switch
Circ pump time switch
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
DHW
DHW time switch
Circ pump time switch
The text entered here appears on the Main menu and on the info display in place of the original text.
10.11.2 Primary flow temperature sensor
With plant types DHW 4 and DHW 5, a primary flow temperature sensor can be configured as an option.
In that case, mixing valve control with plant type DHW 4 is accomplished via the primary flow temperature.
If the primary flow temperature sensor is configured, its temperature will be used during active DHW charging to ensure discharging protection.
The function is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Inputs > Primary flow
sensor Assign terminal
There are no settings required.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
175/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Extra configuration
Settings
Operation of circulating pump
Time switch for the circulating pump
Interval operation of circulating pump
External circulating pump
Operation of circulating pump when legionella function is activated
10.11.3 Circulating pump
A circulating pump can be configured for DHW circulation.
The output is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > DHW > Outputs… > Circulating
pump Assign terminal
Control can take place via a specific time program or depending on user requirements
(DHW time switch). Using setting Acc to DHW time switch, the circulating pump will run during operating mode “Normal “.
By activating the circulating pump for the period of time the legionella function is performed, the circulation pipe can also be protected against legionella viruses
For detailed information, refer to subsection 10.6.2 “Sequence of legionella function”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line
Operation circulating pump
Circulating pump time switch
Range
Time switch / On
Acc to circ pump time switch / Acc to DHW time switch
Yes / No
Yes / No
Factory setting
Time switch
Acc to circ pump time switch
Interval operation circ pump
External circulating pump
Yes
No
The circulating pump can be operated according to the time switch or, using this setting, can be made to run constantly (24-hour operation). This setting will be overridden when preselecting “Off" with the DHW operating mode, which means that the circulating pump will also be deactivated.
The circulating pump can be operated according to its time switch or the DHW time switch. This setting will be active only if “Operation circulating pump" is set to “Time switch".
In interval operation, the circulating pump runs for 10 minutes at 30-minute intervals
(every full and every half hour), resulting in off times of 20 minutes. The pump runs only when enabled according to the time switch or parameterization. When enabling is started, the pump always runs for 10 minutes, independent of the time of day. But this does not apply when turning on power or when leaving commissioning.
Some of the functions require a circulating pump, such as the legionella function in connection with consumer control or direct DHW heating. If a circulating pump is in operation that is independent of the controller, this can be communicated to the controller by making use of this setting.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Legionella function
Operating line Range Factory setting
Circulating pump operation legio Time switch / On On
To include the circulating pump in the legionella function, this setting can be used to activate the pump for the period of time the legionella function is performed. When using setting Time switch, the legionella function has no influence on the circulating pump.
176/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant types
10.11.4 Electric immersion heater
With the exception of DHW plant type DHW 0, which uses exclusively an electric immersion heater, all DHW plant types with storage tank can be switched to electric immersion heater during summer operation. Operation with an electric immersion heater is identical to space heating mode with the same DHW operating modes, setpoints, legionella function, etc.
Only DHW plant type DHW 0 can operate without a storage tank sensor. In that case, only the electric immersion heater will be enabled.
Changeover to summer operation
⇒
Changeover to summer operation takes place depending on the heating circuits’ heat demand. If the heating circuits do not call for heat for a period of 48 hours, changeover to summer operation will take place at midnight. The electric immersion heater receives the release signal and storage tank charging with hot water will be switched off.
Frost protection for the storage tank will still be ensured (also refer to subsection 10.8.3
“Frost protection functions”).
As soon as one of the heating circuits calls for heat, there will be a change to winter operation with hot water.
Changeover in the event the heat source fails
If the heat source reports a fault (e.g. due to a malfunction or user intervention), the electric immersion heater will be enabled and storage tank charging with hot water switched off. For this function to be performed, heat source and DHW heating must be included in a system network. For more detailed information about function block
"Meter“, refer to chapter 14 “Communication“.
Extra configuration The output is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Outputs > Electric immersion
heater Assign terminal
Settings
Changeover to electric immersion heater
Operation with electric immersion heater
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW
Operating line
Changeover el immersion heater
Operation el immersion heater
Range
Yes / No
Normal setpoint /
Automatically
Factory setting
No
Automatically
Using this setting, changeover to the electric immersion heater can be deactivated. In that case, the storage tank is charged with hot water throughout the year.
When using the electric immersion heater, it can be selected whether the storage tank setpoint shall be predefined by the time switch or whether it shall apply permanently.
This setting is active only during operation with the electric immersion heater and when a storage tank sensor is available
10.11.5 System pump
The boiler pump (system pump) for DHW heating must be activated depending on the type of hydraulic circuit.
The required function can be selected on the service level:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller primary circuit
Operating line
System pump required
Range
Yes / No
Factory setting
Yes
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
177/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Example
Extra configuration
Settings
Operating mode
A
B
A The boiler pump is located at A and required as a system pump for DHW heating.
Input: System pump required = Yes
B
The boiler pump is located at B and is not required for DHW heating.
Input: System pump required = No
10.11.6 Consumer control
Any DHW plant type can be equipped with consumer control.
This function offers the choice of combining high storage tank setpoints with a reduced risk of scalding by using lower consumer setpoints, for example. This can help to make optimum use of a given storage tank volume.
In that case, consideration must be given to the fact that higher water temperatures lead to the formation of more scale in the plant.
CiPu
Consumer control always consists of mixing valve and consumer flow temperature sensor.
The circulating pump is an optional plant component, but recommended.
When there is no flow of water, the mixing valve can fully open, which can lead to high outlet temperatures once the flow starts again.
Consumer control is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
… > DHW… > Inputs > Flow sensor consumers Assign terminal
… > DHW… > Outputs > Consumer mixing valve 3-pos Assign terminal
… > DHW… > Outputs > Consumer mixing valve mod Assign terminal
To be able to match the control parameters to the type of plant (actuator and controlled system), the parameters of the PID controller can be set. They apply to both 3-position and DC 0…10 V actuators.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Controller consumers
Operating line
Actuator run time
P-band Xp
Integral action time Tn
Range
1…600 s
1…100 K
0…600 s
Factory setting
35 s
50 K
60 s
Derivative action time Tv 0…30 s 0 s
The operating mode is only dependent on the time switch of the circulating pump, whereby operating mode “Normal“ applies during “On”, and operating mode “Reduced“ during “Off”.
The operating mode of consumer control indicates the setpoint at which the consumer temperature is maintained.
178/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setpoints
Legionella protection
Note
Consumer control only uses the 2 setpoints “Normal“ and “Reduced“.
On the service level, it is also possible to set a setpoint reduction against the general legionella setpoint. The legionella setpoint of consumer control is calculated as follows:
Legionella setpoint – Legionella setpoint reduction
Main menu > DHW > Setpoints consumers > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > Setpoints consumers
Operating line
Legionella setpoint reduction
Range
0…20 K
Factory setting
2 K
Normal setpoint
Reduced setpoint
5…140 °C
5…140 °C
55 °C
40 °C
Legionella protection of consumer control requires the circulating pump to be running.
This can be a pump controlled by the controller or an external pump. In the case of an external pump, the following setting is required:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > DHW > DHW > External circulating pump
The setting to be made is “Yes“.
The user must ensure that the external pump is in operation during the time the legionella function is performed.
For legionella protection, the general settings of the legionella function apply. For
detailed information, refer to section 10.6 “Legionella protection”.
The setpoints selected here do not act on the storage tank setpoints or on the setpoints of direct DHW heating. The user must ensure that sufficient amounts of heat are available.
Configuration errors
Faulty storage tank sensor
10.12 Fault handling
Number Text Effect
5601 DHW plant type undefined
Urgent message; must not be acknowledged
This fault status message appears when the plant’s configuration is incomplete so that the controller is not able to make an assignment to a DHW plant type.
Effect Number Text
71 DHW stor tank sensor top error
72 DHW stor tank sensor bott error
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
In the event one of the storage tank sensors is faulty, storage tank charging is controlled according to the second storage tank temperature (if available).
If there is no second storage tank temperature, charging will be aborted, the pump(s) switched off and the mixing valve (if present) driven to the fully closed position.
Faulty primary flow sensor
Number Text Effect
74
DHW flow sensor primary error
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
If the sensor is required for control (plant types DHW 2 and DHW 4) and no secondary flow temperature is available (plant type DHW 4), the mixing valve will fully close.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
179/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Faulty secondary flow sensor
Number Text Effect
75
DHW flow sensor sec error Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
If the sensor is required for control (plant types DHW 3, DHW 4, and DHW 6) and no primary flow temperature is available (plant type DHW 4), the mixing valve will fully close.
Faulty consumer flow sensor
Number Text
76
DHW flow sensor cons error
Effect
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
The consumer’s mixing valve will fully open and no legionella function will be performed in consumer control.
Faulty return sensor
Legionella temperature not reached
Number Text
77
Faulty DHW return sensor
Effect
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Return temperature limitation is no longer possible.
Number Text Effect
2101
Legionella protection error
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
This error occurs when the legionella function has not been able to reach the legionella setpoint for 48 hours. The legionella function will be aborted and restarted only the next time the legionella program is enabled.
Faulty DHW primary pump
Faulty DHW secondary pump
Number Text
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
[DHW primary pump] overload
[DHW primary pump B] overload
Effect
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“
[DHW prim pump] no flow Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset
[DHW prim pump B] no flow
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset
[DHW primary pump] fault Urgent message; must not be acknowledged. Plant stop DHW
Number Text
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
[DHW sec pump] overload
Effect
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“
[DHW sec pump B] overload
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“
Nonurgent message; must be acknowl[DHW sec pump] no flow edged and reset
[DHW sec pump B] no flow Nonurgent message; must be acknowl-
[DHW sec pump] fault edged and reset
Urgent message; must not be acknowledged. Plant stop DHW
180/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Faulty circulating pump
Inputs / setpoints
Outputs
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Number Text
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
[DHW circ pump] overload
[DHW circ pump B] overload
Effect
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“
Nonurgent message.
Acknowledgement can be selected; factory setting: “Acknowledge and reset“
[DHW circ pump] no flow
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset
[DHW circ pump B] no flow
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged and reset
[DHW circ pump] fault Urgent message; must not be acknowledged. Plant stop DHW
10.13 Diagnostic values
Main menu > DHW > Inputs/setpoints
Operating line
Act value prim FT
Event logger 1
[DHW primary pump] overload
[DHW primary pump B] overload
Primary pump flow signal
Flow temp sec actual value
Flow temp sec setpoint
Flow signal
[DHW sec pump] overload
DHW plant type
Secondary pump flow signal
Act value strge tank temp top
Act value strge tank temp bott
Storage tank temp setpoint
Actual value return temp
Return temperature max
Forced charging
Flow temp cons actual value
Flow temp cons setpoint
[DHW circ pump] overload
[DHW circ pump B] overload
Circulating pump flow signal
DHW optg mode
Special day input
Holiday input
Main menu > DHW > Outputs
Adjustable values / display / remarks
…°C
…°C
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = flow)
…°C
…°C
…°C
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = flow)
…°C
…°C
…°C
…°C
…°C
0 / 1 (1 = forced charging input)
…°C
…°C
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = overload)
0 / 1 (1 = flow)
0 / 1 (1 = external selection of operating mode)
0 / 1 (1 = Special day input active)
0 / 1 (1 = Holiday input active)
Operating line
Mixing valve position primary
Primary pump B
Mix valve pos maint sec temp
Secondary pump
Secondary pump B
Adjustable values / display / remarks
0…100 % (3-position and modulating)
Off / On
Off / On
0…100 % (3-position and modulating)
Off / On
Off / On
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
181/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Limitations
Operating line
Electric immersion heater
Mix valve pos consumers
Circulating pump
Circulating pump B
Legionella function relays
Main menu > DHW > Limitations
Operating line
Charging time max
Discharge protection
Interval operation circ pump
Return temperature max
Pulse limitation
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Off / On
0…100 % (3-position and modulating)
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Inactive / Active
Inactive / Active
Inactive / Active
Inactive / Active
Inactive / Active
182/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
10 DHW heating
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
11 Function block meter
11.1 Overview of function block
i i i i
Extra configuration
Settings
Displays
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Counter
i 1
Meter input 1 i 2
Meter input 2 i 3
Meter input 3 i 4
Meter input 4
11.2 Configuration
The meters are to be activated via “Extra configuration” by assigning a terminal to the meter input.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Data acquisition > Meter 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Operating line
Input 1 (etc., through Input 4)
Displayed unit
Range
--- / RMH760.X3, etc.
Wh / kWh / MWh / kJ / MJ / GJ / ml / l / m3 /
Heat cost unit /
No unit / BTU
0 / 0.0 / 0.00 / 0.000 Displayed format
The unit shown can be selected via datapoint Displayed unit.
Datapoint Displayed format defines the number of decimal places.
Factory setting
--- kWh
0
11.3 Types of meters
The meters are used to acquire consumption values.
Pulses from the following types of meters can be handled:
• Gas meters
• Hot water meters
• Cold water meters
• Electricity meters
The pulse values represent:
• Energy in kJ, MJ, GJ, Wh, kWh and MWh
• Volume in m 3
, l
or
ml
• Variables with no unit (max. 3 decimal places)
• Heat cost unit
• BTU (British Thermal Unit)
The pulses are converted to consumption values according to the setting values and then added; the cumulated values are stored as 15-month values at midnight when the month changes. The monthly values of the last 15 months will be stored.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
11 Function block meter
183/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Types of meters
Setting
Note on “Meter 1“
Notes
Example 1
Example 2
Pulse valency
184/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
The meters are used to optimize plant operation. They also serve for limiting the pulses.
The following types of meters can be used:
• Mechanical pulse sources (Reed contact) with no Namur circuitry, having a maximum pulse frequency of 25 Hz and a minimum pulse duration of 20 ms
• Electronic pulse sources having a maximum pulse frequency of 100 Hz and a minimum pulse duration of 5 ms
Electronic pulse sources, such as Open Collector outputs, generate shorter, less bouncing pulses than mechanical pulse sources, such as relays or Reed contacts.
To ensure full flexibility with regard to models, the type of meter can be selected:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs > RMH760.X… (or RMZ78.…)
Operating line
Type
Range
Mechanically /
Electronically
Factory setting
Mechanically
A name can be entered for every meter (refer to section 11.8 “Assignment of text”). If,
after assigning a name, the meter is called up, it is no longer “Meter 1“ (or 2, 3, or 4) that appears, but the name entered
• The pulse meters integrated in the RMB760B are not suited for billing purposes, the reason being insufficient accuracy. To ensure valid billing data, readout must take place directly on the meters (heat meters, electricity meters, etc.)
• Meters using Namur or S0 circuitry are not supported
• 4 independent meters are available
11.4 Pulse
Every pulse delivered by a pulse source corresponds to a certain consumption value.
The pulse valency is imprinted on the meter. It must be entered as a numerator and denominator.
Settings: Pulse valency numerator = 20
Pulse valency denominator = 1
Pulse unit = liter
Ö Pulse valency = 20 liters / pulse
Settings: Pulse valency numerator = 10
Pulse valency denominator = 3
Pulse unit = Wh
Ö Pulse valency = 3.33 Wh/pulse
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Data acquisition > Meter 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Operating line
Pulse unit
Pulse valency numerator
Pulse valency denominator
Range
Wh / kWh / MWh / kJ / MJ / GJ / ml / l / m3 /
Heat cost unit /
No unit / BTU
1…9999
1…9999
Factory setting
kWh
1
1
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
11 Function block meter
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setting
Setting and resetting meter readings
Display values
Settings
11.5 Overflow
The overflow value ensures that both meter and RMH760B show the same display. The value at which the meter’s display is reset to 0 can be set.
The unit and the decimal point are dependent on the unit and the format displayed.
The overflow value can only be changed via the OCI700.1 service tool.
Operating line Range Factory setting
Overflow value 0…999'999'999 99’999’999 kWh
11.6 Setting and resetting meter readings
If there are discrepancies, service staff can readjust meter readings via datapoint Meter
reading current
. This value can only be changed with the OCI700.1 service tool
The last 15 monthly values can be deleted via datapoint Reset monthly values. The current meter reading will be maintained.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Data acquisition > Meter 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Operating line
Reset monthly values
Yes / No No
11.7 Displaying meter readings
For each meter, following is displayed:
• The current meter reading
• Of the last 15 months, the meter reading per month and the respective readout date
Main menu > Data acquisition > Meter 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Operating line Comments
Meter reading current
Unit
[Readout 1] date
[Readout 1] meter reading
…
[Readout 15] date
[Readout 15] meter reading
0…999'999’999
According to the configured display format
The monthly values are stored at the end of the month at midnight.
The 15 monthly values can be deleted on the password level using datapoint “Reset monthly values”.
11.8 Assignment
Each meter can be assigned specific text. This text will then appear as menu text and datapoint text on the operating pages.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Data acquisition > Meter 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Operating line
Meter reading 1*
* Or meter reading 2, 3 or 4
Range
Max. 20 characters
Factory setting
Meter reading 1*
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
11 Function block meter
185/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Note
Fault status messages
11.9 Fault
Battery-powered or mechanical meters also continue metering in the event of a power failure. In the event power supply to the RMH760B fails, the pulses will not be counted during that period of time.
When leaving the “Extra configuration” menu, a restart will be made. Pulses received between the last storage operation and the restart (maximum 5 minutes) are counted.
If, in connection with pulse limitation, “Scaled“ is selected as the type of limitation, a fault status message is delivered to the meter’s input if the minimum number of pulses
(5 pulses/min) is not reached for more than 20 seconds.
Scaled pulse sources never deliver less than 7.5 pulses/min.
Number Text
9401 No pulse signal meter 1
9402
9403
No pulse signal meter 2
No pulse signal meter 3
9404 No pulse signal meter 4
Effect
Meter input 1 receives no pulses from the heat meter.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Meter input 2 receives no pulses from the heat meter.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Meter input 3 receives no pulses from the heat meter.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Meter input 4 receives no pulses from the heat meter.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
186/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
11 Function block meter
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
12 Function block miscellaneous
12.1 Overview of function block
a a a x x x x
Miscellaneous
Extra configuration
Inputs
Outputs
Functions
Business card
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Q
12.2 Configuration
Function block “Miscellaneous“ is always available. To activate the function block, no special basic configuration is required.
The common functions required for the plants can be activated via “Extra configuration”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous > Inputs
Operating line
Outside temperature sensor
Solar radiation
Wind speed
Display input 1
Display input 2
Display input 3
Display input 4
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous > Outputs
Operating line
Outside temperature relay
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous
Operating line Range Factory setting
Business card Yes / No Yes
Activation of the business card is described in subsection 4.5.4 “Electronic business card”.
12.3 Outside
A total of 3 outside sensors can be connected to the RMH760B:
• The outside sensor at function block “Miscellaneous“ can be used as follows:
−
As a reference variable for flow temperature control and for other functions in connection with heating circuit 1
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
12 Function block miscellaneous
187/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Connection choices
Outside temperature via bus
−
−
−
As a reference variable for the heat demand transformers
For frost protection functions
For locking the boiler depending on the outside temperature
−
For forwarding via data bus. This enables the measured value to be used in heating circuits 2 and 3 also. The factory setting heating circuits 2 and 3 use is the outside sensor at function block "Miscellaneous"
• The outside sensors at function blocks “Heating circuit 2“ and “Heating circuit 3” can be used as follows:
−
As a reference variable for flow temperature control and for other functions in
− connection with heating circuits 2 and 3
For forwarding via data bus
The outside temperature can be delivered by different sources:
• The outside sensor is locally connected to a terminal
• The outside temperature signal is delivered via data bus
The following variants are available:
Variant Effect
Outside temperature Plant operates with its own locally at the terminal.
Communication outside temperature not active outside temperature.
No impact on the bus
Diagram
T
Outside temperature locally at the terminal.
Communication outside temperature active
No outside temperature locally.
Communication outside temperature active
Plant operates with its own outside temperature. The outside temperature is also made available via bus to other controllers or other applications in the same controller
Plant operates with the outside temperature delivered via bus by some other controller.
Heating circuits 2 and 3 operate per default according to this variant
T
T
No outside temperature locally.
Communication outside temperature not active
Controller has no outside temperature
T
The type of sensing element of the outside sensor can be selected under … > Settings >
Inputs at the assigned terminal. Default setting is an LG-Ni 1000 sensor.
Connection of an NTC575 sensor (e.g. QAC32) is possible.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs
Operating line
RMH760.X… (or RMZ78…)
Range
Ni1000 / 2×Ni1000 /
T1 / Pt1000 / 0…10 V /
NTC575
Factory setting
Ni1000
The outside temperature can be transmitted to other controllers via bus, or it can be received from the bus. For that purpose, communication must be activated and an
188/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
12 Function block miscellaneous
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Configuration
Communication per default
Notes outside temperature zone set. An outside temperature zone identified by “----“ means that the outside temperature on the bus is inactive.
To enable different outside temperature signals to be distributed via bus (e.g. outside temperature for heating zone North, outside temperature for heating zone South), they must be assigned to own outside temperature zones. For the required settings, refer to
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Distribution zones
Operating line
Outside temperature zone
Range
----/ 1…31
Factory setting
1
The RMH760B is supplied with the outside temperature zones activated. This means that only one outside sensor need be connected and the outside temperature is used throughout the controller.
If heating circuits 2 and 3 shall be operated with their own outside sensors, the sensors must be configured to free terminals and outside temperature zones must be switched inactive or set in different zones.
If 2 or more RMH760B are interconnected via bus and each of them is equipped with an outside sensor, the controllers send per default the outside temperature in the same outside temperature zone. This will lead to a communication error with all controllers:
Number Text
11 >1 outside temp sensor
HC 1
Effect
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
To solve the problem, the outside temperature zones of the different controllers can be set to different values, or the outside sensors can be removed from all controllers except one so that all controllers will work with one common sensor.
12.3.1 Outside temperature simulation
To test the plant’s response, the outside temperature can be simulated and the measured value of the outside temperature can be overridden. Simulation is always possible, independent of whether the outside temperature is received via bus or acquired locally.
Main menu > Miscellaneous > Inputs
Operating line Range Factory setting
Outside temperature simulation ---- / –50.0…50.0 °C ----
Simulation of the outside temperature in heating circuits 1, 2 and 3 is possible under
Main menu > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3) > Inputs/setpoints.
During the simulation, the simulated outside temperature is also used for the composite and the attenuated outside temperature.
• The simulation is not automatically ended (no supervision of time-out!)
• The inputs should only be overridden by qualified staff and for a limited period of time only!
During the simulation, fault status message “Outside sensor simulation active” appears.
This message is displayed until the outside temperature simulation is reset to "----".
This is to make certain that the plant will not be quit without ending the simulation.
• When leaving the simulation, the attenuated outside temperature will be set to the current outside temperature. Then, it can take one or 2 days for the plant to adapt
• The simulated outside temperature will only be used locally. It is not forwarded to other controllers via bus; the temperature transmitted is still the measured value of the connected outside sensor
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
12 Function block miscellaneous
189/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Fault status messages
12.3.2 Fault
When leaving the “Commissioning“ menu, a check is made to see if the outside sensor is connected or a sensor value is received via bus. If there is no outside temperature, or in the case of a short-circuit, fault status message “Outside temp sensor error“ will appear. Internally, the controller continues to operate using 0 °C as a backup value.
If outside temperatures from other outside temperature zones are available via bus, they will be used as backup values until the error has been rectified.
Only one outside temperature may be present in the same zone. If several controllers transmit their outside temperature in the same zone, fault status message “>1 outside temp sensor HC 1“ (or HC 2 or HC 3) will be delivered.
Number Text
10 Outside temp sensor error 1
Effect
Nonurgent message; must not be ac-
13 knowledged
Outside temp sensor error 2 Nonurgent message; must not be ac-
16 knowledged
Outside temp sensor error 3 Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
11
14
17
12
>1 outside temp sensor HC 1 Urgent message; must be acknowledged.
More than one outside sensor in the same outside temperature zone.
>1 outside temp sensor HC 2 Urgent message; must be acknowledged.
More than one outside sensor in the same outside temperature zone.
>1 outside temp sensor HC 3 Urgent message; must be acknowledged.
More than one outside sensor in the same outside temperature zone.
Outside sensor 1 simul active Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
15
18
20
21
30
Outside sensor 2 simul active Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Outside sensor 3 simulation active
Nonurgent message; must not be ac-
Solar intensity sensor error knowledged
• Solar intensity sensor not connected
• Bus communication interrupted
• Solar zone not correctly set (transmit-
>1 solar intensity sens in zone
Wind speed sensor error ter and receiver must use the same solar zone)
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
More than one solar intensity sensor in the same solar zone.
Urgent message; must be acknowledged
• Wind speed sensor not connected
• Bus communication interrupted
• Wind zone not correctly set (transmitter and receiver must use the same wind zone)
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
190/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
12 Function block miscellaneous
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Extra configuration
Settings
Number Text
31
>1 wind speed sensor in zone
Effect
More than one wind speed sensor in the same wind zone
Urgent message; must be acknowledged
12.4 Outside
For each outside sensor, an outside temperature relay is available. It is irrelevant here whether the outside temperature is directly acquired or transmitted via bus. The
RMH760B has 3 integrated outside temperature relays.
The function is to be activated via “Extra configuration”:
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous > Outputs > Outside
temperature relay Assign terminal
The 2 other outside temperature relays can be configured with heating circuit 2 and heating circuit 3 under “Outputs”.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Outputs > Outside temperature relay
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 2 > Outside temperature relay
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 3 > Outside temperature relay
Operating line
Switch-off point
Switching differential
Range
–50…50 °C
1…20 K
SD
ON
Factory setting
5 °C
3 K
Example
OFF
OFF
ON
SD
TO
Deactivation
Activation
Switching differential
Current outside temperature
TO
ON
TO
OFF
TO
The relay contact closes when the current outside temperature falls below the level of
Switch-off point minus switching differential. The relay contact will open again when the current outside temperature returns to a level above the switch-off point.
Switch-off point = 5 °C
Switching differential = 3 K
The relay contact will close when the outside temperature drops below 2 °C, it will open when the outside temperature exceeds 5 °C.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
12 Function block miscellaneous
191/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Configuration
Input identifier
Other settings
192/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
12.5 Display
On the RMH760B, universal inputs can be defined for display purposes.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous > Inputs
Operating line
Display input 1
Display input 2
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Assign terminal
Assign terminal
Display input 3
Display input 4
Assign terminal
Assign terminal
The type or unit of the display input can be selected with the input identifier.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Miscellaneous > Input identifier
Operating line
Display input 1
Range
°C / % / g/kg / kJ/kg /
W/m2 / m/s / bar / mbar / Pa / ppm /
Universal 000.0 /
Universal 0000 /
Factory setting
°C
Digital
Same as display input 1 °C Display input 2
Display input 3
Display input 4
Same as display input 1 °C
Same as display input 1 °C
For other setting choices, such as resolution, type of sensor, etc., refer to subsection
3.3.2 “Configuration of the universal inputs and outputs“.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu
> Settings > Inputs > …X…
Operating line
Type
Value low
Value high
Correction
Range
Ni1000 / 2xNi1000 / T1 /
Pt1000 / DC 0…10 V
Depending on the selected type
Depending on the selected type
−3.0…3.0 K
Factory setting
Ni1000
Depending on the type
Depending on the type
0.0 K
Normal position Open / Closed Open
The type only appears with analog inputs, the normal position only with the digital inputs.
Value low and value high as well as corrections only appear with designations and types that support these settings.
For detailed information about the configuration of analog inputs, refer to subsection
3.3.2 “Configuration of the universal inputs and outputs”.
The fault inputs can be assigned free text.
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu
> Settings > Texts
Operating line
Display input 1
Display input 2
Display input 3
Display input 4
Range
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Max. 20 characters
Factory setting
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
12 Function block miscellaneous
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Inputs
Inputs
Outputs
12.6 Diagnostic
Main menu > Miscellaneous > Inputs
Operating line
Actual value outside temp
Actual value solar radiation
Actual value wind speed
Display input 1
Display input 2
Display input 3
Display input 4
Main menu > Miscellaneous > Inputs
Operating line
Outside temperature simulation
Main menu > Miscellaneous > Outputs
Operating line
Outside temperature relay
Range
…°C
W/m2 m/s
Range
…°C
Range
Off / On
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
12 Function block miscellaneous
193/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
13 Function block faults
13.1 Overview of function block
Function block “Faults“ collects all fault status messages that have occurred, sorts them according to their importance for display and stores the last 10 messages in the fault history. The function block signals acknowledgements and resettings made by the user to the application where the fault occurred. The function block is always active for delivering internal fault status messages.
For external signal sources, function block “Faults“ provides 4 universal fault inputs, in addition to the fault inputs of the boiler and the pumps.
It is also possible to monitor inputs, such as flow sensor, room sensor, etc., that have already been configured.
To signal or forward faults, 2 relays can be configured as fault outputs. d x x x x d d d d d d d d d
B
V
...pump
Faults
Boiler
Extra configuration
Inputs
Outputs
Q Q
13.2 Configuration
A maximum of 4 universal fault inputs and 2 fault relays can be configured via “Extra configuration”.
The inputs can be configured to free inputs, or inputs that are already used can be monitored.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Faults > Inputs
Operating line
Fault button external
Fault input 1
Fault input 2
Fault input 3
Fault input 4
Adjustable values / display / remarks
--- / N.X1 / N.X2 / … (digital only)
Analog or digital inputs
Analog or digital inputs
Analog or digital inputs
Analog or digital inputs
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Faults > Outputs
Operating line
Fault relay 1
Fault relay 2
Adjustable values / display / remarks
--- / RMH760.X4 etc. (digital only)
--- / RMH760.X4 etc. (digital only)
194/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Fault relay
Note
Acknowledgement of faults
Resetting the fault relay
Configuration
Simple fault
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
13.3 Fault button
Fault status messages delivered to the controller are indicated by the LED in the fault button. If a fault status message needs to be acknowledged, the acknowledgement must also be made via the fault button.
There are 3 choices:
Indication
Button dark
Button flashes
Cause / procedure
No fault present
• There is a fault which has not yet been acknowledged. After pressing the button, the button remains lit until the fault is rectified
• There was a temporary fault which, at the moment, can no longer be detected, demanding an acknowledgement which has not yet been made. After pressing the button, flashing stops
There is a fault which has already been acknowledged Button lit
A fault relay, if present, remains energized as long as the button flashes. For more
detailed information, refer to section 13.10 “Fault relay”.
The LED extinguishes only when the fault is no longer present. If the LED of the fault button is lit and does not extinguish when making acknowledgements, a fault status message is still pending.
The acknowledgement is to be made as follows:
• Acknowledge the fault relay (only, if a fault relay has been configured)
• Acknowledge all fault status messages pending at the controller
• Fault status messages with self-holding can only be reset when the fault is no longer present
Faults can only be acknowledged on the controller where the fault is pending.
Fault relays can only be reset on the controller with the configured fault relays.
13.4 External fault button
The fault block has a connection facility for an external fault button. The external fault button has the same function as fault button on the unit. The 2 buttons can be operated in parallel.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Faults > Inputs >
Operating line
Fault button external
Adjustable values / display / remarks
--- / RMH760.X4 etc. (digital only)
13.5 Fault
Faults are distinguished by properties. There are faults with regard to:
• Acknowledgement and reset
• Signal priority
• Plant behavior
13.5.1 Acknowledgement and reset
No acknowledgement is required for simple faults.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
195/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Example
Standard fault
Example
Extended fault
Example
If the outside temperature is missing, a fault status message will be delivered. When the outside temperature is available again, the fault status message automatically disappears and the plant will resume normal operation.
These types of fault require an acknowledgement.
If there is more than one time switch master in the same geographical zone, the fault status message must be acknowledged.
An acknowledgement and a reset required for this type of fault.
If the maximum temperature of flue gas temperature supervision at the boiler has been exceeded, the fault status message must be acknowledged and, after rectification of the fault, a reset must be made by pressing the fault button again.
Priority ”Urgent“
Priority “Nonurgent“
Examples
13.5.2 Signal priority
Fault status messages are called “urgent” when correct operation of plant can no longer be ensured.
An urgent fault status message is a boiler sensor error, for example.
Nonurgent fault status messages
• do not adversely affect plant operation directly
• allow the plant to operate with restrictions
A nonurgent message is an outside sensor error, for example.
13.5.3 Plant
There are:
• Faults with aggregate stop
• Faults without aggregate stop
A fault only acts on the aggregate to which the fault status message belongs. An exception are the pumps. Failure of a pump also acts on the associated aggregate.
The universal fault inputs only lead to a plant stop in connection with parameterization
“Stop“. For more details, refer to section 13.8 “Fault inputs”.
Number Text
5201
Effect
Hol/sp day prgm failure HC 1 Heating circuit 1 performs normal operation. Holidays and special days are not possible
5102
10
>1 time switch in plant 1
Outside temp sensor error
The heating circuit runs in room operating mode Comfort
If available, the outside temperature of some other zone via bus will be used, otherwise the backup value of 0 °C
2491
2492
[Main pump B] overload
[Main pump] fault
Changeover to main pump A will take place, if present, otherwise fault status message [Main pump] fault will be delivered
The main controller will be stopped since there is no flow past the sensor so that control is no longer possible
196/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Simple fault
Standard fault
Standard fault with configured fault relay
Extended fault
13.6 State diagrams of the individual types of faults
A simple fault need not be acknowledged. If there is a fault relay (see below), it must be reset, however.
No fault
(acknowledged)
Fault coming
Fault going
Faulty
(acknowledged)
When there is a simple fault, the LED is lit. After correction of the fault, the LED will extinguish.
If a fault relay is configured, the LED flashes when the fault occurs and the relay is energized. When the fault button is pressed, the relay drops out and the LED extinguishes. When the fault is corrected, the LED will extinguish.
A standard fault must be acknowledged.
LED dark
No fault, acknowledged
Acknowledge fault
No fault, not acknowledged
LED flashes
Fault going
Fault coming
Fault going
LED lit
Faulty, acknowledged
Faulty, not acknowledged
LED flashes
Acknowledge fault
The LED flashes as long as the fault is not acknowledged. If the fault is still present, the
LED will be lit after acknowledgement.
LED off, fault relay off
No fault, acknowledged
Acknowledge fault
No fault, not acknowledged
LED flashes, fault relay on
Fault going
Fault coming
Fault going
LED off, fault relay off
Faulty, acknowledged
Faulty, not acknowledged
LED flashes, fault relay on
Acknowledge fault
Extended faults are faults that must be acknowledged and reset. An example would be a twin pump when both pumps indicate a fault. The pumps will start running only after the fault has been acknowledged, the errors corrected and the fault reset.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
197/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
LED off
No fault, acknowledged, reset
Aggregate or plant stopped
LED lit
No fault, acknowledged
LED flashes
Acknowledge fault
No fault, not acknowledged
Fault coming
Fault going
Fault coming
Fault going
Faulty, acknowledged
LED lit
Acknowledge fault
Faulty, not acknowledged
LED flashes
13.7 Predefined fault inputs
Function block “Boiler“ and the pump blocks provide predefined fault inputs.
For a description of these fault inputs, refer to the relevant function blocks. These fault inputs are also parameterized at the relevant function blocks.
198/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
13.8.1 Universal fault inputs
The RMH760B has 4 universal fault inputs. These can be activated via “Extra configuration”.
Either analog or digital inputs can be defined as fault inputs. If the input is not assigned to an input that has already been configured, the input identifier and thus the type of input or the unit can be freely selected.
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Faults > Input identifier
Operating line
Fault input 1
Range
°C / % / g/kg / kJ/kg /
W/m2 / m/s / bar / mbar / Pa / ppm /
Universal 000.0 /
Universal 0000 / Digital
Fault input 2
Fault input 3
Same as fault input 1
Same as fault input 1
Fault input 4 Same as fault input 1
With a digital input, it is also possible to define the normal position:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Inputs > RMH760.X… or RMZ78…
Factory setting
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Operating line Range
Normal position Open / Closed
Following can be set for each fault status message:
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Faults > Fault input 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Factory setting
Open
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Fault text
Fault status message delay
Operating line
Fault text
Fault status message delay
Fault acknowledgement
Fault priority
Effect of fault
Limit value fault on
Limit value fault off
* Or fault input 2, 3 or 4
** Depending on the input identifier
Range
Max. 20 characters
00.00…59.55 m.s
(minutes.seconds)
None / Acknowledge /
Acknowledge and reset
Urgent / Not urgent
No stop / Stop
0 / 1**
0 / 1**
Factory setting
[Fault input 1] fault*
00.05 m.s
None
Not urgent
None
1
0
These settings can only be made if the relevant input has previously been activated via
“Extra configuration”.
For more detailed information, refer to section 13.5 “Fault properties”.
The text for the fault inputs is predefined as [Fault input 1] fault through [Fault input 4] fault.
The text can be edited.
Signal at the fault input
Fault status message
Fault effects
Fault status messages
Fault handling
Signal delay
The fault status message delay is used to set the period of time to elapse for a fault to be handled as such.
Parameterization “Stop“ at the universal fault inputs means that all function blocks
(boiler, main controller, primary controller, heating circuits, and DHW) will be switched off by the controller. Frost protection, however, continues to be active.
Number Text
9001
9002
9003
[Fault input 1] fault*
[Fault input 2] fault*
[Fault input 3] fault*
9004 [Fault input 4] fault*
* Factory setting; text is freely editable
Effect
According to the settings
According to the settings
According to the settings
According to the settings
The digital fault inputs cannot be monitored. We recommend to use wiring where the signal drops out when there is a fault pending.
13.8.2 Analog fault input with limit value supervision
An analog input can be monitored for limit value crossings.
An input that is already configured can also be monitored. For example, the main flow temperature sensor can also be monitored to ensure that a maximum flow temperature will not be exceeded.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
199/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Example 1
Example 2
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Faults > Fault input 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Operating line
Limit value fault on
Range
0 / 1*
Limit value fault off 0 / 1*
* Depending on the input identifier; the example given here applies to a digital input
Factory setting
1
0
If Limit value fault on is greater than Limit value fault off, the input is monitored for overshoot.
If the temperature exceeds 80 °C, a fault is identified; if it drops again to a level below
75 °C, the fault is considered rectified.
ON
OFF
ERROR
If Limit value fault off is greater than Limit value fault on, the input is monitored for undershoot.
Limit value fault on: 10 °C
Limit value fault off: 12 °C
If the temperature falls below 10 °C, a fault is identified; if it returns to a level above
12 °C, the fault is considered rectified.
ON
OFF
ERROR
13.9 Communication
When communication is activated, the impact on fault handling is as follows:
• Fault status messages are always delivered via bus and can be further handled by other Synco devices
• Fault status messages from other Synco™ 700 devices are shown on the controller
• Fault status messages from other Synco™ 700 devices can be delivered to a fault relay
Fault status messages can be acknowledged from a remote location (e.g. from the operator station using the OCI700.1 service tool).
It can be selected whether fault status messages with self-holding may also be reset from a remote location or whether this must always be made locally.
200/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Setting values
Passing on the fault status messages
Configuration
Settings
Setting values
Display values
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Basic settings
Operating line
Remote reset of fault
Range
No / Yes
Factory setting
No
Conversely, the controller is not able to acknowledge fault status messages on other controllers.
13.10 Fault relay
To pass on the fault status messages, or to optically or audibly indicate them on the control panel, for example, the 2 fault message outputs Fault relay 1 and Fault relay 2 of the function block can be configured to any 2 free outputs N.Q…
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Faults > Outputs
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
Fault relay 1
Fault relay 2
--- / N.Q1 … (free relays only) / assignment of fault relay
--- / N.Q1… ( free relays only) / assignment of fault relay
For each of the 2 fault relays, the following settings can be made:
• Fault priority:
Priority at which the relay shall be energized
• Signaling
The following signaling variants are available:
−
Internal fault (optically): The fault relay only indicates internal faults and remains
− energized until the faults are no longer present
Internal fault (audibly): The fault relay only indicates internal faults and remains
−
−
− energized until the fault is acknowledged
Fault via bus (audibly): The fault relay only indicates faults from the bus and remains energized until the fault is acknowledged
• Inversion
“No“ means: In the event of fault, the relay will be energized
“Yes“ means: In the event of fault, the relay will be deenergized
Main menu > Commissioning > Settings > … or
Main menu > Settings > Faults > Fault relay 1 (or 2)
Operating line
Fault priority
Indication of fault*
Inversion
Range
Urgent /
Not urgent /
All
Fault internally (optically) /
Fault internally (audibly) /
Fault via bus (audibly)
No / Yes
Factory setting
All
Fault internally
(audibly)**
No
* A maximum of one bus fault status message can be handled, even if they are of different priority. Recommendation: Do not configure 2 bus fault relays
** Factory setting at fault relay 2 “Fault via bus (audibly)“
At menu item Miscellaneous, the state of the 2 fault relays can be read.
Main menu > Miscellaneous > Outputs
Operating line
Fault relay 1
Fault relay 2
Current state
Off / On
Off / On
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
201/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Faults current
Fault history
Fault status message bus
Display values
13.11 Fault display
The current state of the fault status messages can be interrogated on the operator unit.
The current faults contain all faults currently pending. A maximum of 10 faults can be displayed. With each fault, following is displayed:
• Fault text
• Fault number
• Time of day and date the fault occurred
The last 10 faults are displayed. Here too, following is displayed with each fault:
• Fault text
• Fault number
• Time of day and date the fault occurred
Here, the fault status message with the highest priority on the bus is displayed. In addition to the fault text, the fault number, the time of day and date the fault occurred, and the device address of the faulty device are displayed.
It is to be noted that internal messages can also be displayed here, provided they have the highest priority.
Main menu > Faults > Faults current
Main menu > Faults > Fault history
Main menu > Faults > Fault status message bus
Deleting
Note
Inputs
13.12 Deleting all fault status messages
Using menu item Delete faults, the list with the fault history can be deleted.
Main menu > Faults
Operating line
Deleting faults
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Current faults will be reset; the fault history will be deleted
When activating this function, all other fault status messages will also be reset. Hence, only pending faults continue to be displayed.
If the kind of acknowledgement with a pending fault is changed, it may happen that the fault status message can neither be acknowledged nor reset. The function can also be used to reset these fault status messages!
13.13 Diagnostic choices
Main menu > Miscellaneous > Inputs
Operating line
Fault button external
Fault input 1
Adjustable values / display / remarks
0 / 1 (0 = inactive, 1 = active)
0 / 1 (0 = inactive, 1 = active)
Fault input 2
Fault input 3
Fault input 4
0 / 1 (0 = inactive, 1 = active)
0 / 1 (0 = inactive, 1 = active)
0 / 1 (0 = inactive, 1 = active)
In both the diagnostics and the wiring test, logic states are displayed. 1 indicates that the fault input is active. When selecting “Normal position open”, this is the case when the contact is closed; when selecting “Normal position closed”, this is the case when the contact is open.
202/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Outputs
Fault display
Deleting faults
Main menu > Miscellaneous > Outputs
Operating line
Fault relay 1
Fault relay 2
Main menu > Faults > Faults current
Range
Off / On
Off / On
Operating line
Fault 1 up to fault 10
Main menu > Faults > Fault history
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Operating line
Fault 1 up to fault 10
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Main menu > Faults > Fault status message bus
Operating line
Fault status message bus
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Faults > Delete faults
Operating line
Fault history will be deleted
Adjustable values / display / remarks
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
13 Function block faults
203/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Activating communication
14 Communication
A detailed description of communication is given in Basic Documentation P3127
(Communication via Konnex bus). In the following, the most important settings are described that are required for commissioning a basic plant.
Communication is activated when the following conditions are satisfied:
• The device address has been entered (every bus user requires its individual device address)
• Bus power supply is available
• The bus device is not in commissioning mode
Exchange of process data The exchange of data required for heating and ventilation plant takes place in LTE mode (Easy Mode). This mode facilitates straightforward data exchange without requiring a major engineering effort.
Similar data are exchanged within zones. To make possible communication, it is therefore sufficient to create a common zone.
Device addressing has no impact on the plant’s functioning. The plants can be on the same RMH760B or on different Konnex controllers interconnected via bus.
14.1 Basic settings
Before the zone assignments for the exchange of process data can be made, the device address must be set.
Communication
Device address
Decentral bus power supply
Clock time operation
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Basic settings
Operating line
Device address
Decentral bus power supply
Clock time operation
Range
1…253 (1…255)
Off / On
Autonomous / Slave /
Master
Yes / No Remote setting clock slave
Remote reset of fault Yes / No
The settings made here are also shown under:
Main menu > Device information > Communication > Basic settings
Factory setting
255
On
Autonomous
Yes
Yes
Every bus user requires its individual device address.
Device addresses 254 and 255 are reserved for special functions. With device address
255, communication is deactivated (no exchange of process data).
For small plants (maximum 8 devices), decentral power supply is adequate. This represents the factory setting. For detailed information, refer to Data Sheet N3127
(Konnex bus) and Basic Documentation P3127 (Konnex communication).
When selecting "Autonomous", the controller does not receive or send the time of day.
If a common time of day shall be used in the system, one of the controllers will be defined as the clock time master and the others as slaves.
Remote setting clock slave Function “Remote setting clock slave” enables the user to set the time of day and the date on a clock time slave.
The new values will be sent to the clock time master via Konnex bus. The master then delivers the new time of day to all bus users. This means that for the user, operation is the same as on the clock master.
204/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
RM..
RM..
Remote reset of fault
Communication
Holidays/special day operation
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Time of day
Time of day
Device 1
Device 2
Master Slave
Legend for all figures in this chapter:
Signal transmitter
Signal receiver
With communication activated, the actions are the following:
• Fault status messages are always delivered via bus and can be further handled by other Synco devices
• Fault status messages from other Synco™ 700 devices are shown on the display under: Main menu > Faults > Fault status message bus
• Fault status messages from other Synco devices can be delivered to a fault relay
(refer to section 13.10 ”Fault relay")
All fault status messages can be acknowledged from a remote location (e.g. from the operator station via OCI700.1; the RMH760B is unable to acknowledge or reset fault status messages of other Synco™ devices from a remote location).
It can be selected whether fault status messages with self-holding may also be reset from a remote location or whether self-holding must always be reset with the local push-button.
14.2 Calendar data (holidays and special days)
Each RMH760B has 4 calendars for holidays and special days. If required, it is also possible to use a calendar of plants (heating circuit, DHW heating, ventilation, etc.) on other controllers.
Or, optionally, the plants in the controller can use one of the 4 internal calendars. This is also effected via the communication settings.
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Room heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > DHW
Operating line
Holidays/special day operation
Range
Autonomous /
Slave /
Master
1…31 Holidays/special day zone
The settings made here are also displayed under:
Main menu > Device information > Communication > …
Factory setting
Autonomous
1
If a common holiday or special day program shall be used, holidays/special day operation is to be defined on one of the controllers as the master and the other(s) as the slave(s). This works analogously with the 4 internal calendars.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
205/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Holidays/special day zone With master / slave operation, this setting is used to make the zone assignment. In that case, the slave devices are given the same holidays/special day zone as the master.
It is possible to define several zones with one master per zone.
RM..
RM..
Individual room usage
(variant 1)
Holiday/special day
Device 1
Calendar operation: Master
Calendar zone: 1
Holiday/Special day
Device 2
Calendar operation: Slave
Calendar zone: 1
14.3 Room
Every heating circuit belongs to a geographical zone. This zone symbolizes the room to be controlled. Within the zone, all room-related data will be exchanged:
• Room operating mode
• Room temperature
• Setpoints
14.3.1 Communication
The requirements (operation, function) placed on the generation of the room operating mode differ significantly, depending on the type of building and its usage. The communication variants described below allow the determination of the room operating mode to be adapted to the requirements.
Basic variant 1 assumes that a heating circuit has its own individual room operating mode, independent of other plant (heating circuits, ventilation). This means that the exchange of data is restricted to the heating circuit and the rooms in the relevant geographical zone.
If there is a room unit in that zone, the heating circuit will automatically receive its room temperature and setpoint readjustments. In addition, data are exchanged to determine the room operating mode.
QAW740 RM..
206/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Room temperature
Room unit
Geographical zone: 5
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
Room temperature
Heating circuit 1
Geographical zone: 5
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Holidays/special days
(variant 2)
Same room occupancy times (variant 3)
The occupancy times (time switches) of the different geographical zones are on an individual basis, but all (or individual) zones use the same holidays and special days.
Hence, a common calendar for the common holidays and special days shall be used.
The common calendar has an impact on the time switches of the heating circuits.
For more detailed information, refer to section 14.2 “Calendar data (holidays and special days)”.
If the room occupancy times of the different geographical zones are identical, a time switch can be defined as the master. The other heating circuits as time switch slaves take care of the master’s occupancy times.
The commonly used time switch acts as a master in the geographical zone of its heating circuit (or ventilation system).
The heating circuits that shall adopt the time switch will be operated as time switch slaves and receive their signals from the master’s zone (setting: Time switch slave
(apartment)).
RM..
RM..
Time switch
Heating circuit 1
Geographical zone: 1
Time switch slave (apart.) = ----
Time switch
Heating circuit 2
Geographical zone: x
Time switch slave (apart.) = 1
2 plants for the same rooms (variant 4)
⇒
Master Slave
If 2 heating circuits – or one heating circuit and one ventilation circuit – serve the same rooms, they belong to the same geographical zone.
The 2 plants acquire the same room temperature and use the same room occupancy schedule (in other words, the room operating mode is the same).
This is a room control combination where one of the heating circuits (or the ventilation system) adopts the preselection for the room operating mode of the second heating circuit as the master.
If the room operating mode is changed with the occupancy button on the room unit (e.g. on the QAW740), the room control master will adopt that change and forward it to the room control slave.
For detailed information, refer to subsection 9.10.3 “Room control combination”.
In the case of a room control combination with a ventilation plant, the ventilation plant will always adopt the function of the room control master.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
207/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
QAW740 RM..
RM..
Extension of variant 4 with the same setpoints
(variant 5)
Room unit
Geographical zone: 5
Room operating mode
Setpoints
Heating circuit 1
Geographical zone: 5
Room operating mode
Setpoints
Heating circuit 2
Geographical zone: 5
Room control combination = Master
Room control combination =
Slave internal setpoints
In the case of a room control combination, the setpoint can be adopted, in addition to the room operating mode.
QAW740 RM..
RM..
Room unit
Geographical zone: 5
Room operating mode
Setpoints
Heating circuit 1
Geographical zone: 5
Room operating mode
Setpoints
Heating circuit 2
Geographical zone: 5
Room control combination = Master
Room control combination =
Slave external setpoints
The following overview shows the different communication variants described in this subsection. The settings are shown with 2 plants (plants 1 and 2) which can be located on different controllers.
Variants 1 through 3 can also be used with several plants.
For detailed information about the settings, refer to the following subsections.
208/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Variant 1
1
2
Variant 2
1
2
Variant 3
1
2
Variant 4
1
2
Variant 5
1
2
Holiday / special days
Time switch
Room operating mode switch
Room unit
Digital inputs
Setpoints
Plant
Holiday/special day zone
Holiday/special day operation
Geogr. zone (apart.)
Time switch slave (apart.)
Room control combination
Remark
Any
---
Any
Autonom Autonom
---
-----
Master Master
1
---
---
1
Master Slave
---
---
Master Master
Same holidays / special day zone
1 = heating circuit 1 (or ventilation)
2 = heating circuit 2
Any
Auton.
1
Any
Any
Any
--1
Master
Master
Time switch of zone 1
Any
Any
Auton.
Any
1 1
-----
Master
(RMU...)
Slave
internal setpoints
Same geogr. zone
Any
Auton.
1
Any
Any
1
-----
Master
(RMU...)
Slave
external setpoints
Same geogr. zone
Communication
Geographical zone
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
14.3.2 Settings on the RMH760B
For settings relating to the common calendar, refer to section 14.2 “Calendar data
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
Operating line
Geographical zone (apartm.)
Time switch slave (apartment)
Range
---- / 1…126
---- / 1…126
Factory setting
----
----
The settings made here are also displayed under:
Main menu > Device information > Communication > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
It is to be set from which geographical zone a value is received, and to which geographical zone a value is sent.
Within the geographical zone, heating circuits forward the following:
• The room temperature (actual value and setpoint)
• The time switch data
• The room operating mode
If a heating circuit serves other rooms, its assignment to the geographical zone must be appropriately set.
Heating circuits using the setting “Room control combination = Slave” (refer to subsec-
tion 9.10.3 “Room control combination“) receive the room temperature (actual value
and, possibly, the setpoint) and the room operating mode from the room control master of the same geographical zone.
The time switch data are forwarded only if operating line “Time switch slave (apartm.)” is set to “----“, that is, when the controller is the time switch master.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
209/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Time switch slave
Combination choices
Extra configuration
If the time switch shall operate as a slave of a master time switch, the geographical zone of the master time switch must be set here.
If that is the case, no more time switch data about the geographical zone will be forwarded. But the geographical zone will still be required to ensure communication with the room unit. The geographical zone must have a different setting value.
From the 2 settings, the following combinations are obtained:
Setting the geographical zone (apartment)
Setting the time switch slave (apartment)
Position of time switch
---- ---- Autonomous
1 (or more; max. 126)
----
Master
----
1 (or more; max. 126)
1 (or more; max. 126)
1 (or more; max. 126)
Slave
Slave
Main menu > Commissioning > Extra configuration > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
Operating line
Room control combination
Range
Master /
Slave external setpoint /
Slave internal setpoint
Factory setting
Master
14.3.3 Settings on the room unit
The QAW740 is available as a digital room unit with communication facility. For communication with the associated heating circuit, the same geographical zone and a device address must be set on the room unit.
Also refer to Installation Instructions G1633 covering the QAW740.
14.4 DHW
As with space heating, 2 or more DHW plants can be operated with one common time switch.
Communication
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > DHW
Operating line Range Factory setting
DHW zone
Time switch operation
1…31
Autonomous / Master /
Slave
1
Autonomous
Time switch slave DHW 1…31 1
The settings made here are also displayed under:
Main menu > Device information > Communication > DHW
Here, the zone for DHW heating is to be set. DHW zone
Time switch operation and time switch slave
When using the Master setting for time switch operation, the time switch data in the
DHW zone are forwarded for common usage.
DHW heating that shall make use of this time switch receives the settings.
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
Time switch operation
Time switch slave DHW
Slave
DHW zone of master
Several zones can be defined with one master.
210/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Time switch program in slave controllers
Communication
If, on a slave controller, “Autonomous“ is entered as time switch operation plus a time switch program, the latter will be ignored. In any case, the time switch program used is that of the master controller. This also applies to special days.
14.5 Heat demand and load control
Heat demand and the load control signals are exchanged via the heat distribution zones.
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Distribution zones
Operating line
Heat distr zone source side*
Range
---- / 1…31
Heat distribution zone 1…31
Heat distr zone consumer side** ---- / 1…31
* The operating line is only displayed on the main controller
** The operating line is only displayed on the primary controller
B
Factory setting
----
1
2
Note
Example
A
C
A Heat distribution zone, heat generation side
B Heat distribution zone, consumer side
C
Heat distribution zone
The 3 heating circuits and DHW heating are ready connected to the main controller, which means that they cannot be operated by the primary controller, but only parallel to it.
The primary controller also is ready connected to the main controller and cannot be operated parallel to the main controller.
The main controller in turn is ready connected to the boiler. The heat distribution zone on the heat generation side need be set only when there is no boiler.
During boiler operation, the heat demand is acquired via the heat distribution zone. If no main controller is used, its plant elements, such as mixing valve and pump, will not be needed.
The heat distribution zone on the heat generation side can only be set when using a main controller without boiler. It will not be required when using a boiler.
The heat distribution zone on the consumer side can only be set when used in connection with a primary controller.
In the following plant, boiler and DHW are accommodated in controller 1, and main controller and heating circuits in controller 2. The example shows clearly the role of the main controller as the interface between 2 zones. It receives the heat requests and generates the resulting heat demand, which is forwarded to the boiler.
Boxes “Controller 1“ and ”Controller 2“ at the bottom show the zone settings.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
211/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Controller 1 Controller 2
Heat consumer primary controller
Heat consumer
Heat source
Heat consumer
Heat consumer
Heat request
Heat demand
Heat request
Heat demand
Heat demand Heat demand
Controller 1
Controller 2
Heat distribution zone, heat source side = 1
Example without main controller
Heat distribution zone = 1
Heat distribution zone = 2
Requirement:
A boiler controller is controller 1 and shall receive the heat demand from its consumers
(controller 2).
Solution:
• Setting required for controller 1 (boiler) under “Heat distribution zone“: 1
• Setting required for controller 2 (consumer) under “Heat distribution zone“: 1
212/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Controller 1
T
T
T
Controller 2
T
Heat source
Heat consumer
Heat consumer
Heat request
Controller 1
Heat distribution zone = 1
Heat demand
Heat demand
Controller 2
Heat distribution zone = 1
14.6 Weather data
The outside temperatures are exchanged via the outside temperature zones.
When an outside sensor is connected to the controller with outside temperature zone 1, that controller transmits its outside temperature to all receivers with outside temperature zone 1.
RM..
RM..
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Outside temperature Outside temperature
Controller 1 Controller 2
Outside temperature zone = 5
Outside temperatur zone = 5
As for the outside temperature, a zone can be defined for solar radiation and wind speed. Controllers with the same zone can receive the respective sensor values.
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
213/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Communication
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Distribution zones
Operating line
Outside temperature zone
Solar zone
Wind zone
Range
---- / 1…31
---- / 1…31
---- / 1…31
The settings made here are also displayed under:
Main menu > Device information > Communication > Distribution zones
Factory setting
1
----
----
Outside temperature zone
Solar zone
When using setting “----“, the controller does not send the outside temperature signal via bus.
Several outside temperature zones are possible:
• Setting “Outside temperature zone“ in the communication settings of heating circuit 1 is identical with that under “Distribution zones“
• Those of heating circuits 2 and 3 are set as follows:
Main menu > Commissioning > Communication > Heating circuit 2 (or 3)
Operating line
Outside temperature zone
Range
---- / 1…31
Factory setting
1
Every controller has one solar zone.
When using setting “----", the controller does not send the solar radiation signal via bus.
Wind zone Every controller has one wind zone.
When using setting “----“, the controller does not send the wind speed signal via bus.
Faulty bus power supply
Time-of-day error
Failure of system time switch
14.7 Fault handling
Number Text
5000 No bus power supply
Effect
No bus power supply.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Number Text
5001
5002
5003
System time failure
>1 clock time master
Invalid time of day
Effect
Clock time master is missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
There is more than one clock time master.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
• Time of day on the clock time master must be readjusted
• Reserve has elapsed
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Number Text
5101
Effect
System time switch failure 1 Time switch master missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
214/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
1 time switch master per heating circuit
Error with holiday / special day program
Error with DHW time switch
Room master and zone error in heating circuit 1
Number Text
5111
5121
5301
Effect
System time switch failure 2 Time switch master missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
System time switch failure 3 DHW time switch master missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
DHW system time switch failure
Time switch master missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Number Text
5102 >1 time switch in HC 1
5112
5122
>1 time switch in HC 2
>1 time switch in HC 3
Effect
More than one time switch master in the same geographical zone.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
More than one time switch master in the same geographical zone.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
More than one time switch master in the same geographical zone.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Number Text
5202 failure
>1 hol/spec day program
Effect
Holidays / special day program master is missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
More than one holiday / special day program master.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Number Text
5301
DHW system time switch failure
5302 >1 DHW time switch
Effect
DHW time switch master missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
More than one DHW time switch master.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Number Text
5401
Effect
Room master failure in HC 1 Room master for the room control combination is missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
215/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Room master and zone error in heating circuit 2
Room master and zone error in heating circuit 3
Addressing error
Number Text
5402 >1 identical geogr zone [1]
Effect
More than one room master for plant 1 in the same geographical zone.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Number Text
5411
5412
Effect
Room master failure in HC 2 Room master for the room control combination for plant 2 is missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
>1 identical geogr zone [2]
More than one room master for plant 2 in the same geographical zone.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Number Text
5421
5422
Effect
Room master failure in HC 3 Room master for the room control combi-
>1 same geogr zone [3] nation for plant 3 is missing or cannot be received.
Nonurgent message; must not be acknowledged
More than one room master for plant 3 in the same geographical zone.
Nonurgent message; must be acknowledged
Number Text
6001
Effect
>1 identical device address More than one controller with the same device address.
Urgent message; must be acknowledged
216/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
14 Communication
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
15 Fault tracing aids
If a fault is displayed, it is always practical to select operating line Faults > Faults current and look for any pending fault status messages before starting to rectify faults. In the event of a faulty extension module, that fault must always be rectified first since it may lead to consequential fault status messages.
For a detailed description of the display, the acknowledgement and the reset of faults,
refer to chapter 13 “Function block faults”.
15.1 List of fault numbers
Number Name
66
68
69
71
59
60
61
65
72
2 Fault
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Outside temp sensor error 1
>1 outside temp sensor HC 1
Outside sensor 1 simul active
Outside temp sensor error 2
>1 outside temp sensor HC 2
Outside sensor 2 simul active
Outside temp sensor error 3
>1 outside temp sensor HC 3
54
55
56
57
58
50
51
52
53
18
20
21
30
Outside sensor 3 simul active
Solar intensity sensor error
>1 solar intensity sens in zone
Wind speed sensor error
31 >1 wind speed sensor in zone
40 Boiler error
41 Boiler return sensor error
[HC 1] error flow sensor
[HC 1] return sensor error
[Heat circuit 3] flow sens error
[Heat circuit 3] return sens error
Main contr flow sens error
[HC 2] error flow sensor
[HC 2] error return sensor
Prim controller error flow sensor
Prim controller error ret sensor
Main contr return sens error
Room temp sensor error HC 1
>2 room sensors in heat circuit 1
Room temp sensor error HC 2
>2 room sensors in heat circuit 2
Room temp sensor error HC 3
>2 room sensors in heat circuit 3
DHW stor tank sensor top error
DHW stor tank sensor bott error
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
15 Fault tracing aids
For explanation, refer to section / subsection…
217/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
218/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Number Name
74
75
76
77
321
2101
2202
2203
2301
2311
DHW flow sensor primary error
DHW flow sensor sec error
DHW flow sensor cons error
DHW return sensor error
Flue gas temp sensor error
Legionella protection error
Main contr h’request mod error
Prim contr h’request mod error
Boiler burner fault
Burner no checkback signal
2351
2361
2371
2534
2535
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2551
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2531
2532
2533
2411
2421
2431
2441
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
Shutoff valve no checkb signal
Flue gas overtemperature
Boiler test operation active
[Boiler pump] no flow
[Boiler pump B] overload
[Boiler pump B] no flow
[Boiler pump] fault
[Main pump] overload
[Main pump B] overload
[Main pump] no flow
[Main pump B] no flow
[Main pump] fault
[System pump] overload
[System pump B] overload
[System pump] no flow
[System pump B] no flow
[System pump] fault
[Heat circuit 1 pump] overload
[Heat circuit 1 pump B] overload
[Heat circuit 1 pump] no flow
[Heat circuit 1 pump B] no flow
[Heat circuit 1 pump] fault
[Heat circuit 2 pump] overload
[Heat circuit 2 pump B] overload
[Heat circuit 2 pump] no flow
[Heat circuit 2 pump B] no flow
[Heat circuit 2 pump] fault
[Heat circuit 3 pump] overload
[Heat circuit 3 pump B] overload
[Heat circuit 3 pump] no flow
[Heat circuit 3 pump B] no flow
[Heat circuit 3 pump] fault
[DHW primary pump] overload
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
15 Fault tracing aids
For explanation, refer to section / subsection…
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Number Name
5121
5122
5201
5202
5211
5212
5221
5222
5231
5001
5002
5003
5101
5102
5111
5112
2564
2565
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
5000
2552
2553
2554
2555
2561
2562
2563
5422
5601
6001
7101
7102
7103
7104
5232
5301
5302
5401
5402
5411
5412
5421
9001
[DHW primary pump B] overload
[DHW prim pump] no flow
[DHW prim pump B] no flow
[DHW primary pump] fault
[DHW sec pump] overload
[DHW sec pump B] overload
[DHW sec pump] no flow
[DHW sec pump B] no flow
[DHW sec pump] fault
[DHW circ pump] overload
[DHW circ pump B] overload
[DHW circ pump] no flow
[DHW circ pump B] no flow
[DHW circ pump] fault
No bus power supply
System time failure
>1 clock time master
Invalid time of day
System time switch failure 1
>1 time switch in HC 1
System time switch failure 2
>1 time switch in HC 2
System time switch failure 3
>1 time switch in HC 3
Hol/sp day prgm failure HC 1
>1 hol/sp day prgm HC 1
Hol/sp day prgm failure HC 2
>1 hol/sp day prgm HC 2
Hol/sp day prgm failure HC 3
>1 hol/sp day prgm HC 3
Hol/sp day prgm failure DHW
>1 hol/sp day prgm DHW
DHW system time switch failure
>1 DHW time switch
Room master failure in HC 1
>1 identical geogr zone [1]
Room master failure in HC 2
>1 identical geogr zone [2]
Room master failure in HC 3
>1 same geogr zone [3]
DHW plant type undefined
>1 identical device address
Fault extension module
Fault extension module
Fault extension module
Fault extension module
[Fault input 1] fault
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
15 Fault tracing aids
For explanation, refer to section / subsection…
219/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Number Name
9002
9003
9004
9401
9402
9403
9404
[Fault input 2] fault
[Fault input 3] fault
[Fault input 4] fault
No pulse signal meter 1
No pulse signal meter 2
No pulse signal meter 3
No pulse signal meter 4
For explanation, refer to section / subsection…
15.2 Troubleshooting
Question Reply
E.g., fault status message [HC 1]
error flow sensor appears although a sensor is connected
During commissioning, the wrong language was selected.
How do I find “my” language?
Check to see if error Fault extension module also occurred. This fault can bring consequential faults on the display
1. Press simultaneously the ESC button and the
OK knob.
2. Select the password level and enter number
112
as the password (same as international emergency call) and confirm by pressing the
OK knob. The language changes to English.
3. Select your language from the Settings > Device
> Language menu.
The controller is completely switched off and the display shows:
Operation locked
Remote operation
How do I start the controller again?
The buttons on the QAW740 room unit do not work
Remote operation (OCI700.1) has set the controller to commissioning mode, which has disabled local operation.
If the controller is not correctly restarted via remote operation, it will maintain this state.
Locally, the controller can only be restarted by disconnecting it from power for a moment
On the controller, the room operating mode is overridden by a higher priority
220/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
15 Fault tracing aids
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Use
Uppercase letters
Lowercase letters
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
16 Appendix
16.1 Configuration diagrams
The use of the configuration diagrams is explained in subsection 3.2.4.
16.1.1 Terminal
The designations of the signal inputs and outputs and of the assigned connection terminals are structured as follows:
Example Explanation
N.X3
N = controller RMH760B
X3 = universal input
A9(2).Y1 A9 = type of extension module
(2) = 2nd extension module of same type
N.Q5
Y1 = analog output DC 0…10 V
N = controller RMH760B
Q5 = relay output
16.1.2 Code letters
Physical inputs and outputs are identified by uppercase code letters:
Code letter
Explanation
N
A2
Heating controller RMH760B
Heating circuit module RMZ782B
A3
A7
A9
DHW module RMZ783B
Universal module RMZ787
Universal module RMZ789
Q…
Y
3P
Switching load (changeover or NO contact)
Analog output DC 0…10 V
3-position output, pairs
Internal signals are identified by lowercase code letters:
Code letter Explanation x Analog or digital a Analog d Digital i Pulse
16.1.3 Configuration choices
Available are a maximum of 4 extension modules, 6 single or twin pumps, and 6 positioning outputs. Configuration is always made as follows:
• From arrow to line
• From uppercase to uppercase letter
• From lowercase to lowercase letter
16.1.4 Examples
The following examples show the type of plant of each plant type group (H0, H0-x, H1x, H2-x, etc.) that contains all possible plant sections (heating circuits, etc.).
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
221/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Basic type H
222/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
4
3
2
1 n
3
2
1
4 utto t b Faul
Rela
Rela y 2 y 1 ode
Timer rat Ope
.
.
abs rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Outs
Room
Room ode g m atin Oper
0 V
. t Fros
10 V
Heat
0...
DC rn tu
Flow
Re ode rat Ope
Flow
0 V open close
0...1
ay rel tion one func
Legi e
0 V clos
0...1
open ode
Timer rat Ope
.
rel rn m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow
Outs
Roo
Room ode g m atin mit g li tin Hea
Oper
10 V close
0...
open close
0...1
open
Heat ging top har ed c
bottom
Forc
Flow rn Retu
Flow
10 V
10 V open close
0...
close
0...
open rn nal
Retu
Flow
sig Flow
0 V e open clos
0...1
2
1
4 r
Outs
Sola
Wind
Disp
Disp
Disp
Disp ode
Timer rat Ope
.
rel rn m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow
Roo
Room ode mit rat g li tin
Ope
Hea
0 V close
0...1
open t Fros rn
V 10
Heat tu
Flow
DC 0...
Re
0 V close
0...1
open
3
2
) 1 re) sure) e ssu alv ff v
shortage pres rpre (Ove ater nder (U
(W
Shuto
0 V e
.
e n r er ase er as rn rn od tur e g
Boile
Bu
Bu
Rele
Re as
Flu e g Flu p.
om t c oin Setp
0 V open close
0...1
open clos
0...1
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
3133W01_H_en
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type H0-7
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4 tton Fau
Rela
Rela y 2 y 1 er ode
Tim ating m Oper
.
abs.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Outs
Room
Room e g mod atin Oper mit g li tin Hea e
0 V
. t Fros
Heat
0...10 V DC rn tu
Flow
Re e g mod atin Oper
Flow
0 V open close
0...1
ay rel tion onella func
Legi
10 V close
0...
open er ode
Tim ating m Oper
.
abs.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Outs
Room
Room e g mod atin mit g li tin Hea
Oper e
0 V clos
0...1
open clos
0...1
open ging m top har ed c
botto
Forc
Flow rn Retu
Flow
10 V
10 V close
0...
open close
0...
open rn Retu
Flow w s Flo
0 V open close
0...1
2
1
4 r
Outs
Sola
Wind
Disp
Disp
Disp
Disp ode
Timer rat Ope
.
abs.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Room
Room ode g m atin Oper
Heat e
0 V clos
0...1
open t Fros rn
V 10
Heat
Flow
DC 0...
Retu
0 V close
0...1
open
2
1 re) ge) e) 3 essur ssu e alv
shorta rpre nderpr off v
(Ove ater (W
Shut
(U r er ase rn er as ode.
rn rn e g
Boile
Bu
Rele
Bu s m
Retu
Flu
ga Flue p.
om t c oin e
10 V
Setp open clos
0...
10 V open close
0...
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
3133W02_H0-7_en
223/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type H1-5
224/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
4
3
2
1 n
2
1 utto
4
3 t b Faul
Rela
Rela y 2 y 1 ode
Timer rat Ope
.
.
abs rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Outs
Room
Room ode g m atin Oper
0 V
. t Fros
Heat
0...10 V DC rn tu
Flow
Re ode rat Ope
Flow
0 V close
0...1
open ay rel tion one func
Legi e
0 V clos
0...1
open ode
Timer rat Ope
.
rel rn m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow
Outs
Roo
Room ode g m atin mit g li tin Hea
Oper
0 V close
0...1
open close
0...1
open
Heat ging top har ed c
bottom
Forc
Flow rn Retu
Flow
0 V
0 V open close
0...1
open close
0...1
rn nal
Retu
Flow
sig Flow
0 V e open clos
0...1
2
1
4 r
Outs
Sola
Wind
Disp
Disp
Disp
Disp ode
Timer rat Ope
.
rel rn m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow
Roo
Room ode mit rat g li tin
Ope
Hea
0 V close
0...1
open t Fros rn
V 10
Heat tu
Flow
DC 0...
Re
10 V close
0...
open
3
2
) 1 re) sure) e ssu alv ff v
shortage pres rpre (Ove ater nder (U
(W
Shuto
.
ode n r er ase er as rn rn tur e g
Boile
Bu
Bu
Rele
Re as
Flu e g Flu p.
om t c oin open close
0...
Setp
10 V e
10 V clos
0...
open
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type H2-5
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
4
2
1
3
4
3
2
1 tton Fau
Rela
Rela y 2 y 1 er ode
Tim ating m Oper
.
abs.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Outs
Room
Room e g mod atin Oper mit g li tin Hea e
0 V
. t Fros
V
Heat
0...10
DC rn tu
Flow
Re e g mod atin Oper
Flow
0 V close
0...1
open ay rel tion onella func
Legi
0 V open close
0...1
er ode
Tim ating m Oper
.
abs.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Outs
Room
Room e g mod atin mit g li tin Hea
Oper e
0 V clos
0...1
open clos
0...1
open ging m top har ed c
botto
Forc
Flow rn Retu
Flow
0 V
0 V open close
0...1
open close
0...1
rn Retu
Flow w s Flo
0 V open close
0...1
2
1
4 r
Outs
Sola
Wind
Disp
Disp
Disp
Disp ode
Timer rat Ope
.
abs.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Room
Room ode g m atin Oper
Heat e
0 V clos
0...1
open t Fros
0 V rn
Heat
Flow
DC 0...1
Retu
0 V close
0...1
open
2
1 re) ge) e) 3 e alv essur ssu
shorta rpre nderpr off v
(Ove ater (W
Shut
(U
.
ode r er ase rn er as rn rn e g
Boile
Bu
Rele
Bu s m
Retu
Flu
ga Flue p.
om t c oin e
0 V
Setp open clos
0...1
10 V open close
0...
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
3133W04_H2-5_en
225/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type H3-5
226/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products ging top
char
bottom ced For
Flow rn Retu
Flow
4
2
1 r Sola
Wind
Disp
Disp
Disp
Disp
Outs
. t Fros
V
Heat
0...10
DC rn tu
Flow
Re
4
3
2
1 n
2
1
4
3 utto t b Faul
Rela
Rela y 2 y 1
0 V close
0...1
open e g mod
Flow atin Oper
.
.
rn
rel
abs
Room
Retu
Flow
Outs
Timer g mode atin
Room
Oper
Room ode t ing m rat Ope
10 V e n re ctio one fun
Legi
10 V close
0...
open
Timer g mode atin Oper
.
abs.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Outs
Room
Room ode ing m rat Ope
Heat e
0 V clos
0...1
open rn Retu nal
Flow
sig Flow e
0 V open clos
0...1
clos
0...
open
Heat
0 V e
0 V e open clos
0...1
open clos
0...1
ode
.
abs.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow g m
Timer atin
Room
Room
Oper e g mod t atin Oper
Heat e
10 V clos
0...
open t Fros
V rn tu
Flow
10
Heat
DC 0...
Re
0 V e clos
0...1
open
) 3 re) 2 ge) 1 ure ress ssu e alv
shorta off v erp rpre (Ove ater
Shut
(Und
(W
.
ode r rn er as rn rn er ase e g etu
Boile
Bu
Rele
Bu s m
R
Flu
ga Flue p.
com point e
10 V
Set open clos
0...
10 V open close
0...
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
3133W05_H3-5_en
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type H4-5
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
4
3
2
1 n
2
1 utto
4
3 t b Faul
Rela
Rela y 2 y 1 ode
Timer rat Ope
.
.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
abs
Outs
Room
Room ode g m atin Oper
0 V
. t Fros
Heat
0...10 V DC rn tu
Flow
Re ode rat Ope
Flow
0 V open close
0...1
ay rel tion one func
Legi e
0 V open clos
0...1
ode
Timer rat Ope
.
rel rn m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow
Outs
Roo
Room ode g m atin mit g li tin Hea
Oper
0 V close
0...1
open close
0...1
open
Heat ging top har ed c
bottom
Forc
Flow rn Retu
Flow
10 V
0 V open close
0...1
close
0...
open rn nal
Retu
Flow
sig Flow
0 V e open clos
0...1
2
1
4 ay 3 r spl
Disp
Di
Disp
Disp
Wind
Sola
Outs ode
Timer rat Ope
.
rel rn m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow
Roo
Room ode mit rat g li tin
Ope
Hea
0 V close
0...1
open t Fros rn
V 10
Heat tu
Flow
DC 0...
Re
0 V close
0...1
open
3
2
) 1 re) sure) ssu e alv ff v
shortage pres rpre (Ove ater nder (U
(W
Shuto
.
er as rn eas tur rn
Boile n r e er ode e g
Bu
Rel
Bu
Re as
Flu e g Flu p.
om t c oin Setp
0 V open close
0...1
e
10 V open clos
0...
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
3133W06_H4-5_en
227/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type H5-7
228/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
4
3
2
1 n
2
1 utto
4
3 t b Faul
Rela
Rela y 2 y 1 ode
Timer rat Ope
.
.
abs rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
Outs
Room
Room ode g m atin Oper
0 V
. t Fros
Heat
0...10 V DC rn tu
Flow
Re ode rat Ope
Flow
0 V open close
0...1
ay rel tion one func
Legi e
0 V clos
0...1
open ode
Timer rat Ope
.
rel rn m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow
Outs
Roo
Room ode g m atin mit g li tin Hea
Oper
0 V close
0...1
open close
0...1
open
Heat ging top har ed c
bottom
Forc
Flow rn Retu
Flow
10 V
0 V open close
0...1
open close
0...
rn nal
Retu
Flow
sig Flow
0 V e open clos
0...1
2
1
4 r
Outs
Sola
Wind
Disp
Disp
Disp
Disp ode
Timer rat Ope
.
rel rn m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow
Roo
Room ode mit rat g li tin
Ope
Hea
0 V close
0...1
open t rn
Fros
V 10 tu
Flow
Re
Heat
DC 0...
10 V close
0...
open
3
2
) 1 re) sure) e ssu alv ff v
shortage pres rpre (Ove ater nder (U
(W
Shuto
.
ode n r er ase er as rn rn tur e g
Boile
Bu
Bu
Rele
Re as
Flu e g Flu p.
om t c oin Setp
0 V open close
0...1
e
10 V clos
0...
open
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
3133W07_H5-7_en
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Plant type H6-7
Building Technologies
HVAC Products ging top har ed c
bottom
Forc
Flow rn Retu
Flow
4
2
1 r Sola
Wind
Disp
Disp
Disp
Disp
Outs
2
1
3
4 n
2
1 utto
4
3 t b Faul
Rela
Rela y 2 y 1 ode
Timer rat Ope
.
.
rn
rel
Room
Retu
Flow
abs
Outs
Room
Room ode g m atin Oper
0 V
. t Fros
Heat
0...10 V DC rn tu
Flow
Re ode rat Ope
Flow
0 V close
0...1
open ay rel tion one func
Legi e
0 V open clos
0...1
ode
Timer rat Ope
.
rel rn m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow
Outs
Roo
Room ode g m atin mit g li tin Hea
Oper
0 V close
0...1
open close
0...1
open
Heat
10 V
0 V open close
0...1
close
0...
open rn nal
Flow ode
Retu
sig
.
Timer
rel rn
Flow m abs.
Retu
Room
Flow rat
Roo
Room
Ope ode
0 V mit e open clos
0...1
rat g li tin
Ope
Hea
0 V close
0...1
open t Fros rn
V 10
Heat tu
Flow
DC 0...
Re close
0...
open
10 V
3
2
) 1 re) sure) ssu e alv ff v
shortage pres rpre (Ove ater nder (U
(W
Shuto er as rn eas tur rn
Boile n r e er ode.
e g
Bu
Rel
Bu
Re as
Flu e g Flu p.
om t c oin Setp
0 V open close
0...1
e
10 V clos
0...
open
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
3133W08_H6-7_en
229/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Note
230/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
16.2 Editable
The list with editable text shall serve as an aid for engineering and commissioning.
Maximum length of the text is 20 characters.
On the password level, user text, such as menu text, fault text and datapoint text, can be reset as follows:
Main menu > Settings > Texts
Operating line Adjustable values / display / remarks
Reset No / Yes
The text of “Device name“, “File name“ and “Business card line 1…4“ on the “Texts“ menu will not be deleted when making a reset.
16.2.1 Heating
Main menu > Settings > Heating circuit 1 (or 2 or 3)
Name of datapoint
Heating circuit 1:
Time switch 1:
Heating circuit 2:
Time switch 2:
Heating circuit 3:
Time switch 3:
User-defined text
16.2.2 DHW
Main menu > Settings > DHW
Name of datapoint
DHW:
DHW time switch:
Circulating pump time switch:
User-defined text
16.2.3 Primary
Main menu > Settings > Primary controller
Name of data point
Primary controller:
User-defined text
16.2.4 Main
Main menu > Settings > Main controller
Name of datapoint
Main controller:
User-defined text
16.2.5 Boiler
Main menu > Settings > Boiler
Name of datapoint
Boiler:
User-defined text
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Main menu > Settings > Boiler > Fault settings > Fault input 1 (or 2 or 3)
Name of datapoint
Fault text:
Fault text:
Fault text:
User-defined text
16.2.6 Faults
Main menu > Settings > Faults > Fault input 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Name of datapoint
Fault text 1:
Fault text 2:
Fault text 3:
Fault text 4:
User-defined text
16.2.7 Meters
Main menu > Settings > Data acquisition > Meter 1 (or 2, 3 or 4)
Name of datapoint
Meter 1:
Meter 2:
Meter 3:
Meter 4:
User-defined text
16.2.8 Device
Main menu > Settings > Texts
Name of datapoint
Device name
File name:
Display input 1:
Display input 2:
Display input 3:
Display input 4:
Business card line 1:
Business card line 2:
Business card line 3:
Business card line 4:
User-defined text
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
231/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
232/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
16 Appendix
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Index
2
2-position control 1-stage burner .............................. 71
2-position control 2-stage burner .............................. 72
A absolute priority....................................................... 175 access levels............................................................. 17 access right............................................................... 17 acknowledgement ................................................... 195 actuating devices ...................................................... 12 aggregate stop in the event of faults....................... 196 analog fault input..................................................... 199 analog inputs............................................................. 34 attenuated outside temperature .............................. 124
B backup value outside temperature.......................... 190 basic configuration .............................................. 19, 32 basic configuration boiler temperature control .......... 64 basic configuration DHW ........................................ 148 boiler designation...................................................... 90 boiler faults................................................................ 86 boiler hydraulics ........................................................ 67 boiler operating modes ............................................. 69 boiler setpoints.......................................................... 69 boiler shutdown......................................................... 81 boiler temperature control ......................................... 63 boiler’s switching differential ..................................... 71 boost heating .......................................................... 133 building time constant ............................................. 124 burner cycling protection........................................... 72 burner hours run counter .......................................... 88 burner output............................................................. 88 burner running time................................................... 71 burner types .............................................................. 66 bus power supply .................................................... 204 business card............................................................ 42
C calendar entry ........................................................... 49 changeover logic....................................................... 60 changeover time ....................................................... 60 charging control via the storage tank temperature.. 156 charging temperature setpoint ................................ 169 charging time .......................................................... 159 checkback signal burner ........................................... 65 checkback signal shutoff valve ................................. 66 circulating pump...................................................... 176 code letters configuration diagrams ........................ 221 comfort heating limit................................................ 130 commissioning .......................................................... 19
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Index commissioning aids boiler .........................................70 commissioning data set.............................................37 communication ........................................................204 communication holidays/special days .......................47 communication time switch .................................39, 44 composite outside temperature...............................124 concluding commissioning ........................................37 configuration diagram........................................30, 221 configuration meter .................................................183 configuration precontrol.............................................97 configuration universal inputs and outputs................34 consumer overrun .....................................................80 contrast (display).......................................................41 control input for holidays ...........................................49 control input for special days.....................................49 control modulating burners........................................75 control of burner stage 2 ...........................................72 control of burner’s basic stage ..................................72 control priorities in the heating circuit......................118 control priorities, DHW heating ...............................153 control signal .............................................................59 counter ....................................................................183 curvepoint (heating curve).......................................125
D data backup...............................................................37 data set .....................................................................37 deleting fault status messages................................202 deletion of fault status messages............................202 design point flow switch ..........................................164 designation of plant type ...........................................19 device address ........................................................204 device information .....................................................38 device name..............................................................42
DHW consumer control ...........................................178
DHW data communication ......................................210
DHW discharging protection ...................................170
DHW heating...........................................................147
DHW module.............................................................31
DHW operating modes............................................151
DHW plant types .....................................................149
DHW priority............................................................174
DHW request 2-position ....................................98, 102
DHW setpoints ........................................................155 digital inputs ..............................................................35 direct DHW heating .................................................160 discharging protection .............................................170 display examples.......................................................17 display inputs ..................................................187, 192 display of meter readings ........................................185 display plant operation, heating circuit ....................118 displaying meter readings .......................................185
233/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
disposal .....................................................................14 district heat parameters, access right........................17 documentation...........................................................13
E economy heating limit..............................................130 economy setpoint increase......................................121 editable text .............................................................230 electric immersion heater ........................................177 electrothermal actuators............................................59 entering the 24-hour program....................................45 entries 24-hour program............................................45 equipment combinations ...........................................12
ESC button ................................................................16 exchange of process data .......................................204 extended fault..................................................195, 197 extension modules ....................................................31 external control of burner ..........................................78 external fault button.................................................195 extra configuration.....................................................33
F fault button.........................................................16, 195 fault display .............................................................202 fault handling .............................................................50 fault handling bus ......................................................40 fault handling in general ............................................35 fault history ..............................................................202 fault input with limit value supervision .....................199 fault inputs .................................................42, 194, 198 fault properties.........................................................195 fault relay.................................................................194 fault status message ...............................................195 fault status message bus.........................................202 fault status message delay......................................198 fault tracing..............................................................217 fault tracing aids ......................................................217 faults in general .......................................................194 faulty relay 1/2 .........................................................201 field of use .................................................................14 flow switch ...............................................................163 flow temperature sensor, DHW primary circuit........175 flow temperature setpoint, influences......................126 flue gas measuring mode ..........................................86 flue gas temperature sensor................................66, 85 flue gas temperature supervision ..............................85 forced charging................................................158, 159 forced draft burner.....................................................75 frost protection for the boiler......................................82 frost protection for the DHW flow ............................172 frost protection for the DHW storage tank ...............172 frost protection for the flow heating circuit...............137 frost protection for the flow, primary controller ........104 frost protection for the plant.......................................51 frost protection for the plant heating circuit .............137
234/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Index frost protection for the plant, primary controller ...... 104 frost protection request 2-position .................... 98, 102 function block boiler temperature control.................. 63 function block DHW heating ................................... 147 function block faults ................................................ 194 function block heating circuit control....................... 111 function block main controller ................................... 97 function block meter ............................................... 183 function block miscellaneous.................................. 187 function block primary controller............................... 97 function blocks.......................................................... 29 fundamentals ............................................................ 44
G general functions ...................................................... 44 geographical zone .................................................. 206 geographical zone (apartm.)................................... 209
H heat demand....................................................... 53, 92 heat demand (DHW)............................................... 174 heat demand heating circuit ................................... 139 heat demand main controller .................................. 100 heat demand outputs................................................ 93 heat demand primary controller.............................. 100 heat demand transformer ................................. 94, 103 heat demand, communication ................................ 211 heat request.............................................................. 92 heat request main controller ................................... 100 heat request modulating ......................................... 101 heat request primary controller............................... 100 heating circuit control.............................................. 111 heating circuit control, weather-compensated ........ 123 heating circuit module............................................... 31 heating curve .................................................. 124, 125 heating curve request 2-position ................ 95, 98, 102 heating limit switch ................................................. 129 heating up brake..................................................... 137 holidays .............................................................. 47, 48
I inflection point heating curve .................................. 125 influence of solar radiation...................................... 128 influence of wind speed .......................................... 129 influences on the flow temperature setpoint ........... 126 info button................................................................. 16 info level ................................................................... 17 installation................................................................. 14
L languages ................................................................. 41 leaving the password level ....................................... 38
LED in fault button .................................................. 195 legionella function relay .......................................... 168 legionella protection................................................ 165
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
limitation of the rate of flow temperature increase .. 137 limitations main controller / primary controller......... 104 list of fault numbers................................................. 217 load balance.............................................................. 88 load control ............................................................... 54 load control DHW.................................................... 170 load control primary controller................................. 103 load control, communication ................................... 211 load control, heating circuit ..................................... 131 locating the secondary flow temperature sensor .... 163 locking a boiler .......................................................... 70 locking logic burner stage 2 ...................................... 73
LTE mode ............................................................... 204
M main controller .......................................................... 97 main controller/primary controller............................ 108 maintained boiler return temperature controlled by the mixing valve .................................................... 83 maintained boiler return temperature through lower consumer setpoints............................................... 82 maintained boiler return temperature with bypass pump..................................................................... 82 maintained secondary circuit .................................. 159 maintenance ............................................................. 14 marking an intervention............................................. 38 maximum charging time.......................................... 159 maximum charging time, direct DHW heating......... 165 maximum limitation boiler temperature ..................... 79 maximum limitation of the boiler temperature ........... 79 maximum limitation of the flow temperature, heating circuit...................................................... 137 maximum limitation of the return temperature, main controller/primary controller ................................ 105 maximum limitation of the room temperature.......... 134 maximum limitation room temperature.................... 134 maximum number of extension modules .................. 32 measured value correction........................................ 35 measuring range universal inputs and outputs ......... 34 meter....................................................................... 183 minimum boiler temperature optimization ................. 79 minimum limitation boiler temperature ...................... 79 minimum limitation of the boiler temperature ............ 79 minimum limitation of the flow temperature, heating circuit .................................................................. 137 miscellaneous ......................................................... 187 mixing valve actuator DC 0…10 V ............................ 59 mixing valve control .................................................. 56 mixing valve control, DHW circuit ........................... 150 mixing valve control, heating circuit ................ 113, 130 mixing valve control, main controller....................... 103 mixing valve control, primary controller................... 103 mixing valve overrun ................................................. 52 mixing valve overrun boiler ..................................... 139 mixing valve overrun primary controller .................. 108
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Index mixing valve overrun, DHW circuit ..........................173 mixing valve overrun, protection against boiler overtemperatures..................................................80 modulating burners, control.......................................75
N naming function block ...............................................42 no priority ................................................................175 nonurgent fault status messages ............................196 normal position fault relay .......................................198
O operating concept......................................................16 operating elements on the controller.........................15 operating elements on the extension module ...........15 operating elements on the operator unit ...................15 operating levels .........................................................17 operating mode relay 1 and 2 .................................116 operating modes DHW............................................151 operation ...................................................................15 operator unit ..............................................................15 optimization heating circuit......................................131 optimization minimum boiler temperature .................79 optimum start control...............................................132 optimum stop control...............................................132 order of extension modules.......................................31 outside sensor.........................................................187 outside temperature ................................................123 outside temperature communication .......................213 outside temperature lock...........................................70 outside temperature relay .......................................191 outside temperature simulation ...............................189 overflow value .........................................................185 overload message twin pumps..................................62
P password level ..........................................................17 plant behavior in the event of faults ........................196 plant operation DHW heating ..................................153 plant operation selector enduser...............................69 plant stop in the event of faults ...............................196 plant types.................................................................21 pressure shocks ........................................................84 primary control DHW heating ..................................168 primary controller ......................................................97 primary controller type 1............................................98 primary controller type 2............................................98 product documentation..............................................13 product range ............................................................11 properties outputs .....................................................28 proportion of windows .............................................124 protection against boiler overtemperatures...............80 protective boiler functions .........................................78 protective boiler startup.............................................80 protective functions, heating circuit .........................134
235/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
pulse limitation DHW circuit.....................................172 pulse limitation, main controller/primary controller ..107 pulse valency...........................................................184 pump control in general.............................................59 pump control main controller .....................................99 pump control primary controller.................................99 pump control, DHW circuit.......................................151 pump control, heating circuit ...................................113 pump kick ..................................................................53 pump kick DHW circuit ............................................174 pump kick general .....................................................80 pump kick heating circuit .........................................139 pump kick main controller/primary controller...........108 pump kick with twin pumps........................................61 pump overrun ............................................................52 pump overrun boiler ................................................139 pump overrun primary controller .............................108 pump overrun, DHW circuit .....................................173 pump overrun, protection against boiler overtemperatures..................................................80
Q quick setback...........................................................133
R radiator exponent ....................................................125 raising the Economy setpoint ..................................121
RC units.....................................................................28 release input boiler ....................................................70 release input frost protection .....................................70 releasing a boiler .......................................................70 reset ........................................................................195 return temperature limitation, heating circuit ...........135 return temperature limitation, primary controller......138 return temperature sensor DHW circuit...................171 room control combination ................................142, 207 room frost protection for the room, heating circuit...137 room model .............................................................132 room operating mode contact..................................115 room operating mode outputs .................................116 room operating modes ............................................113 room temperature acquisition..................................140 room temperature setpoint adjuster, absolute.........121 room temperature setpoint adjuster, relative...........123 room temperature setpoint settings.........................120 room unit communication ........................................210 room unit QAW740..................................................115 run priority .................................................................60
S select-and-press knob ...............................................16 selection of time format .............................................39 sensor assignment ....................................................27 sequence of legionella function ...............................166 service level...............................................................17
236/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Index setpoint increase main controller/primary controller103 setting aids mixing valve control............................... 56 setting level............................................................... 17 setting rules control of mixing valve.......................... 57 setting/resetting meter readings ............................. 185 settings room temperature setpoints ...................... 120 shifting priority ........................................................ 175 short designations extension modules ..................... 29 shutoff valve ....................................................... 67, 68 signal priority .......................................................... 196 simple fault ..................................................... 195, 197 simulation outside temperature .............................. 189 slave pointer function................................................ 85 solar radiation ......................................................... 128 solar zone ............................................................... 214 special days........................................................ 47, 49 standard fault.................................................. 195, 197 storage...................................................................... 14 storage tank charging, primary control (DHW) ....... 156 storage tank sensor at the bottom .......................... 157 storage tank sensor at the top ................................ 157 summer- / wintertime changeover ............................ 39 supervision of flow .................................................... 62 suppression units...................................................... 28 synchronization pulse ............................................... 59 system pump for DHW heating............................... 177
T temperature units...................................................... 41 terminal assignment ................................................. 28 terminal assignment outputs..................................... 28 terminal markings configuration diagrams.............. 221 test mode boiler ........................................................ 70 text designation main controller/primary controller . 108 text entry................................................................... 42 time switch................................................................ 44 time switch operation (master, slave) ..................... 209 timer function .......................................................... 116 topology .................................................................... 12 transport ................................................................... 14 troubleshooting ....................................................... 220 twin pumps ............................................................... 59 type of room temperature sensor ........................... 140 types of meters, units ............................................. 183 types of primary controllers ...................................... 98
U universal fault inputs............................................... 198 urgent fault status messages.................................. 196 use............................................................................ 14 use of configuration diagrams .................................. 29 user level .................................................................. 17 user request DHW .................................................. 152 user request in the room......................................... 115
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
V valve kick .................................................................. 53 valve kick DHW circuit ............................................ 174 valve kick general ..................................................... 80 valve kick heating circuit ......................................... 139
W weather data communication .................................. 213 weather-compensated heating circuit control ......... 123 wind speed ..............................................................129 wind zone ................................................................214 wiring.........................................................................14 wiring test ..................................................................36
Y yearly clock ...............................................................39
Z zones.......................................................................204
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
Index
237/238
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Building Technologies Group
HVAC Products
Gubelstrasse 22
CH – 6301 Zug
Tel. +41 41 724 24 24
Fax +41 41 724 35 22 www.sbt.siemens.com
238/238
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modular Heating Controller RMH760B
© 2007 Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Subject to alteration
CE1P3133en
05.02.2007
Advertisement
Key Features
- Modular design
- Flexible configuration
- Multiple heating circuit control
- DHW control
- Frost protection
- Time-based control
- Holiday mode
- Fault handling
- User-friendly interface